Konica Minolta mc1650ENUserGuide.pdf - Guides - Manuels Utilisateur - Konica Minolta
Revenir à l'accueil Voir une liste d'imprimantes Vous souhaitez un imprimante ou un photocopieur Konica, contactez nous
http://kmbs.konicaminolta.us/wps/wcm/connect/77520bc4-3df3-47c7-9957-0ec7c1bd688b/mc1650ENUserGuide.pdf?MOD=AJPERES&CONVERT_TO=url&CACHEID=77520bc4-3df3-47c7-9957-0ec7c1bd688b
Autre documentation Konica Minolta :
Konica-Minolta-Documentation-2-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-40P-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C450-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C250-2-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-601-3-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-IC-408-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-362-282-222-Francais-Manuel
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-601-2-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-D191F-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-Ineo-7000-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Francais-Manuel
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Francais-Manuel
Konica-Minolta-Ineo-951-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-Ineo-1052-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Ineo-25-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-ineo-163-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-ineo-253-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-282-Francais-documentation-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-documentation-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Di2510-Di3010-Di3510-Advanced-Information-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C550-bizhub-C451-bizhub-C203-bizhub-C253-bizhub-C353-bizhub-C650-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C203-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option2-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-PageScope-Account-Manager-Ver.2.1-User-s-Guide-EFIGS-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C554-C454-C364-C284-C224-User-Guides-part-1-2-French-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-162-210-copier-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-552-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-130f-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-PRO-PRESS-C6000-C7000_ug_Expert-Guide-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2400W-User-Documentation-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-User-Manual-bizhub-C252-Phase3-complete-set-Documentation-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C200-Phase2-User-Manuals-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C200-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C10-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-163-211-User-Manual-Copier-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-1600f-User-Manual-Copier-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-131f-190f-User-Manual-Manuels
Konica-bizhub-131f-190f-Advanced-Information-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-190f-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C253-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C253-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option2-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Francais-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-1690MF-Manuel
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-362-282-222-Français-Manuel
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Français-Manuel
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Français-Manuel
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C220-Anglais-English-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-36-Anglais-English-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Anglais-English-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Anglais-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Pays-Bas-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-283-Russe-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-222-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C203-C253-C353-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-601-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C452-bizhub-C552-bizhub-C652DS-bizhub-C652-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C554-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-652-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C224-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C652DS-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub_c652-c652ds-c552-c452-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-bizhub-C10P-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-bizhub-C10-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-7823-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C20-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C25-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-1600W-Manuel
Konica-Minolta-7823-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5670EN-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5650EN-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-7823-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450II-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-8650DN-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7300-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750EN-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Imprimante-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750DN-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4690MF-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4695MF-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650EN-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650DN-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2500W-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5570-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5550-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5450-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5440DL-Couleur-Manuels
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=25461&productName=magicolor%202490MF
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=24593&productName=magicolor%202500W
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=45226&productName=magicolor%203730DN
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=31144&productName=magicolor%204650DN
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=31144&productName=magicolor%204650EN
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=48849&productName=magicolor%204690MF
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=48858&productName=magicolor%204695MF
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=41338&productName=magicolor%204750DN
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=25354&productName=magicolor%205450
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=29872&productName=bizhub%20C10
http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0719195EN00&name=user.pdf
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/products/copier-print-systems/multifunctional-systems-black-and-white/bizhub-652/downloads/download-details.html?packageId=48057&productName=bizhub%20652
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=25408&productName=bizhub%20C250
http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_scanner-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf
http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_box-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdfhttp://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_enlarge-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf
http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_print-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf
http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_copy-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=49761&productName=bizhub%20C25
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=47425&productName=magicolor%201600W
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=22632&productName=bizhub%20C252
http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0610809EN00&name=bizhub_c252_um_scanner-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=26947&productName=Konica%20Minolta%20190f
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=21374&productName=bizhub%20210
http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0514130EN00&name=bizhub_162_210_UM_FR_1.1.1.pdf
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/about-konica-minolta.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/imprint.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/sitemap.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/terms-of-use.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/conditions-dutilisation.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/identite.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/information-groupe.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/sitemap.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/info-photo.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/cartouche-toner.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieur-couleur.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieurs-couleur.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieurs.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fax-copieur.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fax-imprimante-copieur.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fileadmin/content/fr/rss/flux.xml
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/about-konica-minolta.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/imprint.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/sitemap.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/terms-of-use.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/accueil.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/certificats-et-labels.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/cycle-de-vie-eco-responsable.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/eco-fonctionnalites.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/eco-technologies.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/historique.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/ops-green.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/politique-environnementale.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/carrieres-et-emplois.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/contacts.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/jamais-deux-sans-trois-konica-minolta-est-elu-gamme-de-lannee-par-bli-pour-la-troisieme-ann.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/konica-minolta-parraine-la-9eme-edition-de-la-nuit-des-trophees-de-limprimerie-francaise.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/konica-minolta-stand-c05-profitera-du-salon-it-partners-qui-se-tiendra-les-5-et-6-fevrier-procha.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/la-4eme-edition-des-journees-du-bureau-eco-responsable-par-konica-minolta-business-solutions-fr.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/temoignage-copy-top-retour-sur-un-investissement-reussi.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/informations-sur-lentreprise.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/responsabilite-societale.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/conditions-dutilisation.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/gartner-magic-quadrant-2012.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/identite.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/information-groupe.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/sitemap.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/applications.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/presses-numeriques.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/securite.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/systemes-dimpression-office.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/itraining.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/marches-verticaux.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/ops.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/ops.html/solutions-dentreprise/produits/conseils-et-services/la-prestation-de-consulting-idoc/audit-idoc.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/programme-dsp.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/services-informatiques.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/acces-reserve.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/cleanplanet.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/service-et-garantie.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimante-multifonction.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimante-photocopieur.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-copieur.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-laser-couleur.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-multifonction.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-photocopieuse.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/info-photo.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/photocopieurs-konica-minolta.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/photocopieurs.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/presse-numerique.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/toner-photocopieur.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-cn/corporate/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-fr/corporate/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/contact/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/document_download.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/domain.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/history.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/management.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/message.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/outline.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/symbol_logo.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/vision.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/csr/governance/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-cn/corporate/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/domain.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/history.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/message.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/outline.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/vision.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/csr/csr/governance/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/csr/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/siteinfo/sitemap.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-fr/corporate/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/contact/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/document_download.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/domain.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/history.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/management.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/message.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/outline.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/symbol_logo.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/vision.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/csr/governance/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/01/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/02/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/03/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/04/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html
Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link
User`s Guide Dutch IC-206 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07
Parts Guide Manual Italian ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30
User`s Guide Hungarian ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07
User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) fk-506 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07
User`s Guide English ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.0 2007-06-07
User`s Guide Russian ineo 163/213 - User Manual TWAIN driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07
User`s Guide French ineo 163/213 - User Manual GDI-driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07
User`s Guide Russian ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07
User`s Guide Spanish ineo 163/213 - User Manual GDI-driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07
User`s Guide German ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07
User`s Guide Italian IC-206 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07
User`s Guide Greek ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07
User`s Guide Italian IC-206 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07
User`s Guide Dutch ineo 163/213 - User Manual TWAIN driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07
User`s Guide Dutch IC-206 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07
User`s Guide Dutch ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07
User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) ineo 163/213 - User Manual GDI-driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07
User`s Guide Spanish NC-503 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07
User`s Guide Dutch fk-506 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07
Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for ineo 163,213 i5 2010-01-08
User`s Guide German ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30
User`s Guide French ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30
User`s Guide Spanish ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30
User`s Guide Italian ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30
Declaration of Conformity - Not Related - Declaration of Conformity for ineo 163,213 i6 2011-09-15
Produit Sous-catégorie Langue Titre Version Date de sortie Lien
7013 Guide d’utilisation Italien Konica 7013 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09
7013 Guide d’utilisation Anglais K7013 RS-232C User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08
7013 Guide d’utilisation Français Konica 7013 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-09-08
7013 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7013 Druckerkarte Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09
7013 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7013 Print Server Card Owner's Manual 1.1.0 2004-10-05
7013 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7013 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09
7013 Guide d’utilisation Français K7013 Printer User Manual 1.1.1 2004-09-08
7013 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7013 User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08
7013 Guide d’utilisation Allemand RS232C Schnittstelle Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09
7013 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7013 Printer User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08
7013 Guide d’utilisation Français K7013 RS-232C 1.1.1 2004-09-08
7013 Abrégé d'utilisation Anglais Konica 7013 Quick Reference 1.1.0 2004-10-05
7020 Guide d’utilisation Danois Konica 7022/7130 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-17
7020 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-421 Instruction manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08
7020 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7020/7025/7030/7035 Instruction Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-31
7020 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-011 User's Guide 1.1.0 2004-10-05
7020 Guide d’utilisation Anglais FK-101 User Manual 1.1.0 2004-11-02
7020 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7020 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09
7020 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-011 Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13
7020 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-421 Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13
7022 Guide d’utilisation Portugais Konica 7022 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-17
7022 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-423 User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08
7022 Guide d’utilisation Français Konica 7022/7130 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-16
7022 Guide d’utilisation Français URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07
7022 Guide d’utilisation Italien Konica 7022/7130 Manuale Instruzioni 1.1.1 2004-03-09
7022 Guide d’utilisation Hollandais Konica 7022/7130 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-17
7022 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7022/7130/7135 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09
7022 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica IP-422 Print Controller User Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-10
7022 Guide d’utilisation Portugais URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07
7022 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7022/7130 Instruction Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-31
7022 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-422/IP-423 Printcontroller/PS-343/PS-345 PostScript3 Zubehör Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13
7022 Guide d’utilisation Espagnol URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07
7022 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-422 Printcontroller, PS-343 PostScript3 Zubehör Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13
7022 Guide d’utilisation Espagnol Konica 7022/7130 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-16
7022 Guide d’utilisation Allemand URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07
7022 Guide d’utilisation Italien URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07
7022 Guide d’utilisation Anglais URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.0 2004-09-07
7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-423 User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08
7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Français URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07
7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica IP-422 Print Controller User Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-10
7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Portugais URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07
7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-422/IP-423 Printcontroller/PS-343/PS-345 PostScript3 Zubehör Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13
7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Espagnol URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07
7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-422 Printcontroller, PS-343 PostScript3 Zubehör Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13
7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Allemand URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07
7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Italien URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07
7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Anglais URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.0 2004-09-07
7024 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7024 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09
7025 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-421 Instruction manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08
7025 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7020/7025/7030/7035 Instruction Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-31
Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link
User`s Guide Spanish d131f_d191f - pcl Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-12
User`s Guide Spanish D131F/191F Advanced Information 1.1.1 2007-09-11
User`s Guide Italian D131F/191F Advanced Information 1.1.1 2007-09-11
User`s Guide Dutch D131F/191F User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11
User`s Guide German MB-190 Manual 1.0.0 2007-09-12
User`s Guide French D131F/191F User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11
User`s Guide Danish D131F/191F User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11
Search Results: 1 - 44 of 44
Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link
User`s Guide English ineo+ 6000/7000 User's Guides 1 2010-10-05
User`s Guide German ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-06
User`s Guide English ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-0 2010-10-06
User`s Guide Czech ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Danish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Greek ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Spanish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Finnish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide French ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Italian ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Norwegian ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Polish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Russian ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Czech ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Danish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide German ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Greek ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Spanish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide French ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Italian ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Dutch ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Norwegian ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Polish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Portuguese ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Russian ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Turkish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-29
Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity of ineo+ 6000, ineo+ 7000 i2 2011-03-14
User`s Guide Czech ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Danish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide German ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Greek ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Spanish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Finnish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide French ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Italian ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Dutch ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Norwegian ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Polish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Portuguese ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Russian ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Swedish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Turkish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide English ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-0 2011-11-15
Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity of ineo+ 6000, ineo+ 7000 i1n 2012-11-14
Search Results: 1 - 44 of 44
Search Results: 1 - 6 of 6
Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link
User`s Guide German ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-1 2012-07-27
User`s Guide Spanish ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-1 2012-07-27
User`s Guide French ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-1 2012-07-27
User`s Guide Italian ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-1 2012-07-27
User`s Guide English ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-0 2012-07-27
Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for ineo 1052, ineo 1250 i1n 2012-11-14
Search Results: 1 - 6 of 6
Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link
Quick Guide Swedish ineo +25 Quick Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-1 2012-01-12
Quick Guide Turkish ineo +25 Quick Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-1 2012-01-12
User`s Guide English ineo +25 Reference Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide English ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide German ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide French ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Italian ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Portuguese ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Spanish ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Czech ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Danish ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Dutch ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Finnish ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Greek ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Hungarian ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Norwegian ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Polish ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Russian ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Slovakian ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Swedish ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Turkish ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide English ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide German ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide French ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide Italian ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide Portuguese ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide Spanish ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide Czech ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide Danish ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide Dutch ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide Finnish ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide Greek ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide Hungarian ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide Norwegian ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide Polish ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide Russian ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide Slovakian ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide Swedish ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide Turkish ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide German ineo +25 User Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-1 2012-01-12
User`s Guide English ineo +25 User Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Spanish ineo +25 User Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-1 2012-01-12
User`s Guide French ineo +25 User Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-1 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Italian ineo +25 User Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-1 2012-01-12
Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for ineo+ 25 i1n 2012-11-14
Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link
User`s Guide English ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides 1-1-0 2010-06-16
User`s Guide German ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
User`s Guide Spanish ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
User`s Guide French ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
User`s Guide Italian ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
User`s Guide Dutch ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Quick Guide English ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-0 2010-06-16
Quick Guide Czech ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Quick Guide Danish ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Quick Guide German ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Quick Guide Greek ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Quick Guide Spanish ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides Spanish 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Quick Guide French ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Quick Guide Hungarian ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Quick Guide Italian ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Quick Guide Dutch ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Quick Guide Norwegian ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Quick Guide Polish ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Quick Guide Portuguese ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Quick Guide Russian ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Quick Guide Slovakian ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Quick Guide Turkish ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for ineo 223, 283, 363, 423 i3 2011-09-15
Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for ineo 223, 283, 363, 423 i1n 2012-11-14
Search Results: 101 - 135 of 135
Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link
User`s Guide Hungarian bizhub C250 Phase3 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-11-01
User`s Guide Finnish bizhub C250 User Manuals 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-08-26
User`s Guide Polish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) bizhub C250 Phase2 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-08-26
User`s Guide Russian bizhub C250 Phase2 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-08-26
User`s Guide Swedish bizhub C250 Phase2 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-08-26
User`s Guide Finnish bizhub C250 Phase2 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-08-26
User`s Guide Turkish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Danish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Swedish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Czech bizhub C250 User Manuals 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-08-26
User`s Guide Spanish bizhub C250 Phase2 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-08-26
User`s Guide English User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.0 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Slovakian bizhub C250 User Manuals 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-08-26
User`s Guide Polish bizhub C250 Phase3 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-11-01
User`s Guide Swedish bizhub C250 User Manuals 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-08-26
Blue Angel German Blauer Engel Urkunde für Multifunktionsgerät bizhub C250 (RAL-UZ 114) i1 2006-06-26
Blue Angel German Blauer Engel Vertrag für Multifunktions- gerät bizhub C250 (RAL-UZ 114) 17011 2005-12-29
Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for Konica Minolta bizhub C250, C250P, C252, C252P CEM 2006 - T012B 2006-10-17
ISO Certificate English ISO 14001:2004 certificate for production - Copy Machines, Laser Beam Printers, Shilong Factory, P.R. China 1526-2000-AE-RGC-RvA 2009-03-05
Special Certificates English Konica Minolta Information Security Management System according to ISO/IEC 27001 JQA-IM0473 2011-03-15
User`s Guide English TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide German TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide French TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Italian TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Spanish TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Traditional Chinese TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Korean TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide English HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide German HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide French HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Italian HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Spanish HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Traditional Chinese HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Korean HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
Search Results: 101 - 135 of 135
Alkategória Nyelv Megnevezés Verzió Megjelenés dátuma Link
Felhasználói segédlet Czech bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21
Felhasználói segédlet Multilingual bizhub 40P Installation and Safety Guide 1.1.1 2009-03-11
Felhasználói segédlet English bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21
Felhasználói segédlet Portugál Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet Portuguese (Portugal) bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21
Felhasználói segédlet English Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet Danish bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21
Felhasználói segédlet Polish Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet Italian bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21
Felhasználói segédlet Spanish bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21
Felhasználói segédlet Italian Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet Slovakian Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet Dutch bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21
Felhasználói segédlet Greek Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet German bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21
Felhasználói segédlet Russian Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet Russian bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21
Felhasználói segédlet German Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet Swedish Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet Danish Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet Polish bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21
Felhasználói segédlet Spanish Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet Hungarian Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet Dutch Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet Swedish bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21
Felhasználói segédlet Norwegian Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet Turkish Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet French bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21
Felhasználói segédlet Finnish Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet Czech Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
ISO tanúsítvány English ISO 14001:2004 certificate for production - Copy Machines, Laser Beam Printers, Shilong Factory, P.R. China 1526-2000-AE-RGC-RvA 2009-03-05
Felhasználói segédlet English bizhub 40P Reference Guide 1.1.0 2009-03-11
Felhasználói segédlet French Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Különleges tanúsítványok English Konica Minolta Information Security Management System according to ISO/IEC 27001 JQA-IM0473 2011-03-15
Megfelelőségi nyilatkozat - Not Related - Declaration of Conformity for Konica Minolta bizhub 40P CEM-2007-T018G 2011-09-16
Gyors segédlet Romanian poster bizhub 40P
Search Results: 1 - 50 of 126
Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link
User`s Guide Dutch User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Italian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Hungarian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide French User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Hungarian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Danish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide English User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C352/C250 and bizhub 750/600/bizhub 500/420) 1.1.0 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Spanish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide German User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Turkish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide German User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Greek User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Turkish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Finnish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide German User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Spanish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Slovakian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide English User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C352/C351/C250) 1.0.0 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Greek User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide French User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide English User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.0 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide French User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Greek User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Dutch User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide German Bedienungsanleitungen (komplett) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Danish User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Hungarian User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide English FK-502 Phase 2.5 for bizhub C250/C300/C351/C352/C450 1.0.0 (Phase2.5) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Italian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Swedish User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Danish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Turkish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Dutch User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Norwegian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Czech User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Spanish User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Dutch User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Italian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Greek User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide French User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Polish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Greek User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Polish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Czech User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Finnish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Czech User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
Search Results: 1 - 50 of 126
Search Results: 51 - 100 of 126
Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link
User`s Guide Czech User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Polish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Turkish User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Spanish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Norwegian User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Hungarian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Swedish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Polish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Slovakian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Slovakian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Hungarian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Slovakian User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Czech User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Russian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Polish User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Norwegian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Slovakian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide English User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.0 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide English User Manual bizhub C450 Phase 2.5 (complete set) 1.0.0 (Phase 2.5) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide English Network Fax Operations 1.1.0 2006-08-22
User`s Guide Spanish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Hungarian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Italian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Finnish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Greek User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Turkish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Dutch User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide English User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.0 (Phase 1.8) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Norwegian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide English User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.0 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Slovakian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Swedish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide German Bedienungsanleitungen (komplett) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Italian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Finnish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Italian User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Swedish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Russian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Norwegian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Spanish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Finnish User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Polish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide German User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Czech User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Dutch User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Norwegian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Danish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Turkish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
Search Results: 51 - 100 of 126
Search Results: 101 - 126 of 126
Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link
User`s Guide Danish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Swedish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide French User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Finnish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide English User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.0 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide French User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01
Blue Angel German Blauer Engel Vertrag für Kopierer bizhub C450 (RAL-UZ 114) 16721 2005-07-07
Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for C450, C450P +Print Controller IC-402 +Fax CEM-2005 -T001C 2006-09-01
Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for bizhub C451, bizhub C550, bizhub C650 CEM-2007-T015A 2007-09-07
Blue Angel German Blauer Engel Urkunde für Multifunktionsgerät bizhub C450 (RAL-UZ 114) i1 2006-06-26
ISO Certificate English ISO 14001:2004 certificate for production - Copy Machines, Laser Beam Printers, Shilong Factory, P.R. China 1526-2000-AE-RGC-RvA 2009-03-05
Special Certificates English Konica Minolta Information Security Management System according to ISO/IEC 27001 JQA-IM0473 2011-03-15
User`s Guide English TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide German TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide French TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Italian TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Spanish TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Traditional Chinese TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Korean TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide English HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide German HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide French HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Italian HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Spanish HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Traditional Chinese HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Korean HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
Product Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link
IC-202 User`s Guide French IC-202 for ineo 750/600, Phase 2 - User Manual 1.1.1 2007-01-17
IC-204 User`s Guide Czech IC-204 for ineo 500/420, Phase 2 111 2007-01-10
IC-204 User`s Guide Russian IC-204 for ineo 500/420, Phase 2 111 2007-01-10
IC-204 User`s Guide Danish IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16
IC-204 User`s Guide Italian IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16
IC-204 User`s Guide Hungarian IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16
IC-204 User`s Guide German IC-204 for ineo 500/420, Phase 2 111 2007-01-10
IC-204 User`s Guide English IC-204 for ineo 500/420, Phase 2 111 2007-01-10
IC-204 User`s Guide English IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16
IC-204 User`s Guide Spanish IC-204 for ineo 500/420, Phase 2 111 2007-01-10
IC-204 User`s Guide Danish IC-204 for ineo 500/420, Phase 2 111 2007-01-10
IC-204_ineo User`s Guide Danish IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16
IC-204_ineo User`s Guide Italian IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16
IC-204_ineo User`s Guide Hungarian IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16
IC-204_ineo User`s Guide English IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16
IC-206 User`s Guide Dutch IC-206 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07
IC-206 Parts Guide Manual Italian ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30
IC-206 User`s Guide Italian IC-206 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07
IC-206 User`s Guide Italian IC-206 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07
IC-206 User`s Guide Dutch IC-206 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07
IC-207_generic User`s Guide Spanish IC-207 1-1-1 2008-06-24
IC-207_generic User`s Guide French IC-207 1-1-1 2008-06-24
IC-207_generic User`s Guide Dutch IC-207 1-1-1 2008-06-24
IC-207_generic User`s Guide English IC-207 1-1-0 2008-06-24
IC-208_generic User`s Guide Hungarian ineo 751/601 1.1.1 2008-11-27
IC-208_generic User`s Guide French ineo 751/601 1.1.1 2008-11-27
magicolor 1650EN
User’s Guide
A034-9571-03Ax-1
Thank You
Thank you for purchasing a magicolor 1650EN. You have made an excellent choice.
Your magicolor 1650EN is specially designed for optimal performance in Windows,
Macintosh and Linux environments.
Trademarks
KONICA MINOLTA and the KONICA MINOLTA logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC.
magicolor and PageScope are trademarks or registered trademarks of KONICA
MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
Copyright Notice
Copyright © 2008 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC., Marunouchi Center Building, 1-6-1 Marunouchi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, 100-0005, Japan. All
Rights Reserved. This document may not be copied, in whole or part, nor transferred
to any other media or language, without written permission of KONICA MINOLTA
BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Notice
KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. reserves the right to make
changes to this guide and to the equipment described herein without notice. Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this guide is free of inaccuracies and
omissions. However, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. makes
no warranty of any kind including, but not limited to, any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose with regard to this guide.
KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. assumes no responsibility
for, or liability for, errors contained in this guide or for incidental, special, or consequential damages arising out of the furnishing of this guide, or the use of this guide in
operating the equipment, or in connection with the performance of the equipment
when so operated.x-2
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
This package contains the following materials provided by KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS
TECHNOLOGIES, INC. (KMBT): software included as part of the printing system (“Printing
Software”), the digitally-encoded machine-readable outline data encoded in the special format
and in the encrypted form (“Font Programs”), other software which runs on a computer system
for use in conjunction with the Printing Software (“Host Software”), and related explanatory written materials (“Documentation”). The term “Software” shall be used to describe Printing Software, Font Programs and/or Host Software and also include any upgrades, modified versions,
additions, and copies of the Software.
The Software is being licensed to you under the terms of this Agreement.
KMBT grants to you a non-exclusive sublicense to use the Software and Documentation, provided that you agree to the following:
1. You may use the Software and accompanying Font Programs for imaging to the licensed
output device(s), solely for your own internal business purposes.
2. In addition to the license for Font Programs set forth in Section 1 above, you may use
Roman Font Programs to reproduce weights, styles, and versions of letters, numerals,
characters and symbols (“Typefaces”) on the display or monitor for your own internal business purposes.
3. You may make one backup copy of the Host Software, provided your backup copy is not
installed or used on any computer. Notwithstanding the above restrictions, you may install
the Host Software on any number of computers solely for use with one or more printing systems running the Printing Software.
4. You may assign its rights under this Agreement to an assignee of all of Licensee’s right and
interest to such Software and Documentation (“Assignee”) provided you transfer to
Assignee all copies of such Software and Documentation Assignee agrees to be bound by
all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement.
5. You agree not to modify, adapt or translate the Software and Documentation.
6. You agree that you will not attempt to alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or
decompile the Software.
7. Title to and ownership of the Software and Documentation and any reproductions thereof
shall remain with KMBT and its licensor.
8. Trademarks shall be used in accordance with accepted trademark practice, including identification of the trademark owner’s name. Trademarks can only be used to identify printed
output produced by the Software. Such use of any trademark does not give you any rights
of ownership in that trademark.
9. You may not rent, lease, sublicense, lend or transfer versions or copies of the Software Licensee does not use, or Software contained on any unused media, except as part of the permanent transfer of all Software and Documentation as described above.
10. IN NO EVENT WILL KMBT OR ITS LICENSOR BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL INDIRECT, PUNITIVE OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING
ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST SAVING, EVEN IF KMBT HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY THIRD PARTY. KMBT
OR ITS LICENSOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE
AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY
TO YOU.x-3
11. Notice to Government End Users: The Software is a “commercial item,” as that term is
defined at 48 C.F.R.2.101, consisting of “commercial computer software” and “commercial
computer software documentation,” as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, all U.S. Government End Users acquire the Software with only those rights set forth herein.
12. You agree that you will not export the Software in any form in violation of any applicable
laws and regulations regarding export control of any countries.
About Adobe Color Profile
ADOBE SYSTEMS INCORPORATED
COLOR PROFILE LICENSE AGREEMENT
NOTICE TO USER: PLEASE READ THIS CONTRACT CAREFULLY. BY USING ALL OR ANY
PORTION OF THE SOFTWARE YOU ACCEPT ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF
THIS SOFTWARE YOU ACCEPT ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT USE
THE SOFTWARE.
1. DEFINITIONS In this Agreement, “Adobe” means Adobe Systems Incorporated, a Delaware corporation, located at 345 Park Avenue, San Jose, California 95110. “Software”
means the software and related items with which this Agreement is provided.
2. LICENSE Subject to the terms of this Agreement, Adobe hereby grants you the worldwide,
non-exclusive, nontransferable, royalty-free license to use, reproduce and publicly display
the Software. Adobe also grants you the rights to distribute the Software only (a) as embedded within digital image files and (b) on a standalone basis. No other distribution of the
Software is allowed; including, without limitation, distribution of the Software when incorporated into or bundled with any application software. All individual profiles must be referenced by their ICC Profile description string. You may not modify the Software. Adobe is
under no obligation to provide any support under this Agreement, including upgrades or
future versions of the Software or other items. No title to the intellectual property in the Software is transferred to you under the terms of this Agreement. You do not acquire any rights
to the Software except as expressly set forth in this Agreement.
3. DISTRIBUTION If you choose to distribute the Software, you do so with the understanding
that you agree to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Adobe against any losses, damages or costs arising from any claims, lawsuits or other legal actions arising out of such distribution, including without limitation, your failure to comply with this Section 3. If you
distribute the Software on a standalone basis, you will do so under the terms of this Agreement or your own license agreement which (a) complies with the terms and conditions of
this Agreement; (b) effectively disclaims all warranties and conditions, express or implied,
on behalf of Adobe; (c) effectively excludes all liability for damages on behalf of Adobe; (d)
states that any provisions that differ from this Agreement are offered by you alone and not
Adobe and (e) states that the Software is available from you or Adobe and informs licensees how to obtain it in a reasonable manner on or through a medium customarily used for
software exchange. Any distributed Software will include the Adobe copyright notices as
included in the Software provided to you by Adobe.x-4
4. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY Adobe licenses the Software to you on an “AS IS” basis.
Adobe makes no representation as to the adequacy of the Software for any particular purpose or to produce any particular result. Adobe shall not be liable for loss or damage arising out of this Agreement or from the distribution or use of the Software or any other
materials. ADOBE AND ITS SUPPLIERS DO NOT AND CANNOT WARRANT THE PERFORMANCE OR RESULTS YOU MAY OBTAIN BY USING THE SOFTWARE, EXCEPT
FOR ANY WARRANTY, CONDITION, REPRESENTATION OR TERM TO THE EXTENT
TO WHICH THE SAME CANNOT OR MAY NOT BE EXCLUDED OR LIMITED BY LAW
APPLICABLE TO YOU IN YOUR JURISDICTION, ADOBE AND ITS SUPPLIERS MAKE
NO WARRANTIES, CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS OR TERMS, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, WHETHER BY STATUTE, COMMON LAW, CUSTOM, USAGE OR OTHERWISE AS TO ANY OTHER MATTERS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS, INTEGRATION, SATISFACTORY QUALITY
OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. YOU MAY HAVE ADDITIONAL
RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION. The provisions of Sections 4, 5 and 6 shall survive the termination of this Agreement, howsoever caused, but this
shall not imply or create any continued right to use the Software after termination of this
Agreement.
5. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT WILL ADOBE OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE
TO YOU FOR ANY DAMAGES, CLAIMS OR COSTS WHATSOEVER OR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, OR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST
SAVINGS, EVEN IF AN ADOBE REPRESENTATIVE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH LOSS, DAMAGES, CLAIMS OR COSTS OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY
ANY THIRD PARTY. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS APPLY TO
THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN YOUR JURISDICTION. ADOBE’S
AGGREGATE LIABILITY AND THAT OF ITS SUPPLIERS UNDER OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THIS AGREEMENT SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT PAID FOR THE SOFTWARE. Nothing contained in this Agreement limits Adobe’s liability to you in the event of
death or personal injury resulting from Adobe’s negligence or for the tort of deceit (fraud).
Adobe is acting on behalf of its suppliers for the purpose of disclaiming, excluding and/or
limiting obligations, warranties and liability as provided in this Agreement, but in no other
respects and for no other purpose.
6. TRADEMARKS Adobe and the Adobe logo are the registered trademarks or trademarks of
Adobe in the United States and other countries. With the exception of referential use, you
will not use such trademarks or any other Adobe trademark or logo without separate prior
written permission granted by Adobe.
7. TERM This Agreement is effective until terminated. Adobe has the right to terminate this
Agreement immediately if you fail to comply with any term hereof. Upon any such termination, you must return to Adobe all full and partial copies of the Software in your possession
or control.
8. GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS If any part of the Software is identified as an export controlled item under the United States Export Administration Act or any other export law,
restriction or regulation (the “Export Laws”), you represent and warrant that you are not a
citizen, or otherwise located within, an embargoed nation (including without limitation Iran,
Iraq, Syria, Sudan, Libya, Cuba, North Korea, and Serbia) and that you are not otherwise
prohibited under the Export Laws from receiving the Software. All rights to use the Software
are granted on condition that such rights are forfeited if you fail to comply with the terms of
this Agreement.x-5
9. GOVERNING LAW This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with
the substantive laws in force in the State of California as such laws are applied to agreements entered into and to be performed entirely within California between California residents. This Agreement will not be governed by the conflict of law rules of any jurisdiction or
the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, the application of which is expressly excluded. All disputes arising out of, under or related to this
Agreement will be brought exclusively in the state Santa Clara County, California, USA.
10. GENERAL You may not assign your rights or obligations granted under this Agreement
without the prior written consent of Adobe. None of the provisions of this Agreement shall
be deemed to have been waived by any act or acquiescence on the part of Adobe, its
agents, or employees, but only by an instrument in writing signed by an authorized signatory of Adobe. When conflicting language exists between this Agreement and any other
agreement included in the Software, the terms of such included agreement shall apply. If
either you or Adobe employs attorneys to enforce any rights arising out of or relating to this
Agreement, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover reasonable attorneys’ fees. You
acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and that it is the complete
and exclusive statement of your agreement with Adobe which supersedes any prior agreement, oral or written, between Adobe and you with respect to the licensing to you of the
Software. No variation of the terms of this Agreement will be enforceable against Adobe
unless Adobe gives its express consent, in writing, signed by an authorized signatory of
Adobe.
ICC Profile for TOYO INK Standard Color on Coated paper
(TOYO Offset Coated 2.1)
This ICC Profile (TOYO Offset Coated 2.1) characterizes Japanese offset press on Coated
paper and is fully compatible with ICC profile format.
About “TOYO INK Standard Color on Coated paper”
This is the standard for color reproduction of sheet-fed offset press on Coated paper made by
TOYO INK MFG.CO., LTD. (“TOYO INK”).
This standard is made from printing test with using TOYO INK’s sheet-fed offset printing inks
and TOYO INK’s own printing conditions.
“TOYO INK Standard Color on Coated paper” is compatible with “JAPAN COLOR”.
Agreement
1. The reproduction of images on a printer or a monitor using this ICC Profile do not completely match the TOYO INK Standard Color on Coated paper.
2. Any and all copyrights of this ICC Profile shall remain in TOYO INK; therefore you shall not
transfer, provide, rent, distribute, disclose, or grant any rights in this ICC Profile to any third
party without the prior written consent of TOYO INK.
3. In no event will TOYO INK its directors, officers, employees or agents be liable to you for
any consequential or incidential, either direct or indirect, damages(including damages for
loss of business profits, business interruption, loss of business information, and the like)
arising out of the use or inability to use this ICC Profile.
4. TOYO INK shall not be responsible for answering any question related to this ICC Profile.x-6
5. All company names and product names used in this document is the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holder.
This ICC Profile made by GretagMacbeth ProfileMaker and granted TOYO INK certain license
to distribute by GretagMacbeth AG.
TOYO Offset Coated 2.1 © TOYO INK MFG. CO., LTD. 2004
DIC STANDARD COLOR PROFILE LICENSE AGREEMENT
IMPORTANT: PLEASE READ THIS STANDARD COLOR PROFILE LICENSE AGREEMENT
("LICENSE AGREEMENT") CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE DIC STANDARD COLOR
PROFILE, INCLUDING THE DIC STANDARD SFC_AM2.0, DIC STANDARD SFM_AM2.0,
DIC STANDARD SFU_AM2.0, DIC STANDARD SFC_FM2.0, DIC WAKIMIZU SFC_AM2.0,
DIC WAKIMIZU SFC_FM2.0, DIC ABILIO SFC_AM1.0, DIC HY-BRYTE SFC_AM1.0, DIC
STANDARD WEBC_AM2.1, DIC STANDARD WEBC_FM2.1, DIC NEWSCOLOR_AM1.0, DIC
NEWSCOLOR_FM1.0, PROVIDED BY DIC HEREWITH, AND ANY CORRESPONDIMG
ONLINE OR ELECTRONC DOCUMENTATION AND ALL UPDATES OR UPGRADES OF THE
ABOVE THAT ARE PROVIDED TO YOU (COLLECTIVELY, THE "PROFILE").
THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU (EITHER AN INDIVIDUAL OR, IF ACQUIRED BY OR FOR AN ENTITY, AN ENTITY) AND DIC CORPORATION,
A JAPANESE COMPANY ("DIC"). THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT PROVIDES A LICENSE TO
USE THE PROFILE AND CONTAINS WARRANTY INFORMATION AND LIABILITY DISCLAIMERS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ALL OF THESE TERMS, YOU MAY
NOT USE THE PROFILE.
1. License Grant
DIC grants you a gratis non-exclusive and non-transferable license to use the Profile and to
allow your employees and authorized agents, if any, to use the Profile, solely in connection
with their work for you, subject to all of the limitations and restrictions in this License Agreement.
2. Ownership
The foregoing license gives you limited license to use the Profile. You will own the rights in
the media containing the recorded Profile, but DIC retains all right, title and interest, including all copyright and intellectual property rights, in and to, the Profile and all copies thereof.
All rights not specifically granted in this License Agreement, including all copyrights, are
reserved by DIC.
3. Term
a. This License Agreement is effective until terminated.
b. You may terminate this License Agreement by notifying DIC in writing of your intention to
terminate this License Agreement and by destroying, all copies of the Profile in your possession or control.
c. DIC may terminate this License Agreement without prior notice to you if you fail to comply with any of the terms and conditions of this License Agreement (either directly or
through your employees or agents), retroactive to the time of such failure to comply. In
such event, you must immediately stop using the Profile and destroy all copies of the Profile in your possession or control.
d. All provisions in this License Agreement relating to warranty disclaimers (Section 5) and
the limitation of liability (Section 6) shall survive any termination of this License Agreement.x-7
4. License Method and Restrictions
a. You may install and use the Profile on a single desktop computer; provided, however,
that, notwithstanding anything contrary contained herein, you may not use the Profile on
any network system or share, install or use the Profile concurrently on different computers,
or electronically transfer the Profile from one computer to another or over a network.
b. You may not make or distribute copies, fix, alter, merge, modify, adapt, sublicense, transfer, sell, rent, lease, gift or distribute all or a portion of the Profile, or modify the Profile or
create derivative works based upon the Profile.
c. You acknowledge that the Profile is not intended for any usage which may cause death
or physical injury or environmental damage and agree not to use the Profile for such usage.
d. You shall not use the Profile to develop any software or other technology having the
same primary function as the Profile, including but not limited to using the Profile in any
development or test procedure that seeks to develop like software or other technology, or to
determine if such software or other technology performs in a similar manner as the Profile.
e. DIC and other trademarks contained in the Profile are trademarks or registered trademarks of DIC in Japan and/or other countries. You may not remove or alter any trademark,
trade names, product names, logo, copyright or other proprietary notices, legends, symbols
or labels in the Profile. This License Agreement does not authorize you to use DIC’s or its
licensors’ names or any of their respective trademarks.
5. WARRANTY DISCLAIMER
a. THE PROFILE IS PROVIDED TO YOU FREE OF CHARGE, AND ON AN "AS-IS"
BASIS, IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE TERMS AND COONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE
AGREEMENT. DIC PROVIDES NO TECHNICAL SUPPORT, WARRANTIES OR REMEDIES FOR THE PROFILE.
b. DIC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND REPRESENTATIONS, WHETHER
EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NONINFRINGEMENT, TITLE AND QUIET ENJOYMENT. YOU SHALL ASSUME AND BE
FULLY LIABLE AND RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL RISKS IN CONNECTION WITH YOUR
USE OF THE PROFILE. DIC DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE PROFILE IS FREE OF
DEFECTS OR FLAWS OR WILL OPERATE WITHOUT INTERRUPTION, AND IS NOT
RESPONSIBLE FORCORRECTING OR REPAIRING ANY DEFECTS OR FLAWS, FOR
FEE OR GRATIS. NO RIGHTS OR REMEDIES WILL BE CONFERRED ON YOU
UNLESS EXPRESSLY GRANTED HEREIN.
6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
DIC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, COVER OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE), ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF, OR INABILITY TO
USE, THE PROFILE AND BASED ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY INCLUDING
BREACH OF CONTRACT, BREACH OF WARRANTY, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), PRODUCT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE, EVEN IF DIC OR ITS REPRESENTATIVES HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY SHALL APPLY TO ALL ASPECTS OF
THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.
7. General
a. This License Agreement shall be governed and construed in accordance with the laws of
Japan, without giving effect to principles of conflict of laws. If any provision of this License
Agreement shall be held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be contrary to law, that provision will be enforced to the maximum extent permissible, and the remaining provisions of x-8
this License Agreement will remain in full force and effect. You hereby consent to the
exclusive jurisdiction and venue of Tokyo District Court to resolve any disputes arising
under this License Agreement.
b. This License Agreement contains the complete agreement between the parties with
respect to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous agreements or understandings, whether oral or written. You agree that any varying or additional
terms contained in any written notification or document issued by you in relation to the Profile licensed hereunder shall be of no effect.
c. The failure or delay of DIC to exercise any of its rights under this License Agreement or
upon any breach of this License Agreement shall not be deemed a waiver of those rights or
of the breach.
For EU member states only
This symbol means: Do not dispose of this product
together with your household waste!
Please contact the Local Authority for appropriate disposal instructions. In the case of a new device being
purchased, the used one can also be given to our dealer
for appropriate disposal. Recycling of this product will
help to conserve natural resources and prevent potential
negative consequences for the environment and human
health caused by inappropriate waste handling.
This product complies with RoHS (2002/95/EC) directive.Contents
Contents x-9
1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 1-1
Getting Acquainted with Your Printer .......................................................... 1-2
Space Requirements................................................................................... 1-2
Printer Parts ................................................................................................ 1-4
Front View............................................................................................. 1-4
Rear View ............................................................................................. 1-5
Front View with Options ........................................................................ 1-6
Rear View with Options......................................................................... 1-7
Printer Driver CD/DVD ................................................................................... 1-8
PostScript Drivers ....................................................................................... 1-8
PCL Drivers................................................................................................. 1-8
PPD Files .................................................................................................... 1-8
Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD .......................................................... 1-9
Utilities......................................................................................................... 1-9
Documentation.................................................................................... 1-10
System Requirements ................................................................................. 1-11x-10 Contents
2 Using the Printer Driver ................................................................................ 2-1
Selecting Driver Options/Defaults (for Windows) ....................................... 2-2
Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/Server 2003/2000
(KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA
mc1650 PS) .......................................................................................... 2-2
Uninstalling the Printer Driver (for Windows) ............................................. 2-4
Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/Server 2003/2000
(KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA
mc1650 PS) .......................................................................................... 2-4
Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows) ...................................... 2-5
Windows Server 2008/Vista.................................................................. 2-5
Windows XP/Server 2003 ..................................................................... 2-5
Windows 2000 ...................................................................................... 2-5
Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver .............................................. 2-6
Common Buttons ........................................................................................ 2-6
OK......................................................................................................... 2-6
Cancel................................................................................................... 2-6
Apply ..................................................................................................... 2-6
Help....................................................................................................... 2-6
Favorite Setting..................................................................................... 2-6
Advanced Tab (PostScript Printer Driver Only)........................................... 2-7
Basic Tab .................................................................................................... 2-8
Layout Tab .................................................................................................. 2-8
Cover Page Tab.......................................................................................... 2-8
Watermark/Overlay Tab.............................................................................. 2-8
Quality Tab.................................................................................................. 2-9
Other Tab.................................................................................................... 2-9
Limitations on printer driver functions installed with Point and Print ......... 2-10
3 Using the Status Monitor (Windows Only) .................................................. 3-1
Working with the Status Monitor .................................................................. 3-2
Introduction ................................................................................................. 3-2
Operating Environment ............................................................................... 3-2
Opening the Status Monitor ........................................................................ 3-2
Using the Status Monitor............................................................................. 3-2
Recognizing Status Monitor Alerts .............................................................. 3-3
Recovering from a Status Monitor Alert ...................................................... 3-3
Closing the Status Monitor ........................................................................... 3-3
4 Printer Control Panel and Configuration Menu .......................................... 4-1
About the Control Panel ................................................................................ 4-2
Control Panel Indicators and Keys.............................................................. 4-2
Toner Supply Indicators .............................................................................. 4-4
Configuration Menu Overview ...................................................................... 4-5
Menu ........................................................................................................... 4-5
MAIN MENU................................................................................................ 4-6Contents x-11
PRINT MENU........................................................................................ 4-6
PAPER MENU ...................................................................................... 4-8
QUALITY MENU ................................................................................. 4-13
INTERFACE MENU ............................................................................ 4-17
SYSTEM DEFAULT............................................................................ 4-22
SERVICE MENU................................................................................. 4-26
LANGUAGE MENU................................................................................... 4-27
5 Media Handling .............................................................................................. 5-1
Print Media ..................................................................................................... 5-2
Media Types ................................................................................................... 5-3
Plain Paper.................................................................................................. 5-3
Thick Stock.................................................................................................. 5-4
Envelopes ................................................................................................... 5-5
Labels.......................................................................................................... 5-6
Letterhead................................................................................................... 5-7
Postcards .................................................................................................... 5-7
Printable Area ................................................................................................ 5-8
Envelopes ................................................................................................... 5-9
Page Margins.............................................................................................. 5-9
Loading Media .............................................................................................. 5-10
Tray 1 (Multipurpose Tray)........................................................................ 5-10
Loading Plain Paper............................................................................ 5-10
Other Media ........................................................................................ 5-13
Loading Envelopes ............................................................................. 5-13
Loading Labels/Postcard/Thick Stock and Letterhead........................ 5-16
Tray 2........................................................................................................ 5-18
Loading Plain Paper............................................................................ 5-18
Duplexing ..................................................................................................... 5-21
Output Tray .................................................................................................. 5-22
Media Storage .............................................................................................. 5-23
6 Replacing Consumables ............................................................................... 6-1
Replacing Consumables ............................................................................... 6-2
About Toner Cartridges............................................................................... 6-2
Replacing a Toner Cartridge................................................................. 6-5
Removing All Toner Cartridges........................................................... 6-12
Replacing the Imaging Cartridge............................................................... 6-16
Replacing the Fuser Unit........................................................................... 6-19
7 Maintaining the Printer .................................................................................. 7-1
Maintaining the Printer .................................................................................. 7-2
Cleaning the Printer ....................................................................................... 7-4
Exterior........................................................................................................ 7-4
Interior......................................................................................................... 7-5
Cleaning the Media Feed Roller ........................................................... 7-5x-12 Contents
Cleaning the Print Head Window .......................................................... 7-9
Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for Tray 2 ....................................... 7-18
Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for the attachment.......................... 7-20
Cleaning the Duplex Feed Rollers ...................................................... 7-22
8 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................ 8-1
Introduction .................................................................................................... 8-2
Printing a Configuration Page ...................................................................... 8-2
Preventing Media Misfeeds ........................................................................... 8-4
Understanding the Media Path ..................................................................... 8-5
Clearing Media Misfeeds .............................................................................. 8-5
Media Misfeed Messages and Clearing Procedures................................... 8-6
Clearing a Media Misfeed in the Printer................................................ 8-7
Clearing a Media Misfeed From Tray 1............................................... 8-13
Clearing a Media Misfeed From Tray 2............................................... 8-14
Clearing a Media Misfeed from the Duplex Option ............................. 8-17
Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds ..................................................... 8-19
Solving Other Problems .............................................................................. 8-21
Solving Problems with Printing Quality .................................................... 8-25
Status, Error, and Service Messages ......................................................... 8-31
Standard Status Messages....................................................................... 8-31
Error Messages (Warning)........................................................................ 8-32
Error Messages (Operator Call)................................................................ 8-34
Service Messages..................................................................................... 8-36
9 Installing Accessories ................................................................................... 9-1
Introduction .................................................................................................... 9-2
Tray 2 .............................................................................................................. 9-3
Installing Tray 2........................................................................................... 9-3
Duplex Option ................................................................................................ 9-6
Installing Attachment................................................................................... 9-6
Installing the Duplex Option ........................................................................ 9-8
A Appendix ........................................................................................................A-1
Technical Specifications ...............................................................................A-2
Printer..........................................................................................................A-2
Consumable Life Expectancy Chart............................................................A-5
Our Concern for Environmental Protection ................................................A-6
What is an ENERGY STAR product? ...................................................A-6Introduction1-2 Getting Acquainted with Your Printer
Getting Acquainted with Your Printer
Space Requirements
To ensure easy operation, consumable replacement and maintenance,
adhere to the recommended space requirements detailed below.
Front View
496 mm (19.5")
100 mm
(3.9")
396 mm (15.6")
707 mm (27.8")
100 mm
(3.9")
380 mm (14.9")
520 mm (20.5")
127 mm
(5.0")
245 mm
(9.6")
275 mm (10.8")
100 mm
(3.9")
Side ViewGetting Acquainted with Your Printer 1-3
" The option appears shaded in the above illustrations.
" The option appears shaded in the above illustrations.
Side View with Options
922 mm (36.3")
100 mm
(3.9")
435 mm (17.1")
637 mm (25.0")
157 mm
(6.2")
130 mm
(5.1")
245 mm
(9.6")
392 mm (15.4")
(when Tray 2 and the duplex option are installed)
100 mm
(3.9")
Side View with Options
919 mm (36.2")
100 mm
(3.9")
435 mm (17.1")
582 mm (22.9")
157 mm
(6.2")
127 mm
(5.0")
245 mm
(9.6")
337 mm (13.3")
(when the attachment and duplex option are installed)
100 mm
(3.9")1-4 Getting Acquainted with Your Printer
Printer Parts
The following drawings illustrate the parts of your printer referred to throughout this guide, so please take some time to become familiar with them.
Front View
1—Output tray
2—Control panel
3—Front cover
4—Dust cover
5—Tray 1 (Multipurpose tray)
6—Top cover
7—Fuser unit
8—Fuser separator levers
9—Fuser cover lever
10—Imaging cartridge
11—Toner cartridge
1
2
3
4
6
5
8
8
7
10
11
9
7
11
10Getting Acquainted with Your Printer 1-5
Rear View
1—Power switch
2—Power connection
3—USB port
4—10Base-T/100Base-TX
Ethernet Interface port
3
4
2
11-6 Getting Acquainted with Your Printer
Front View with Options
(when Tray 2 is installed)
1—Lower feeder unit (Tray 2)
(when Tray 2 and duplex option are
installed)
1—Duplex option
2—Lower feeder unit (Tray 2)
(when the attachment and duplex
option are installed)
1—Duplex option
2—Attachment
1
1
2
1
2Getting Acquainted with Your Printer 1-7
Rear View with Options
(when Tray 2 and duplex option are
installed)
1—Duplex option
2—Lower feeder unit (Tray 2)
(when the attachment and duplex
option are installed)
1—Duplex option
2—Attachment
1
2
1
21-8 Printer Driver CD/DVD
Printer Driver CD/DVD
PostScript Drivers
PCL Drivers
PPD Files
" For details on the installation of the Windows printer drivers, refer to
the Installation Guide.
Operating System Use/Benefit
Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/
Server 2003/2000
These drivers give you access to all of
the printer features. See also “Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows)” on page 2-5.
Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/
Server 2003 for 64bit
Operating System Use/Benefit
Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/
Server 2003/2000
These drivers give you access to all of
the printer features. See also “Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows)” on page 2-5.
Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/
Server 2003 for 64bit
Operating System Use/Benefit
Macintosh OS X (10.2.8/10.3/10.4/
10.5)
These files are required in order to
use the printer driver for each operating system.
For details of the Macintosh and Linux
printer drivers, refer to the Reference
Guide on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD.
Macintosh OS X Server (10.2/10.3/
10.4/10.5)
Red Hat Linux 9.0, SuSE Linux 8.2Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD 1-9
Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD
Utilities
Utility Use/Benefit
Status Monitor (Windows only) The current status of the printer in
addition to the status of consumables
and error information can be viewed.
For details, refer to chapter 3 “Using
the Status Monitor (Windows Only)” .
PageScope Net Care Device Manager
Printer management functions such as
status monitoring and network settings
can be accessed.
For details, refer to the PageScope
Net Care Device Manager User’s
Guide on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD.
PageScope Network Setup Using the TCP/IP and IPX protocols,
basic network printer settings can be
specified.
For details, refer to the PageScope
Network Setup User Manual on the
Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD.
PageScope Plug and Print This utility automatically detects a new
printer connected to the network and
creates a print object on the Windows
print server.
For details, refer to the PageScope
Plug and Print Quick Guide on the
Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD.
PageScope NDPS Gateway This network utility enables printers
and KONICA MINOLTA multifunctional
products to be used in an NDPS environment.
For details, refer to the PageScope
NDPS Gateway User Manual on the
Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD.
PageScope Direct Print This application provides functions for
sending PDF and TIFF files directly to
a printer to be printed.
For details, refer to the PageScope
Direct Print User’s Guide on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD.1-10 Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD
Documentation
Documentation Use/Benefit
Installation Guide This manual provides details on the
initial operations that must be performed in order to use this printer,
such as setting up the printer and
installing the drivers.
User’s Guide (this manual) This manual provides details on general daily operations, such as using
the drivers and control panel and
replacing consumables.
Reference Guide This manual provides details on
installing the Macintosh and Linux
drivers and on specifying settings for
the network, and the printer management utility.
Service & Support Guide The Need Assistance sheet provides
information on product support and
servicing.System Requirements 1-11
System Requirements
Personal computer
– Pentium 2: 400 MHz (Pentium 3: 500 MHz or higher is recommended)
– PowerPC G3 or later (G4 or later is recommended)
– Macintosh equipped with an Intel processor
Operating System
– Microsoft Windows
Windows Server 2008 Standard/Enterprise, Windows Server 2008
Standard/Enterprise x64 Edition,
Windows Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/Ultimate/Business/Enterprise,
Windows Vista Home Basic /Home Premium /Ultimate/Business /
Enterprise x64 Edition,
Windows XP Home Edition/Professional (Service Pack 1 or later; Service Pack 2 or later is recommended),
Windows XP Professional x64 Edition,
Windows Server 2003,
Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition,
Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4 or later)
– Mac OS X (10.2.8 or later; We recommend installing the newest
patch), Mac OS X Server (10.2 or later)
– Red Hat Linux 9.0, SuSE Linux 8.2
Free hard disk space
– Approximately 20 MB of free hard disk space for printer driver and Status Monitor
– Approximately 128 MB of free hard disk space for image processing
RAM
128 MB or more
CD/DVD-ROM drive
I/O interface
– 10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet interface port
– USB 2.0 High-Speed compliant port
" For details on the Macintosh and Linux printer drivers, refer to the Reference Guide on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD.1-12 System RequirementsUsing the Printer
Driver2-2 Selecting Driver Options/Defaults (for Windows)
Selecting Driver Options/Defaults
(for Windows)
Before you start working with your printer, you are advised to verify/change
the default driver settings. Also, in case you have options installed, you
should “declare” the options in the driver.
Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/Server 2003/2000 (KONICA
MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS)
1 Choose the driver’s properties as follows:
– (Windows Server 2008/Vista)
From the Start menu, click Control Panel, then Hardware and
Sound, and then click Printers to open the Printers directory.
Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6 or KONICA
MINOLTA mc1650 PS printer icon, and then click Properties.
– (Windows XP/Server 2003)
From the Start menu, choose Printers and Faxes to display the
Printers and Faxes directory. Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA
mc1650 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS printer icon and
choose Properties.
– (Windows 2000)
From the Start menu, choose Settings and then Printers to display
the Printers directory. Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA mc1650
PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS printer icon and choose
Properties.
2 If you have installed options, proceed with the next step. Otherwise, skip
to step 9.
3 Select the Configure tab.
4 Check that the installed options are correctly listed. If not, proceed with
the next step. Otherwise, continue with step 8.
5 Click the Refresh to automatically configure installed options.
" The Refresh is available only if bi-directional communication is
available with the printer; otherwise it is grayed out.
6 From the Device Options list, select an option, one at a time, and then
select Enable or Disable from the Settings menu.
7 Click Apply.
8 Select the General tab.
9 Click Printing Preferences.
The Printing Preference dialog box appears.Selecting Driver Options/Defaults (for Windows) 2-3
10 Select the default settings for your printer, such as the default media format you use, on the appropriate tabs.
11 Click Apply.
12 Click OK to exit from the Print preference dialog box.
13 Click OK to exit from the Properties dialog box.2-4 Uninstalling the Printer Driver (for Windows)
Uninstalling the Printer Driver
(for Windows)
This section describes how to uninstall the printer driver if necessary.
" You must have administrator privileges in order to uninstall the printer
driver.
" If the User Account Control window appears when uninstalling on Windows Server 2008/Vista, click the Allow button or the Continue button.
Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/Server 2003/2000 (KONICA
MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS)
1 Close all applications.
2 Choose the Uninstall Program as follows:
– (Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/Server 2003)
From the Start menu, choose All programs, KONICA MINOLTA,
magicolor 1650, and then Uninstall Printer Driver.
– (Windows 2000)
From the Start menu, choose Programs, KONICA MINOLTA, magicolor 1650, and then Uninstall Printer Driver.
3 When the Uninstall dialog box appears, select the name of the driver to be
deleted, and then click the Uninstall button.
4 Click Uninstall.
5 Click OK, and restart your computer.
6 The printer driver will be uninstalled from your computer.Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows) 2-5
Displaying Printer Driver Settings
(for Windows)
Windows Server 2008/Vista
1 From the Start menu, click Control Panel, then Hardware and Sound,
and then click Printers to open the Printers directory.
2 Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6, or KONICA MINOLTA
mc1650 PS printer icon, and then click Printing Preferences.
Windows XP/Server 2003
1 From the Start menu, choose Printers and Faxes to display the Printers
and Faxes directory.
2 Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA
mc1650 PS printer icon and choose Printing Preferences.
Windows 2000
1 From the Start menu, point to Settings, and then click Printers to display
the Printers directory.
2 Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA
mc1650 PS printer icon and choose Printing Preferences.2-6 Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver
Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver
Common Buttons
The buttons described below appear on each tab.
OK
Click to exit the Properties dialog box, saving any changes made.
Cancel
Click to exit the Properties dialog box without saving any changes made.
Apply
Click to save all changes without exiting the Properties dialog box.
Help
Click to view the help.
Favorite Setting
This allows the current settings to be saved. To save the current settings,
specify the desired settings, and then click Add. Specify the settings
described below, and then click OK.
Name: Type in the name of the settings to be saved.
Icon: Select an icon from the icon list to easily identify the settings.
The selected icon appears in the drop-down list.
Sharing: Specify whether or not the settings to be saved can be used by
other users logged onto the computer.
Comment: Add a simple comment to the settings to be saved.
Afterward, the saved settings can be selected from the drop-down list. To
change the registered setting, click Edit.
In addition, predefined settings can be selected.
The predefined settings are those for "2-up", "Photo" and "Grayscale".
Select Defaults from the drop-down list to reset the functions in all tabs to
their default values.Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver 2-7
Printer View
Click the button to display an image of the printer in the figure area.
When this button is clicked, it changes to the Paper View button (when a tab
other than the Quality tab is selected) or the Quality View button (when the
Quality tab is selected).
" This button does not appear on the Advanced tab.
Paper View
Click the button to display a sample of the page layout in the figure area.
When this button is clicked, it changes to the Printer View button.
" This button does not appear on the Quality tab.
Quality View
Click the button to display a sample of the settings selected in the Quality tab.
When this button is clicked, it changes to the Printer View button.
" This button appears only when the Quality tab is selected.
Default
Click the button to reset the settings to their defaults.
" This button does not appear on the Advanced tab.
" When this button is clicked, the settings in the displayed dialog box
are reset to their defaults. The settings on other tabs are not changed.
Advanced Tab (PostScript Printer Driver Only)
The Advanced Tab allows you to
Select whether to enable or disable the settings for advanced printing
functions (such as booklet printing)
Specify the PostScript output method
Specify whether or not the error messages of a print job are printed
Print a mirror image
Specify whether or not the application can directly output PostScript data2-8 Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver
Basic Tab
The Basic Tab allows you to
Specify the orientation of the media
Specify the size of the original document
Select the output media size
Zoom (expand/reduce) documents
Specify the paper source
Specify the type of media
Specify the number of copies
Layout Tab
The Layout Tab allows you to
Print several pages of a document on the same page (N-up printing)
Print a single copy for enlargement and print several pages (PCL printer
driver only)
Specify booklet printing (when the duplex option is installed)
Rotate the print image 180 degrees
Specify whether or not blank pages are printed (PCL printer driver only)
Specify duplex (double-sided) printing (when the duplex option is
installed)
Adjust the binding margin
Adjust the printing position (PCL printer driver only)
Cover Page Tab
The Cover Page Tab allows you to
Print front and back cover pages and separator pages
Specify the paper tray that contains the paper for the front and back cover
pages and separator pages
Watermark/Overlay Tab
" Be sure to use overlays with print jobs with a paper size and orientation that matches the overlay form.
In addition, if settings have been specified for “N-up” or “Booklet” in
the printer driver, the overlay form cannot be adjusted to match the
specified settings.Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver 2-9
The settings in the "Watermark" function of the Watermark/Overlay tab allows
you to
Select the watermark to be used
Create, edit or delete watermarks
Print a frame around watermarks
Print transparent (shaded) watermarks
Print the watermark on only the first page
Print the watermark repeatedly throughout the all pages
The settings in the "Overlay" function of the Watermark/Overlay tab allows
you to
Select the form to use
Add or delete overlay files
Create a form (PCL printer driver only)
Specify that the document and form are printed overlapping (PCL printer
driver only)
Display the form information (PCL printer driver only)
Print the form on All Pages, First Page, Even Pages and Odd Pages
Place the form in back of the document or in front on the printed document (PCL printer driver only)
Quality Tab
The Quality Tab allows you to
Switch between color and grayscale printing
Specify the printer color settings (Quick Color)
Specify the resolution for the printout
Specify the amount of details in graphic patterns (PCL printer driver only)
Specify the image compression method (PCL printer driver only)
Select whether or not economy printing is used
Specify the format of fonts that are to be downloaded
Print using the printer's fonts
Other Tab
The Other Tab allows you to
Select that Microsoft Excel sheets are not to be divided when printing2-10 Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver
Select that the white background of Microsoft PowerPoint data does not
hide overlay files (PCL printer driver only)
Send a notification by e-mail when printing is finished
Shows the version information for the printer driver
Limitations on printer driver functions installed with
Point and Print
If Point and Print is performed with the following server and client combinations, there are limitations on some printer driver functions.
Server and client combinations
Server: Windows Server 2008/Server 2003/XP/2000/Vista
Client: Windows Server 2008/Server 2003/XP/2000/Vista
Functions with limitations applied
Booklet, Skip Blank Pages, Front Cover Page, Back Cover Page, Separator Page, Create Overlay, Print Overlay, WatermarkUsing the Status
Monitor
(Windows Only)3-2 Working with the Status Monitor
Working with the Status Monitor
Introduction
The Status Monitor shows information about the current status of the printer.
The Status Monitor can be installed from the Utilities and Documentation CD/
DVD.
For details on the installation, refer to the Reference Guide on the Utilities
and Documentation CD/DVD.
Operating Environment
The Status Monitor can be used on computers running Windows Vista/XP/
Server 2003/2000 connected to the printer using the Ethernet connection.
Opening the Status Monitor
Use one of the following steps to open the Status Monitor:
Windows Vista/XP/Server 2003—From the Start menu, choose All Programs, KONICA MINOLTA, and then Status Monitor. Double-click the
Status Monitor icon displayed in the taskbar.
Windows 2000—From the Start menu, choose Programs, KONICA
MINOLTA, and then Status Monitor. Double-click the Status Monitor icon
displayed in the task bar.
Using the Status Monitor
Status Tab
Select Printer—Selects the printer whose status is displayed. In addition,
the messages that appear in the message window of the selected printer
are displayed.
Graphic—Normally, the Konica Minolta logo is displayed. When a printer
error is detected, a graphic representation of the printer is shown, and the
location of the problem is indicated. When the background of the printer
graphic is red or yellow, there is an error and the job has been interrupted.
Advanced Options—Click Advanced Options to display the Advanced
Options dialog box. From the Advanced Options dialog box, select
whether the Status Monitor automatically starts when the operating system is started and whether error notifications are sent by e-mail.
Order Supplies—Click Order Supplies to automatically access the order
page for supplies. The address of the page that is accessed can be specified from the Advanced Options dialog box.Recognizing Status Monitor Alerts 3-3
Printer Alerts—Displays text messages that alert you of conditions such
as low toner.
Recovery Instructions—Provides you with explanations of what you
need to do in order to correct problems and recover from error conditions.
Consumables Tab
Displays the usage status (approximate percentage remaining) of each toner
consumables.
Order Supplies—Click Order Supplies to automatically access the order
page for supplies. The address of the page that is accessed can be specified from the Advanced Options dialog box.
Refresh—Rechecks the supplies and displays their status.
" Click Help to display windows containing explanations of the Status
Monitor functions. Refer to this help for detailed information.
" The percentages remaining for the consumables displayed using the
Status Monitor may be different from the actual amounts and should
be used only as reference.
Recognizing Status Monitor Alerts
When the Status Monitor detects a printing problem, the icon on the Windows
task bar changes from green (normal) to yellow (warning), orange or red
(error), depending on the severity of the printer problem.
Recovering from a Status Monitor Alert
When the Status Monitor notifies you of a printing problem, double-click its
icon on the Windows task bar to open the Status Monitor. The Status Monitor
identifies what type of error has occurred.
Closing the Status Monitor
Click Close to close the Status Monitor window. To exit Status Monitor,
right-click the Status Monitor icon in the taskbar, and then click Exit.3-4 Closing the Status MonitorPrinter Control
Panel and
Configuration
Menu4-2 About the Control Panel
About the Control Panel
The control panel, located on the top of the printer, allows you to direct the
printer’s operation. In addition, it displays the current status of the printer,
including any condition that needs your attention.
Control Panel Indicators and Keys
No. Indicator Off On
1 The printer is not ready
to accept data.
The printer is ready to
accept data.
2 No problem. The printer requires
operator attention
(usually accompanied by
a status message in the
message window.)
Ready
Error
Cancel
8
MESSAGE
WINDOW
3
1
2
6 5 4
7
Ready
ErrorAbout the Control Panel 4-3
No. Indicator Function
3 Moves up in the menu structure
Within a menu choice that is changeable character by character, scrolls upward through the
available characters
4 Moves right in the menu structure
Moves right through the available menu choices
5 Moves down in the menu structure.
Within a menu choice that is changeable character by character, scrolls downward through
the available characters
6 Moves left in the menu structure
Moves left through the available menu choices
7 Cancels the currently displayed menu choice
Allows you to cancel one or all print jobs that
are currently being printed or processed:
1. Press the Cancel key.
2. Press the ) or * keys to select either CANCEL
JOB/CURRENT or CANCEL JOB/ALL
3. Press the Menu Select key.
The print job(s) is (are) cancelled.
8 Enters the menu system
Moves down in the menu structure
Selects the displayed menu choice
Cancel4-4 About the Control Panel
Toner Supply Indicators
The indicators shown below will appear, indicating the amount of toner that
remains in the yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C), and black (K) toner cartridges.
I D L EConfiguration Menu Overview 4-5
Configuration Menu Overview
The configuration menu accessible from the control panel is structured as
shown below.
Menu
" If MAIN MENU/SYSTEM DEFAULT/SECURITY/CONFIG/
ENABLE is set to ON, the user password or administrator password
must be entered to display the main menu. The displayed menu is different according to the authority of the entered password.
For details on the default passwords, refer to “SYSTEM DEFAULT” on
page 4-22.
PRINT MENU
PAPER MENU
INTERFACE MENU
SYSTEM DEFAULT
SERVICE MENU
QUALITY MENU
IDLE
LANGUAGE
MAIN MENU4-6 Configuration Menu Overview
MAIN MENU
PRINT MENU
With this menu, printer information, such as the configuration page and the
demo page, can be printed.
" All factory default values are shown in bold.
MENU MAP Settings YES/NO
Prints the menu map.
CONFIGURATION
Settings YES/NO
Prints the configuration page.
STATISTICS
PAGE
Settings YES/NO
Prints the statistics page such as the number of pages
printed.
POSTSCRIPT
PCL
MENU MAP
DIRECTORY LIST
CONFIGURATION
FONT LIST
DEMO
STATISTICS PAGE
PRINT MENUConfiguration Menu Overview 4-7
" The amounts remaining for the supplies status and coverage information displayed using the statistics page may be different from the
actual amounts and should be used only as reference.
FONT LIST POST
SCRIPT
Settings YES/NO
Prints the PostScript font list.
PCL Settings YES/NO
Prints the PCL font list.
DIRECTORY
LIST
Settings YES/NO
Prints the directory list of the flash.
DEMO Settings YES/NO
Prints the demo page.4-8 Configuration Menu Overview
PAPER MENU
With this menu, the media used for printing can be managed.
" * This menu item appears only if the duplex option is installed.
** These menu items appear only if an optional lower feeder unit is
installed.
TRAY 1 MODE
TRAY1 MEDIA SIZE
MEDIA TYPE
TRAY2
**
MEDIA SIZE
CUSTOM SIZE
AUTO CONTINUE
INPUT TRAY
PAGE RECOVERY
DUPLEX
*
ORIENTATION
LENGTH (xx)
WIDTH (xx)
PAPER MENU
TRAY CHAINING
**
MAP
**
LOGICAL TRAY 0
MODE
LOGICAL TRAY 9
~Configuration Menu Overview 4-9
" All factory default values are shown in bold.
INPUT
TRAY
TRAY 1
MODE
Settings AUTO/CASSETTE
When printing from Tray 1, select whether the paper
size and paper type set from the printer driver or the
MEDIA SIZE and MEDIA TYPE settings set by
selecting MAIN MENU/PAPER MENU/INPUT
TRAY/TRAY 1 in the control panel have priority.
If AUTO is selected, the printer driver settings have
priority during printing.
If CASSETTE is selected, printing is performed
when the printer driver settings and the control
panel settings are all the same.
TRAY1 MEDIA
SIZE
Settings LETTER/LEGAL/
EXECUTIVE/A4/A5/B5/
B5(ISO)/G LETTER/
STATEMENT/FOLIO/UK
QUARTO/FOOLSCAP/G
LEGAL/C6/DL/
J-POSTCARD/KAI 16/
KAI 32/16K/SP FOLIO/
OFICIO/CUSTOM
Select the setting for the size of paper
loaded into Tray 1.
"The default setting for North
America is LETTER. The default
setting for all other regions is A4.
MEDIA
TYPE
Settings PLAIN PAPER/LABELS/
LETTERHEAD/ENVELOPE/
POSTCARD/THICK1/
THICK2
Select the setting for the type of paper
loaded into Tray 1.
TRAY2 MEDIA
SIZE
Settings LETTER/A4
Select the setting for the size of paper
loaded into Tray 2.
"The default setting for North
America is LETTER. The default
setting for all other regions is A4.4-10 Configuration Menu Overview
CUSTOM
SIZE
WIDTH
(xx)
Settings 92-216 mm
(3.63-8.50 inch)*
* With inch measurements, the
decimal point does not appear
in the message window.
For example, 3.63 inches
appears as 363.
Specify the width of the custom-sized
paper loaded into Tray 1.
"On the model for North America,
the settings appear in inches and
the menu item appears as
WIDTH(IN). On the models for
all other regions, the settings
appear in millimeters and the
menu item appears as
WIDTH(MM).
LENGTH
(xx)
Settings With plain paper
195-356 mm
(7.69-14.01 inch)*
With thick stock
184-297 mm
(7.24-11.70 inch)*
* With inch measurements, the
decimal point does not appear
in the message window.
For example, 7.69 inches
appears as 769.
Specify the length of the custom-sized
paper loaded into Tray 1.
"On the model for North America,
the settings appear in inches and
the menu item appears as
LENGTH(IN). On the models for
all other regions, the settings
appear in millimeters and the
menu item appears as
LENGTH(MM).Configuration Menu Overview 4-11
AUTO
CONTINUE
Settings ON/OFF
If OFF is selected, an error occurs if the size of
paper being printed on is different from the size of
paper specified in the printer driver.
If ON is selected, no error occurs if the size of paper
being printed on is different from the size of paper
specified in the printer driver.
TRAY
CHAINING
Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected and the specified paper tray runs
out of paper during printing, a paper tray loaded with
paper of the same size is automatically selected so
printing can continue.
If NO is selected and the specified paper tray runs
out of paper, printing stops.
MAP MODE Settings ON/OFF
Select whether or not the Tray Mapping
function is used.
LOGICAL
TRAY
0-9
Settings PHYSICAL TRAY 1/
PHYSICAL TRAY 2
Specify whether jobs received from
another manufacturer’s printer driver are
printed using Tray 1 or Tray 2.
PHYSICAL TRAY 2 is the default only
for LOGICAL TRAY 2. The default for
all other logical trays is PHYSICAL
TRAY 1.
DUPLEX Settings OFF/SHORTEDGE/LONGEDGE
If LONGEDGE is selected, the pages will be printed on both sides
of the paper for long-edge binding.
If SHORTEDGE is selected, the pages will be printed on both
sides of the paper for short-edge binding.
ORIENTATION
Settings PORTRAIT/LANDSCAPE
Specify the orientation of the media.4-12 Configuration Menu Overview
PAGE
RECOVERY
Settings ON/OFF
Select whether or not the page is printed again after recovering
from a paper misfeed.
If ON is selected, the page that was misfed is printed again.
If OFF is selected, printing continues with the next page without
printing the misfed page.Configuration Menu Overview 4-13
QUALITY MENU
With this menu, settings for the print quality can be specified.
BLACK
CYAN
MAGENTA
TONER OUT ACTION
REPLACE TONER
AIDC REQUEST AIDC
QUALITY MENU
YELLOW
P/H CLEAN UP
MODE
REMOVE ALL
IMAGE REFRESH
ECONOMY PRINT
DUPLEX SPEED4-14 Configuration Menu Overview
" All factory default values are shown in bold.
REPLACE
TONER
BLACK Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected, the carousel rotates to the black
toner cartridge, so that it can be replaced.
For details on replacing the toner cartridge, refer to
“Replacing a Toner Cartridge” on page 6-5.
CYAN Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected, the carousel rotates to the cyan
toner cartridge, so that it can be replaced.
For details on replacing the toner cartridge, refer to
“Replacing a Toner Cartridge” on page 6-5.
MAGENTA Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected, the carousel rotates to the
magenta toner cartridge, so that it can be replaced.
For details on replacing the toner cartridge, refer to
“Replacing a Toner Cartridge” on page 6-5.
YELLOW Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected, the carousel rotates to the yellow
toner cartridge, so that it can be replaced.
For details on replacing the toner cartridge, refer to
“Replacing a Toner Cartridge” on page 6-5.
REMOVE
ALL
Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected, the printer enters REMOVE ALL
mode.
This mode is used when removing all toner cartridges.
For details on removing all toner cartridges, refer to
“Removing All Toner Cartridges” on page 6-12.
TONER
OUT
ACTION
Settings STOP/CONTINUE
If STOP is selected, printing stops when the toner cartridge is
empty.
If CONTINUE is selected, printing continues even if the toner
cartridge is empty. However, the printing result are not
guaranteed. If printing is continued, the message "X TONER
LIFE END" appears and printing stops.Configuration Menu Overview 4-15
AIDC REQUEST
AIDC
Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected, image adjustments are
performed.
"The AIDC function consumes toner.
MODE Settings ON/OFF
If ON is selected, the image adjustments are
applied.
If OFF is selected, image adjustments are not
applied.
P/H
CLEAN
UP
Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected, the printer enters P/H CLEAN UP mode.
P/H CLEAN UP mode is a mode that allows the user to clean the
print head window more easily. The print head window is not
cleaned automatically.
For details on cleaning the print head window, refer to “Cleaning
the Print Head Window” on page 7-9.
IMAGE
REFRESH
Settings YES/NO
Use when thin white horizontal lines appear at intervals on
images.
"The IMAGE REFRESH function consumes toner.
ECONOMY
PRINT
Settings ON/OFF
Select whether to print graphics with a reduced density by
reducing the amount of toner that is used.
If ON is selected, the amount of toner used is reduced when
printing.
If OFF is selected, the amount of toner used is not reduced when
printing.4-16 Configuration Menu Overview
DUPLEX
SPEED
Settings AUTOMATIC/SPEED/QUALITY
Select the print speed for double-sided printing.
If AUTOMATIC is selected, the print speed is automatically
selected.
If SPEED is selected, the print speed has priority; however, the
print quality may decrease.
If QUALITY is selected, the print quality has priority; therefore,
the print speed will decrease while the print quality may increase.Configuration Menu Overview 4-17
INTERFACE MENU
With this menu, interface settings can be specified.
The printer must be rebooted after any setting in the ETHERNET menu (for
example, the TCP/IP address) is changed.
Therefore, the following message appears when the configuration menu is
exited (the + key is repeatedly pressed) after a setting has been changed.
Select YES, and then press the Menu Select key to reboot the printer.
Otherwise, turn off the printer, and then turn the printer on again after a few
seconds.
ETHERNET
*
INTERFACE MENU
TCP/IP ENABLE
IPV4 DHCP/BOOTP
IPV4 ADDRESS
DEFAULT ROUTER
SUBNET MASK
ENABLE AUTO IP
IPV6 ENABLE
IP SERVICES ENABLE HTTP IDENTIFIER4-18 Configuration Menu Overview
" * If MAIN MENU/SYSTEM DEFAULT/SECURITY/CONFIG/
ENABLE is set to ON, the administrator password must be entered to
display this menu.
For details on the default administrator password, refer to “SYSTEM
DEFAULT” on page 4-22.
IPX/SPX FRAME TYPE
ETHERNET SPEED
DISABLE 802.1X
PS PROTOCOL
ENABLE
JOB TIMEOUT
USB
ENABLE AUTO
GLOBAL PREFIX
DISABLE FILTERS
DISABLE IPSECConfiguration Menu Overview 4-19
" All factory default values are shown in bold.
ETHERNET
TCP/IP ENABLE Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected, TCP/IP is enabled.
If NO is selected, TCP/IP is disabled.
IPV4 DHCP/
BOOTP
Settings YES/NO
Select whether or not the IP
address is automatically
acquired.
If YES is selected, the IP address
is automatically acquired.
If NO is selected, the IP address
is not automatically acquired.
IPV4
ADDRESS
Settings 192.168.001.002
Set the IPv4 address for this
printer on the network.
Use the +, ,, *, and ) keys to
specify the value.
If the IP address is manually
specified, DHCP/BOOTP is
automatically set to NO.
DEFAULT
ROUTER
Settings 000.000.000.000
Specify the IPv4 address of the
router if one is on the network.
Use the +, ,, *, and ) keys to
specify the value.
SUBNET
MASK
Settings 000.000.000.000
Specify the subnet mask for the
network.
Use the +, ,, *, and ) keys to
specify the value.4-20 Configuration Menu Overview
ENABLE
AUTO IP
Settings YES/NO
Select whether or not the IPv4
address is automatically acquired
when DHCP/BOOTP and PING,
ARP are not functioning or when
there is no response.
If YES is selected, the IP address
is automatically acquired.
If NO is selected, the IP address
is not automatically acquired.
IPV6 ENABLE Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected, IPv6 is
enabled.
If NO is selected, IPv6 is disabled.
IDENTIFIER
Displays the Link-Local address.
ENABLE
AUTO
Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected, auto
configuration of IPv6 is enabled.
If NO is selected, auto
configuration of IPv6 is disabled.
GLOBAL
PREFIX
Displays the global address.
IP SERVICES
ENABLE
HTTP
Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected, HTTP is enabled.
If NO is selected, HTTP is disabled.
DISABLE
FILTERS
Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected, filter is disabled.
DISABLE
IPSEC
Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected, IPsec is disabled.Configuration Menu Overview 4-21
IPX/SPX FRAME
TYPE
Settings AUTO/802.2/802.3/ETHER
II/SNAP
Specify the protocol used with NetWare.
ETHERNET
SPEED
Settings AUTO/100 FULL DUPLEX/100 HALF
DUPLEX/10 FULL DUPLEX/10 HALF
DUPLEX
Specify the transmission speed for the network and the
transmission method for bi-directional transmission.
DISABLE
802.1X
Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected, IEEE802.1x function is disabled.
PS PROTOCOL
Settings BINARY/QUOTED BINARY
Select whether PostScript jobs are received in the binary
format or the quoted format.
USB ENABLE Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected, USB is enabled.
If NO is selected, USB is disabled.
JOB
TIMEOUT
Settings 0-60-999
Specify the length of time (in seconds) until the print job
being received is timed out when USB is being used.4-22 Configuration Menu Overview
SYSTEM DEFAULT
With this menu, settings can be specified to adjust the operation of the printer,
such as the time until the machine enters Energy Saver mode.
" If MAIN MENU/SYSTEM DEFAULT/SECURITY/CONFIG/
ENABLE is set to ON, the administrator password must be entered to
display this menu.
PRINT QUALITY
EMULATIONS DEFAULT
AUTO DEFAULT
ERROR PAGE
PCL LINE TERMINATION
FONT PITCH SIZE
FONT NUMBER
POINT SIZE
SYMBOL SET
STARTUP OPTIONS START PAGE
DATE & TIME
ENERGY SAVER
SYSTEM DEFAULT
COLOR MODE
POSTSCRIPTConfiguration Menu Overview 4-23
" All factory default values are shown in bold.
PRINT
QUALITY
Settings HIGH/STANDARD
Select the image quality for prints.
COLOR
MODE
Settings COLOR/GRAYSCALE
Specify whether printing is in full color or grayscale.
"The color mode setting specified from the printer driver
has priority over the setting specified for this menu item.
FORMAT ERASE FLASH
RESTORE/SAVE RESTORE FACTORY
SAVE CUSTOM
RESTORE CUSTOM
SECURITY CONFIG ENABLE
SET ADMIN PASSWD
SET USER PASSWD4-24 Configuration Menu Overview
EMULATIONS
DEFAULT Settings AUTOMATIC/POSTSCRIPT/PCL5/
PCL XL/HEX DUMP
Specify the printer control language.
If AUTOMATIC is selected, the printer automatically
selects the printer control language from the data
stream.
AUTO
DEFAULT
Settings PCL5/POSTSCRIPT
Select the printer description language when it
cannot be identified from the data.
POSTSCRIPT
ERROR
PAGE
Settings ON/OFF
Select whether or not an error page is
printed when a PostScript error occurs.
PCL LINE
TERMINATION
Settings CR=CR LF=CRLF/
CR=CR LF=LF/
CR=CRLF LF=LF/
CR=CRLF LF=CRLF
Select the definitions of the CR/LF codes
in the PCL language.
FONT PITCH
SIZE
Settings 44-1000-9999
Specify the bitmap font size in
the PCL language.
FONT
NUMBER
Settings 0-32767
Specify the font used with the
PCL language.
The font numbers that appear
correspond to the PCL font
list. For details on printing the
font list, refer to “PRINT
MENU” on page 4-6.
POINT
SIZE
Settings 400-1200-
99975
Specify the outline font size in
the PCL language.
SYMBOL
SET
Specify the symbol set used
with the PCL language.
The default setting is PC8.Configuration Menu Overview 4-25
STARTUP
OPTIONS
START
PAGE
Settings YES/NO
Select whether or not a startup page is printed when
the printer is turned on.
If YES is selected, the startup page is printed when
the printer is turned on.
If NO is selected, the startup page is not printed.
DATE &
TIME
Settings yyyymmdd:hhmmss
Set the date and time on the time-of-day (TOD) clock.
The settings appear in the following order: year, month, day:hour,
minutes, seconds.
ENERGY
SAVER
Settings 15 MINUTES/30 MINUTES/1 HOUR/
2 HOURS
Specify the length of time until the machine enters Energy Saver
mode.
"2 HOURS is displayed only on 120 V units.
SECURITY
CONFIG ENABLE Settings ON/OFF
Select whether or not the menus are
protected with a password.
If ON is selected, all menus are protected
with a password.
SET
USER
PASSWD
Settings: 1
Specify the user password for displaying
the user menus. The specified password
is applied only if MAIN MENU/SYSTEM DEFAULT/SECRITY/CONFIG/
ENABLE is set to ON.
The password can contain a maximum of
16 characters.
"Empty passwords are not allowed.4-26 Configuration Menu Overview
SERVICE MENU
With this menu, the service representative can adjust the printer and perform
maintenance operations. This menu cannot be used by the user.
SET
ADMIN
PASSWD
Settings: the last four digits of the printer
serial number
Specify the administrator password for
displaying the administrator menus. The
specified password is applied only if
MAIN MENU/SYSTEM DEFAULT/
SECRITY/CONFIG/ENABLE is set to
ON.
The password can contain a maximum of
16 characters.
"Empty passwords are not allowed.
FORMAT ERASE
FLASH
Settings YES/NO
Select whether or not to initialize the flash RAM.
If YES is selected, the flash RAM is initialized.
RESTORE
/SAVE
RESTORE
FACTORY
Settings YES/NO
Select whether or not all menu items are reset to
their initial settings.
If YES is selected, all menu items are reset to their
initial settings.
SAVE
CUSTOM
Settings YES/NO
Select whether or not all changed menu settings are
saved.
If YES is selected, all changes are saved.
RESTORE
CUSTOM
Settings YES/NO
Select whether or not menu items are reverted to
the previously saved settings.
If YES is selected, the menu items revert to the
previously saved settings.Configuration Menu Overview 4-27
LANGUAGE MENU
ENGLISH/FRENCH/
GERMAN/SPANISH/
ITALIAN/PORTUGUESE/DUTCH/CZECH/
JAPANESE/POLISH
The display language of the message window
can be changed to the required language.
The default setting is English.
The language selections appear in the message window in the corresponding language.
For example, GERMAN appears as DEUTSCH.4-28 Configuration Menu OverviewMedia Handling5-2 Print Media
Print Media
Specifications
" For custom sizes, use the printer driver to specify the settings within
the ranges shown in the above table.
Media Media Size Tray* Duplex
Inch Millimeter
Letter 8.5 x 11.0 215.9 x 279.4 1/2 Yes
Legal 8.5 x 14.0 215.9 x 355.6 1 No
Statement 5.5 x 8.5 140.0 x 216.0 1 No
Executive 7.25 x 10.5 184.0 x 267.0 1 No
A4 8.2 x 11.7 210.0 x 297.0 1/2 Yes
A5 5.9 x 8.3 148.0 x 210.0 1 No
B5 (JIS) 7.2 x 10.1 182.0 x 257.0 1 No
B5 (ISO) 6.9 x 9.8 176.0 x 250.0 1 No
Folio 8.3 x 13.0 210.0 x 330.0 1 No
SP Folio 8.5 x 12.69 215.9 x 322.3 1 No
Foolscap 8.0 x 13.0 203.2 x 330.2 1 No
UK Quarto 8.0 x 10.0 203.2 x 254.0 1 No
Government Letter 8.0 x 10.5 203.2 x 266.7 1 No
Government Legal 8.5 x 13.0 216.0 x 330.0 1 No
Envelope DL 4.3 x 8.7 110.0 x 220.0 1 No
Envelope C6 4.5 x 6.4 114.0 x 162.0 1 No
Japanese Postcard 3.9 x 5.8 100.0 x 148.0 1 No
16K 7.7 x 10.6 195.0 x 270.0 1 No
Kai 16 7.3 x 10.2 185.0 x 260.0 1 No
Kai 32 5.1 x 7.3 130.0 x 185.0 1 No
Oficio Mexico 8.5 x 13.5 215.9 x 342.9 1 No
Custom Size, Minimum** 3.6 x 7.7 92.0 x 195.0 1 No
Custom Size, Maximum** 8.5 x 14.0 216.0 x 356.0 1 No
Notes: * Tray 1 = Multipurpose
Tray 2 = Plain paper only
** With thick stock
The minimum size is 3.6 x 7.25 inch (92.0 x 184.0 mm).
The maximum size is 8.5 x 11.7 inch (216.0 x 297.0 mm).Media Types 5-3
Media Types
Before purchasing a large quantity of special media, do a trial print with the
same media and check the print quality.
Keep media on a flat, level surface in its original wrapper until it is time to
load it. For a list of approved media, refer to printer.konicaminolta.com.
Plain Paper
Use plain paper that is
Suitable for plain paper laser printers, such as standard or recycled office
paper.
Note
Do not use the media types listed below. These could cause poor print
quality, media misfeeds, or damage to the printer.
DO NOT use media that is
Coated with a processed surface (such as carbon paper, digitally gloss-
coated media, and colored paper that has been treated)
Carbon backed
Unapproved iron-on transfer media (such as heat-sensitive paper,
heat-pressure paper, and heat-press transfer paper)
Cold-water-transfer paper
Pressure sensitive
Designed specifically for inkjet printers (such as superfine paper, glossy
film, and postcards)
Already been printed on by another printer, copier, or fax machine
Dusty
Wet (or damp)
Capacity Tray 1 Up to 200 sheets, depending on the paper
weight
Tray 2 Up to 500 sheets, depending on the paper
weight
Orientation Face up
Driver
Media Type
Plain paper
Weight 60 to 90 g/m² (16 to 24 lb bond)
Duplexing Only Letter/A4 plain paper can be autoduplexed.5-4 Media Types
" Keep media between 15% and 85% relative humidity. Toner does
not adhere well to moist or wet paper.
Layered
Adhesive
Folded, creased, curled, embossed, warped, or wrinkled
Perforated, three-hole punched, or torn
Too slick, too coarse, or too textured
Different in texture (roughness) on the front and back
Too thin or too thick
Stuck together with static electricity
Composed of foil or gilt; too luminous
Heat sensitive or cannot withstand the fusing temperature (180°C
[356°F])
Irregularly shaped (not rectangular or not cut at right angles)
Attached with glue, tape, paper clips, staples, ribbons, hooks, or buttons
Acidic
Any other media that is not approved
Thick Stock
Paper thicker than 90 g/m2
(24 lb bond) is referred to as thick stock. Test all
thick stock to ensure acceptable performance and to ensure that the image
does not shift.
Capacity Tray 1 Up to 50 thick stock sheets, depending on
their thickness
Tray 2 Not supported
Orientation Face up
Driver
Media Type
Thick 1 (91 to163 g/m2
)
Thick 2 (164 to 209 g/m2
)
Weight 91 to 209 g/m² (25 to 55.9 lb)
Duplexing Not supportedMedia Types 5-5
DO NOT use thick stock that is
Mixed with any other media in Tray 1 (as this will cause printer misfeeding)
Envelopes
Print on the front (address) side only. Some parts of the envelope consist of
three layers of paper—the front, back, and flap. Anything printed in these layered regions may be lost or faded.
Use envelopes that are
Envelope C6 or Envelope DL
(Other envelope sizes are not supported.)
Common office envelopes approved for laser printing with diagonal joints,
sharp folds and edges, and ordinary gummed flaps
" Because the envelopes pass through heated rollers, the gummed
area on the flaps may seal. Using envelopes with emulsion-based
glue avoids this problem.
Approved for laser printing
Dry
DO NOT use envelopes that have
Sticky flaps
Tape seals, metal clasps, paper clips, fasteners, or peel-off strips for sealing
Transparent windows
Too rough of a surface
Material that will melt, vaporize, offset, discolor, or emit dangerous fumes
Been presealed
Capacity Tray 1 Up to 10 envelopes, depending on their
thickness
Tray 2 Not supported
Orientation Face up
Driver
Media Type
Envelope
Duplexing Not supported5-6 Media Types
Labels
A sheet of labels consists of a face sheet (the printing surface), adhesive, and
a carrier sheet:
The face sheet must follow the plain paper specification.
The face sheet surface must cover the entire carrier sheet, and no adhesive should come through on the surface.
You can print continuously with label sheets. However, this could affect the
media feed, depending on the media quality and printing environment. If
problems occur, stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time.
Try printing your data on a sheet of plain paper first to check placement.
Check your application documentation for more information on printing labels.
Use label sheets that are
Recommended for laser printers
DO NOT use label sheets that
Have labels that easily peel off or have parts of the label already removed
Have backing sheets that have peeled away or have exposed adhesive
" Labels may stick to the fuser, causing them to peel off and media
misfeeds to occur.
Are precut or perforated
Capacity Tray 1 Up to 50 label sheets, depending on their
thickness
Tray 2 Not supported
Orientation Face up
Driver
Media Type
Labels
Duplexing Not supported
Full-page labels
(uncut)
Do not use OK to use
Shiny backed paperMedia Types 5-7
Letterhead
Try printing your data on a sheet of plain paper first to check placement.
Postcards
Try printing your data on a sheet of plain paper first to check placement.
Capacity Tray 1 Up to 50 sheets, depending on their size and
thickness
Tray 2 Not supported
Orientation Face up
Driver
Media Type
Letterhead
Duplexing Not supported
Capacity Tray 1 Up to 50 postcards, depending on their
thickness
Tray 2 Not supported
Orientation Face up
Driver
Media Type
Postcard
Duplexing Not supported5-8 Printable Area
Use postcards that are
Approved for laser printers
DO NOT use postcards that are
Coated
Designed for inkjet printers
Precut or perforated
Preprinted or multicolored
Folded or wrinkled
" If the postcard is warped, press on the warped
area before putting it in Tray 1.
Printable Area
The printable area on all media sizes is
up to 4.2 mm (0.165") from the edges
of the media.
Each media size has a specific printable area (the maximum area on which
the machine can print clearly and without distortion).
This area is subject to both hardware
limits (the physical media size and the
margins required by the machine) and
software constraints (the amount of
memory available for the full-page
frame buffer). The printable area for all media sizes is the page size minus
4.2 mm (0.165") from all edges of the media.
" When printing in color on legal-size media, the following limitations
apply.
z The printable area is 339.6 (13.4") mm from the leading edge of
the paper. (However, there is a non-printable area up to 4.2 mm
(0.165") from the leading edge.)
z The bottom margin is 16.0 mm (0.63").
a a
a
a
Printable
Area
a=4.2 mm (0.165")Printable Area 5-9
Envelopes
Envelopes can only be printed on their front sides (side where the recipient’s
address is written). In addition, printing on the front side in the area overlapping the back flap cannot be guaranteed. The location of this area differs
depending on the envelope type.
" The envelope print orientation is determined by your application.
" With the Envelope DL size (long edge feeding), the nonprintable areas
on the left and right sides are 6 mm.
Page Margins
Margins are set through your application. Some applications allow you to set
custom page sizes and margins while others have only standard page sizes
and margins from which to choose. If you choose a standard format, you may
lose part of your image (due to printable area constraints). If you can custom-size your page in your application, use those sizes given for the printable
area for optimum results.
a=4.2 mm (0.165")
Non-printable area
Non-guaranteed printable area
Guaranteed printable area
Front side
(can be printed)
Back side
(cannot be printed)
a a
a
a5-10 Loading Media
Loading Media
How do I load media?
Take off the top and bottom sheets of a
ream of paper. Holding a stack of approximately 200 sheets at a time, fan the
stack to prevent static buildup before
inserting it in a tray.
Note
Although this printer was designed for printing on a wide range of
media types, it is not intended to print exclusively on a single media
type except plain paper. Continuous printing on media other than plain
paper (such as envelopes, labels, or thick stock) may adversely affect
print quality or reduce engine life.
When refilling media, first remove any media remaining in the tray. Stack it
with the new media, even the edges, then reload it.
Do not mix media of different types and sizes, as this will cause media misfeeds.
Tray 1 (Multipurpose Tray)
For details on the types and sizes of media that can be printed from Tray 1,
refer to “Print Media” on page 5-2.
Loading Plain Paper
1 Remove the dust cover from
Tray 1.Loading Media 5-11
2 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them.
3 Load the paper face up in the
tray.
" Do not load paper above
the ▼ mark. Up to 200
sheets (80 g/m2
[21 lb]) of
plain paper can be
loaded into the tray at
one time.5-12 Loading Media
4 Slide the media guides against
the edges of the paper.
5 Reattach the dust cover.
6 Select MAIN MENU/PAPER MENU/INPUT TRAY/TRAY1/MEDIA
SIZE and MEDIA TYPE in the configuration menu, and then select the
settings for the size and type of paper that are loaded. See also “PAPER
MENU” on page 4-8.Loading Media 5-13
Other Media
When loading media other than plain paper, set the media mode (for example, Envelope, Label, or Thick Stock) in the driver for optimum print quality.
Loading Envelopes
1 Remove the dust cover from
Tray 1.
2 Remove any media from the tray.
3 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them.5-14 Loading Media
4 Load the envelopes flap side
down in the tray.
" Before loading envelopes, press them down
to make sure that all air is
removed, and make sure
that the folds of the flaps
are firmly pressed; otherwise the envelopes may
become wrinkled or a
media misfeed may
occur.
" Up to 10 envelopes can be loaded into the tray at one time.
" For envelopes with the flap (Envelope C6 or Envelope DL), load
the envelopes with the flap side inserted first.
5 Slide the media guides against
the edges of the envelopes.
6 Reattach the dust cover.Loading Media 5-15
7 Select MAIN MENU/PAPER MENU/INPUT TRAY/TRAY1/MEDIA
SIZE and MEDIA TYPE in the configuration menu, and then select the
settings for the size and type of paper that are loaded. See also “PAPER
MENU” on page 4-8.5-16 Loading Media
Loading Labels/Postcard/Thick Stock and Letterhead
1 Remove the dust cover from
Tray 1.
2 Remove any media from the
tray.
3 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them.
4 Load the media face up in the
tray.
" Up to 50 sheets can be
loaded into the tray at
one time.Loading Media 5-17
5 Slide the media guides against
the edges of the media.
6 Reattach the dust cover.
7 Select MAIN MENU/PAPER MENU/INPUT TRAY/TRAY1/MEDIA
SIZE and MEDIA TYPE in the configuration menu, and then select the
settings for the size and type of paper that are loaded. See also “PAPER
MENU” on page 4-8.5-18 Loading Media
Tray 2
Only Letter/A4 plain paper can be loaded in Tray 2.
Loading Plain Paper
1 Pull out Tray 2 as far as possible.
2 Lift up Tray 2 to remove it.
3 Remove the lid from Tray 2.Loading Media 5-19
4 Press down the media pressure
plate to lock it into place.
5 Load the paper face up in the
tray.
" Do not load above the
100% line. Up to 500
sheets (80 g/m2
[21 lb]) of
plain paper can be
loaded into the tray at
one time.
6 Reattach the lid to Tray 2.
100%
75
505-20 Loading Media
7 Reinsert Tray 2 into the printer.Duplexing 5-21
Duplexing
Select paper with high opacity for duplex (double sided) printing. Opacity
refers to how effectively paper blocks out what is written on the opposite side
of the page. If the paper has low opacity (high translucency), then the printed
data from one side of the page will show through to the other side. Check
your application for margin information. For best results, print a small quantity
to make sure the opacity is acceptable.
Duplex (Double sided) printing can be done automatically with the duplex
option installed and selected.
Note
Only Letter/A4 plain paper, 60–90 g/m2
(16–24 lb bond) can be
autoduplexed. See “Print Media” on page 5-2.
Duplexing envelopes, labels, postcards, thick stock, or letterhead is not
supported.
How do I autoduplex?
You should verify that the duplex option is physically installed on the printer to
successfully duplex the job.
Check your application to determine how to set your margins for duplex
printing.
The following Binding Position settings are available.
If “Short Edge” is selected, the pages will be laid out to flip
at the top.
If “Long Edge” is selected, the pages will be laid out to flip
at the sides.
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
35-22 Output Tray
In addition, if “N-up” has been set to “Booklet”, autoduplex printing is performed.
The following Order settings are available when “Booklet” is selected.
1 Load plain paper into the tray.
2 From the printer driver, specify the layout for duplex printing.
3 Click OK.
" With autoduplexing, the back side is printed first, and then the front
side is printed.
Output Tray
All printed media is output to the face-down output tray on top of the printer.
This tray has a capacity of approximately 100 sheets (A4/Letter) of 80 g/m2
(21 lb) paper.
" If the media is stacked too high in the output tray, your printer may
experience media misfeeds, excessive media curl, or static buildup.
If “Left Binding” is selected, the pages can be folded as a
left-bound booklet.
If “Right Binding” is selected, the pages can be folded as a
right-bound booklet.
1
1
2
3
3
3
1
1
2Media Storage 5-23
Media Storage
How do I store media?
Keep media on a flat, level surface in its original wrapper until it is time to
load it.
Media that has been stored for a long time out of its packaging may dry up
too much and cause misfeeding.
If media has been removed from its wrapper, place it in its original packaging and store in a cool, dark place on a level surface.
Avoid moisture, excessive humidity, direct sunlight, excessive heat (above
35°C [95°F]), and dust.
Avoid media leaning against other objects or placing it in an upright position.
Before using stored media, do a trial print and check print quality. 5-24 Media StorageReplacing
Consumables6-2 Replacing Consumables
Replacing Consumables
Note
Failure to follow instructions as outlined in this manual could result in
voiding your warranty.
About Toner Cartridges
Your printer uses four toner cartridges: black, yellow, magenta, and cyan.
Handle the toner cartridges carefully to avoid spilling toner inside the printer
or on yourself.
" Install only new toner cartridges in your printer. If a used toner cartridge is installed, then toner remaining amount may not be accurate.
" The toner is nontoxic. If you get toner on your skin, wash it off with
cool water and a mild soap. If you get toner on your clothes, lightly
dust them off as best as you can. If some toner remains on your
clothes, use cool, not hot water, to rinse the toner off.
CAUTION
If you get toner in your eyes, wash it out immediately with cool water
and consult a doctor.
" Refer to the following URL for recycling information.
US: printer.konicaminolta.com/products/recycle/index.asp
Europe: www.konicaminolta.eu/printing-solutions/more-information/
clean-planet.html
Other regions: printer.konicaminolta.com
Note
Do not use refilled toner cartridges or unapproved toner cartridges. Any
damage to the printer or quality problems caused by a refilled toner
cartridge or unapproved toner cartridge will void your warranty. No
technical support is provided to recover from these problems.Replacing Consumables 6-3
When replacing a toner cartridge, refer to the following table. For optimum
print quality and performance, use only approved KONICA MINOLTA toner
cartridges for your specific printer type, as listed in the table below. You can
find your machine type and the toner cartridge part numbers on the consumables reorder label inside the top cover your machine.
" For optimum print quality and performance, use only the corresponded TYPE genuine KONICA MINOLTA toner cartridges.
Printer
Type
Printer Part
Number
Toner Cartridge Type Toner Cartridge
Part Number
AM A034 012
Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Yellow (Y) A0V3 05F
Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Magenta (M) A0V3 0AF
Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Cyan (C) A0V3 0GF
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Black (K) A0V3 01F
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Yellow (Y) A0V3 06F
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Magenta (M) A0V3 0CF
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Cyan (C) A0V3 0HF
EU A034 022
Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Yellow (Y) A0V3 05H
Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Magenta (M) A0V3 0AH
Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Cyan (C) A0V3 0GH
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Black (K) A0V3 01H
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Yellow (Y) A0V3 06H
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Magenta (M) A0V3 0CH
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Cyan (C) A0V3 0HH
AP A034 042
Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Yellow (Y) A0V3 05K
Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Magenta (M) A0V3 0AK
Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Cyan (C) A0V3 0GK
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Black (K) A0V3 01K
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Yellow (Y) A0V3 06K
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Magenta (M) A0V3 0CK
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Cyan (C) A0V3 0HK
GC A034 082
Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Yellow (Y) A0V3 05N
Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Magenta (M) A0V3 0AN
Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Cyan (C) A0V3 0GN
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Black (K) A0V3 01N
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Yellow (Y) A0V3 06N
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Magenta (M) A0V3 0CN
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Cyan (C) A0V3 0HN6-4 Replacing Consumables
Keep toner cartridges:
In their packaging until you’re ready to install them.
In a cool, dry location away from sunlight (due to heat).
The maximum storage temperature is 35° C (95° F) and the maximum
storage humidity is 85% (noncondensing). If the toner cartridge is moved
from a cold place to a warm, humid place, condensation may occur,
degrading print quality. Allow the toner to adapt to the environment for
about one hour before use.
Level during handling and storage.
Do not hold, stand or store
cartridges on their ends or turn
them upside down; the toner
inside the cartridges may
become caked or unequally
distributed.
Away from salty air and corrosive gases such as aerosols.Replacing Consumables 6-5
Replacing a Toner Cartridge
Note
Be careful not to spill toner while replacing a toner cartridge. If toner
spills, immediately wipe it off with a soft, dry cloth.
If TONER OUT ACTION on the MAIN MENU/QUALITY MENU/TONER
OUT ACTION menu is set to STOP, the message X TONER OUT/
REPLACE XXXX (where “X” and “XXXX” represent the color of the toner)
appears when a toner cartridge becomes empty. Follow the steps below to
replace the toner cartridge.
" If TONER OUT ACTION on the MAIN MENU/QUALITY MENU/
TONER OUT ACTION menu is set to CONTINUE, the printing can
continue even after the message "X TONER OUT" has appeared;
however, the printing quality cannot be guaranteed. If printing is continued and the toner becomes empty, the message "X TONER LIFE
END" appears and printing stops. For details on the setting, refer to
“QUALITY MENU” on page 4-13.
1 Check the message window to see which color toner cartridge needs
replacing.
" If the machine detects that a toner cartridge is empty (X TONER OUT
or X TONER LIFE END appears), the empty toner cartridge is automatically moved so that it can be replaced.
If you wish to change the toner cartridge, use ether operation described
below to switch the printer to REPLACE TONER.
Press Key Until Display Reads
X TONER OUT
REPLACE XXXX or
X TONER LIFE END
MENU
MAIN MANU
MAIN MENU
PRINT MENU6-6 Replacing Consumables
× 2 MAIN MENU
QUALITY MENU
QUALITY MENU
REPLACE TONER
REPLACE TONER
BLACK
Press until appropriate
color (X) is displayed.
REPLACE TONER
X
X
*YES
*YES IS SELECTED
Then, it displays
OPEN DOOR AND
REPLACE X TONER
Press Key Until Display ReadsReplacing Consumables 6-7
2 Open the front cover.
" Before opening the front
cover, open Tray 1 if it is
not already open.
3 Check that the toner cartridge to be replaced has been moved to the front.
" You can identify the toner cartridge by the color of the handle.
4 Pull down the handle on the
toner cartridge until the toner
cartridge is unlocked and moves
out slightly toward you.
Remove the toner cartridge.
" Do not manually rotate
the toner cartridge carousel. In addition, do not
rotate the carousel with
force, otherwise it may be
damaged.6-8 Replacing Consumables
Note
Do not touch the contact
indicated in the illustration.
Note
Dispose of the empty toner cartridge according to your local
regulations. Do not burn the toner cartridge.
For details, refer to “About Toner Cartridges” on page 6-2.
5 Prepare a new toner cartridge.
6 Shake the cartridge a few times
to distribute the toner.
" Make sure that the toner
roller cover is securely
attached before shaking
the toner cartridge.Replacing Consumables 6-9
7 Remove the cover from the
toner roller.
" Do not touch or scratch
the toner roller.
8 Align the shaft on each end of
the toner cartridge with its holders, and then insert the cartridge.
" Before inserting the toner
cartridge, make sure that
the color of the toner cartridge to be installed is
the same as the label on
the toner cartridge carousel.6-10 Replacing Consumables
Note
Do not touch the contact
indicated in the illustration.
9 Press in the toner cartridge until
it locks into place.
10 Close the front cover.Replacing Consumables 6-11
" The printer must complete a calibration cycle after the toner cartridge has been replaced. If you open the top or front cover before
the message IDLE appears, the printer stops and repeats the calibration cycle.6-12 Replacing Consumables
Removing All Toner Cartridges
Note
Be careful not to spill toner while removing a toner cartridge. If toner
spills, immediately wipe it off with a soft, dry cloth.
By using the REMOVE ALL mode, all toner cartridges can be removed.
Follow the procedure described below to use the REMOVE ALL mode.
1 Perform the operation described below to switch the printer to the
REMOVE ALL mode.
Press Key Until Display Reads
IDLE
MANU
MAIN MANU
MAIN MENU
PRINT MENU
× 2 MAIN MENU
QUALITY MENU
QUALITY MENU
REPLACE TONER
REPLACE TONER
BLACK
REPLACE TONER
REMOVE ALLReplacing Consumables 6-13
" It is not possible to exit REMOVE ALL mode before the operation is
finished (even if the Cancel key is pressed).
If the printer has incorrectly been switched to REMOVE ALL mode,
open, then close the front cover four times to exit REMOVE ALL
mode.
2 Open the front cover.
" Before opening the front
cover, open Tray 1 if it is
not already open.
REMOVE ALL
*NO
REMOVE ALL
YES
*YES
IS SELECTED
Then, it displays
OPEN DOOR AND
REMOVE M TONER
Press Key Until Display Reads6-14 Replacing Consumables
3 Pull down the handle on the
toner cartridge until the toner
cartridge is unlocked and moves
out slightly toward you.
Remove the toner cartridge.
" Do not manually rotate
the toner cartridge carousel. In addition, do not
rotate the carousel with
force, otherwise it may be
damaged.
Note
Do not touch the contact
indicated in the illustration.Replacing Consumables 6-15
4 Close the front cover.
5 Follow the same procedure to remove the cartridges for the cyan, black,
then yellow toners.6-16 Replacing Consumables
Replacing the Imaging Cartridge
When replacing an imaging cartridge, refer to the following table. For optimum print quality and performance, use only approved KONICA MINOLTA
imaging cartridge for your specific printer type, as listed in the table below.
You can find your machine type and the imaging cartridge part numbers on
the consumables reorder label inside the top cover your machine.
" For optimum print quality and performance, use only the corresponded TYPE genuine KONICA MINOLTA imaging cartridge.
1 Open the top cover.
" If there is paper in the
output tray, remove it,
and then fold up the output tray before opening
the top cover.
2 Grab the handle and lift it up
slightly to the back, and then
slowly pull the imaging cartridge
out vertically.
Printer
Type
Printer Part
Number
Part Name Imaging Cartridge
Part Number
AM A034 012 Imaging Cartridge A0VU 011
EU A034 022 A0VU 0Y1
AP A034 042 A0VU 0Y1
GC A034 082 A0VU 0Y1Replacing Consumables 6-17
Note
Dispose of the used imaging cartridge according to your local
regulations. Do not burn the imaging cartridge.
3 Prepare the new imaging cartridge.
Note
Do not touch the PC drum and the transfer belt on the imaging
cartridge.
4 Slowly insert the new imaging
cartridge vertically, and then
push it slightly down toward you
to finish installing the imaging
cartridge.6-18 Replacing Consumables
5 Carefully close the top cover.
" The printer must complete a calibration cycle after the imaging cartridge has been replaced. If you open the top cover before the
message IDLE appears, the printer stops and repeats the calibration cycle.Replacing Consumables 6-19
Replacing the Fuser Unit
For optimum print quality and performance, use only approved KONICA
MINOLTA fuser unit for your specific printer type.
1 Turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord.
Note
There are extremely hot parts within the printer. Before replacing the
fuser unit, wait about 20 minutes after turning off the printer, and
then check that the fusing section has reached room temperature,
otherwise, you may get burnt.
2 Open the top cover.
" If there is paper in the
output tray, remove it,
and then fold up the output tray before opening
the top cover.6-20 Replacing Consumables
3 Push the blue handles back as
far as possible.
4 Grab the blue handles and lift
the fuser unit to remove it.
Note
Do not touch the matching
connectors of the fuser unit and
the machine.Replacing Consumables 6-21
5 Prepare a new fuser unit.
6 Pull the fuser separator levers
forward as far as possible.6-22 Replacing Consumables
7 Remove the fuser separator
material, and then return the
fuser separator levers to their
original positions.
Note
Be careful not to touch the paper exit sensor and the surface of the
fuser roller in the fuser unit.
8 While lifting the fuser unit with
the blue handles (one on each
side), vertically insert the fuser
unit.Replacing Consumables 6-23
Note
Do not touch the paper exit
sensor on the fuser unit.
Note
Do not touch the matching
connectors of the fuser unit
and the machine.
M6-24 Replacing Consumables
9 After the fuser unit is firmly
installed, flip the blue handles
down toward you.
10 Carefully close the top cover.
11 Reconnect the power cord, and
turn on the printer.Maintaining the
Printer7-2 Maintaining the Printer
Maintaining the Printer
CAUTION
Read all caution and warning labels carefully, making sure to follow any
instructions contained in them. These labels are located on the inside of
the printer’s covers and the interior of the printer body.
Handle the printer with care to preserve its life. Abuse handling may cause
damage and void your warranty. If dust and paper scraps remain on the
inside or outside of the printer, printer performance and print quality will suffer,
so the printer should be cleaned periodically. Keep the following guidelines in
mind.
WARNING!
Turn off the printer, unplug the power cord, and disconnect all interface
cables before cleaning. Do not spill water or detergent into the printer;
otherwise the printer will be damaged and an electric shock may occur.
CAUTION
The fuser unit is hot. When the top cover is opened, the fuser
unit temperature drops gradually (one hour wait time).
Be careful when cleaning the inside of the printer or removing media misfeeds, as the fuser unit and other internal parts may be very hot.
Do not place anything on top of the printer.
Use a soft cloth to clean the printer.
Never spray cleaning solutions directly on the printer’s surface; the spray
could penetrate through the air vents of the printer and damage the internal circuits.
Avoid using abrasive or corrosive solutions or solutions that contain solvents (such as alcohol and benzene) to clean the printer.
Always test any cleaning solution (such as mild detergent) on a small
inconspicuous area of your printer to check the solution’s performance.
Never use sharp or rough implements, such as wire or plastic cleaning
pads.
Always close the printer’s covers gently. Never subject the printer to vibration.
Do not cover the printer immediately after using it. Turn it off and wait until
it cools down.Maintaining the Printer 7-3
Do not leave the printer’s covers open for any length of time, especially in
well-lit places; light may damage the imaging cartridge.
Do not open the printer during printing.
Do not tap media stacks on the printer.
Do not lubricate or disassemble the printer.
Do not tilt the printer.
Do not touch the electrical contacts, gears, or laser devices. Doing so may
damage the printer and cause the print quality to deteriorate.
Keep media in the output tray at a minimum level. If the media is stocked
too high, your printer may experience media misfeeds and excessive
media curl.
Keep the printer level to avoid
toner spillage.
When lifting the printer, grasp
the areas shown in the figure.
Before moving the printer,
remove the dust cover, and fold
up Tray 1.
If the optional lower feeder unit,
attachment and duplex option
are installed, remove them and
move them separately.
If you get toner on your skin, wash it off with cool water and a mild soap.
CAUTION
If you get toner in your eyes, wash it out immediately with cool water
and consult a doctor.
Make sure any parts removed during cleaning are replaced before you
plug in the printer.
15.1 kg
33.3 lbs7-4 Cleaning the Printer
Cleaning the Printer
CAUTION
Be sure to turn off the printer and unplug the power cord before
cleaning. However, be sure to turn on the printer when cleaning the
print head window.
Exterior
Ready
Error
Cancel
Control Panel Ventilation Grill
Printer ExteriorCleaning the Printer 7-5
Interior
Cleaning the Media Feed Roller
1 Open the top cover.
" If there is paper in the
output tray, remove it,
and then fold up the output tray before opening
the top cover.
2 Grab the handle and lift it up
slightly to the back, and then
slowly pull the imaging cartridge
out vertically.7-6 Cleaning the Printer
Note
Do not touch the PC drum and the transfer belt on the imaging
cartridge.
Position the removed imaging
cartridge horizontally as shown in
the illustration at the right.
Be sure to keep the imaging
cartridge horizontal and place it
where it will not become dirty.
Do not leave the imaging
cartridge removed for more than
15 minutes, and do not place the
removed imaging cartridge in a
location where it would be
exposed to direct light (such as
sunlight).
3 Clean the media feed rollers by
wiping them with a soft, dry
cloth.
BOTTOM
VIEWCleaning the Printer 7-7
CAUTION
The area around the fuser unit is
extremely hot.
Touching anything other than the
indicated levers may result in
burns. If you get burned,
immediately cool the skin under
cold water, and then seek
professional medical attention.
Note
Decreased print quality may
result if the surface of the
transfer roller is touched.
Be careful not to touch the
surface of the transfer roller.7-8 Cleaning the Printer
4 Slowly insert the imaging cartridge vertically, and then push it
slightly down toward you to finish reinstalling the imaging cartridge.
5 Carefully close the top cover.Cleaning the Printer 7-9
Cleaning the Print Head Window
1 Perform the operation described below to switch the printer to the P/H
CLEAN UP mode.
Press Key Until Display Reads
IDLE
MENU
MAIN MANU
MAIN MENU
PRINT MENU
× 2 MAIN MENU
QUALITY MENU
QUALITY MENU
REPLACE TONER
× 3 QUALITY MENU
P/H CLEAN UP
P/H CLEAN UP
*YES
*YES
IS SELECTED
Then, it displays
OPEN DOOR
REMOVE TONER7-10 Cleaning the Printer
" To exit P/H CLEAN UP mode, press the Cancel key.
2 Open the front cover.
" Before opening the front
cover, open Tray 1 if it is
not already open.
3 The magenta toner cartridge has
been moved to the position from
where it can be replaced.
Pull down the handle on the
toner cartridge until the toner
cartridge is unlocked and moves
out slightly toward you.
Remove the toner cartridge.
" When the magenta toner
cartridge is removed, a
gap is created within the
printer so that the print
head window can easily
be cleaned.Cleaning the Printer 7-11
Note
Do not touch the contact
indicated in the illustration.
4 Close the front cover.
" The toner cartridge rotate
within the printer.
5 After the toner cartridges have
finished rotating, open the top
cover.7-12 Cleaning the Printer
6 Grab the handle and lift it up
slightly to the back, and then
slowly pull the imaging cartridge
out vertically.
Note
Do not touch the PC drum and the transfer belt on the imaging
cartridge.
Position the removed imaging
cartridge horizontally as shown in
the illustration at the right.
Be sure to keep the imaging
cartridge horizontal and place it
where it will not become dirty.
Do not leave the imaging
cartridge removed for more than
15 minutes, and do not place the
removed imaging cartridge in a
location where it would be
exposed to direct light (such as
sunlight).Cleaning the Printer 7-13
7 Clean the print head window by
wiping it with a soft, dry cloth.
CAUTION
The area around the fuser unit is
extremely hot.
Touching anything other than the
indicated levers may result in
burns. If you get burned,
immediately cool the skin under
cold water, and then seek
professional medical attention.
BOTTOM
VIEW7-14 Cleaning the Printer
Note
Decreased print quality may
result if the surface of the
transfer roller is touched.
Be careful not to touch the
surface of the transfer roller.
8 Slowly insert the imaging cartridge vertically, and then push it
slightly down toward you to finish reinstalling the imaging cartridge.Cleaning the Printer 7-15
9 Close the top cover.
10 After the toner cartridges have
finished rotating, open the front
cover.7-16 Cleaning the Printer
11 Align the shaft on each end of
the toner cartridge with its holders, and then insert the cartridge.
Note
Do not touch the contact
indicated in the illustration.Cleaning the Printer 7-17
12 Press in the magenta toner cartridge until it locks into place.
13 Close the front cover.7-18 Cleaning the Printer
Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for Tray 2
Be sure to remove the duplex option before cleaning the media feed rollers
for Tray 2.
1 If the duplex option is installed, remove it.
2 Remove the dust cover from Tray 1.
Close Tray 1 and the output tray.
3 Lift the printer off of Tray 2 and
temporarily place it on a sturdy
flat surface.
4 Clean the media feed rollers by
wiping them with a soft, dry
cloth.Cleaning the Printer 7-19
5 Lift the printer and reinstall it on
top of Tray 2.
6 Open Tray 1 and reattach the dust cover.
7 If you removed the duplex option in step 1, reinstall it.7-20 Cleaning the Printer
Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for the attachment
Be sure to remove the duplex option before cleaning the media feed rollers
for the attachment.
1 If the duplex option is installed, remove it.
2 Remove the dust cover from Tray 1.
Close Tray 1 and the output tray.
3 Lift the printer off of the attachment and temporarily place it on
a sturdy flat surface.
4 Clean the media feed rollers by
wiping them with a soft, dry
cloth.Cleaning the Printer 7-21
5 Lift the printer and reinstall it on
top of the attachment.
6 Open Tray 1 and reattach the dust cover.
7 If you removed the duplex option in step 1, reinstall it.7-22 Cleaning the Printer
Cleaning the Duplex Feed Rollers
1 Open the duplex cover.
2 Clean the feed rollers by wiping
them with a soft, dry cloth.
3 Carefully close the duplex cover.Troubleshooting8-2 Introduction
Introduction
This chapter provides information to aid you in resolving printer problems you
may encounter, or at least guide you to the proper sources for help.
Printing a Configuration Page
Print a configuration page to verify the printer is configured correctly.
Printing the configuration page page 8-2
Preventing media misfeeds page 8-4
Understanding the media path page 8-5
Clearing media misfeeds page 8-5
Solving problems with media misfeeds page 8-19
Solving other problems page 8-21
Solving problems with printing quality page 8-25
Status, error, and service messages page 8-31
Press Key Until Display Reads
IDLE
MENU
MAIN MENU
MAIN MENU
PRINT MENU
PRINT MENU
MENU MAP
PRINT MENU
CONFIGURATIONPrinting a Configuration Page 8-3
CONFIGURATION
YES
The configuration page prints and the
printer goes back to IDLE.
Press Key Until Display Reads8-4 Preventing Media Misfeeds
Preventing Media Misfeeds
Make sure that...
Media matches the printer specifications.
Media is flat, especially on the leading edge.
The printer is on a hard, flat, level surface.
You store media in a dry location away from moisture and humidity.
You always adjust the media guides in Tray 1 after inserting the media (a
guide that is not properly adjusted can cause poor print quality, media misfeeds, and printer damage).
You load the media printing-side up in the tray (many manufacturers place an
arrow on the end of the wrapper to indicate the printing side).
Avoid...
Media that is folded, wrinkled, or excessively curled.
Double feeding (remove the media and fan the sheets—they may be sticking
together).
Loading more than one type/size/weight of media in a tray at the same time.
Overfilling the trays.
Allowing the output tray to overfill (the output tray has a 100-sheet capacity—
misfeeding may occur if you allow more than 100 sheets of media to accumulate at one time).Understanding the Media Path 8-5
Understanding the Media Path
Understanding the printer’s media path will help you locate media misfeeds.
1 Output tray
2 Imaging cartridge
3 Toner cartridge carousel
4 Tray 1
5 Tray 2 (optional)
6 Fuser unit
7 Duplex option
Clearing Media Misfeeds
To avoid damage, always remove misfed media gently, without tearing it. Any
piece of media left in the printer, whether large or small, can obstruct the
media path and cause further misfeeds. Do not reload media that has misfed.
Note
The image is not fixed on the media before the fusing process. If you
touch the printed surface, the toner may stick to your hands, so be
careful not to touch the printed face when removing the misfed media.
Make sure not to spill any toner inside the printer.
CAUTION
Unfused toner can dirty your hands, clothes, or anything else it gets on.
If you accidentally get toner on your clothes, lightly dust them off as
best as you can. If some toner remains on your clothes, use cool, not
hot water, to rinse the toner off. If toner gets on your skin, wash it off
with cool water and a mild soap.
CAUTION
If you get toner in your eyes, wash it out immediately with cool water
and consult a doctor.
If, after clearing the media misfeed, the misfeed message in the control panel
window persists, open and close the printer’s top cover. This should clear the
misfeed message.
1
6
7
2
3
4
58-6 Clearing Media Misfeeds
Media Misfeed Messages and Clearing Procedures
Media Misfeed Message Page Reference
CHECK TRAY1
PAPER
(Displaying alternately)
PRESS
MENU/SELECT
This message appears in the following cases.
z When no media is loaded in Tray 1
z When a misfeed has occurred in Tray 1
With the first case, load media into the tray, and
then press the Menu Select key.
With the second case, refer to page 8-13.
PAPER JAM
FUSER
page 8-7
PAPER JAM
EXIT
page 8-7
PAPER JAM
TRANSFER
page 8-7
PAPER JAM TRAY2
OPEN TOP COVER
page 8-14
PAPER JAM
DUPLEX
page 8-17Clearing Media Misfeeds 8-7
Clearing a Media Misfeed in the Printer
1 Open the top cover.
" If there is paper in the
output tray, remove it,
and then fold up the output tray before opening
the top cover.
2 Grab the handle and lift it up
slightly to the back, and then
slowly pull the imaging cartridge
out vertically.8-8 Clearing Media Misfeeds
Note
Do not touch the PC drum and the transfer belt on the imaging
cartridge.
Position the removed imaging
cartridge as shown in the
illustration at the right.
Be sure to keep the imaging
cartridge horizontally horizontal
and place it where it will not
become dirty.
Do not leave the imaging
cartridge removed for more than
15 minutes, and do not place the
removed imaging cartridge in a
location where it would be
exposed to direct light (such as
sunlight).Clearing Media Misfeeds 8-9
3 Push the fuser separator levers
back as far as possible.
CAUTION
The area around the fuser unit is
extremely hot.
Touching anything other than the
indicated levers may result in
burns. If you get burned,
immediately cool the skin under
cold water, and then seek
professional medical attention.8-10 Clearing Media Misfeeds
4 Remove any misfed media.
" If a media misfeed occurs
near the fuser unit, pull
out the media from below
the fuser unit, as shown
in the illustration at the
right.
" If the media cannot
be removed from
below the fuser unit,
raise the fuser unit
cover, and then
remove the media
from above the fuser
unit.
" Remove the dust
cover from Tray 1 and
remove the media.
M
MClearing Media Misfeeds 8-11
Note
Do not touch the paper exit
sensor on the fuser unit.
Note
Decreased print quality may
result if the surface of the
transfer roller is touched.
Be careful not to touch the
surface of the transfer roller.
M8-12 Clearing Media Misfeeds
5 Return the fuser separator
levers to their original positions.
6 Slowly insert the imaging cartridge vertically, and then push it
slightly down toward you to finish reinstalling the imaging cartridge.
7 Carefully close the top cover.
MClearing Media Misfeeds 8-13
Clearing a Media Misfeed From Tray 1
1 Remove the dust cover from
Tray 1.
2 Carefully pull out the misfed
media.
" If the media cannot be
removed, instead of pulling it with extreme force,
clear the media misfeed
according to the procedure described in “Clearing a Media Misfeed in
the Printer” on page 8-7.
3 Reattach the dust cover.
4 Press the Menu Select key.8-14 Clearing Media Misfeeds
Clearing a Media Misfeed From Tray 2
1 Pull out Tray 2 as far as possible.
2 Lift up Tray 2 to remove it.
3 Remove any misfed paper.
" If necessary, remove the
dust cover from Tray 1
and close the tray.Clearing Media Misfeeds 8-15
4 Remove the lid from Tray 2, and
then remove all paper from the
tray.
5 Fan the paper, and align its
edges.
6 Press down the media pressure
plate to lock it into place.
7 Load the media in Tray 2, and
attach the lid.8-16 Clearing Media Misfeeds
8 Reinsert Tray 2.
9 Open and close the top cover to
clear the misfeed message.Clearing Media Misfeeds 8-17
Clearing a Media Misfeed from the Duplex Option
1 Open the duplex cover.
2 Carefully pull out the misfed
media.
" Always remove the misfed media in the feed
direction as shown only.
" If the media misfeed
occurs at the bottom feed
slot and the media does
not stick out enough to be
removed, turn the dial at
the right in the direction
of the arrow until the
media can be pulled out.8-18 Clearing Media Misfeeds
3 Close the duplex cover.Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds 8-19
Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds
" Frequent misfeeds in any area indicate that area should be checked,
repaired, or cleaned. Repeated misfeeds may also happen if you’re
using unsupported print media.
Symptom Cause Solution
Several
sheets go
through the
printer
together.
The front edges of
the media are not
even.
Remove the media and even up the
front edges, then reload it.
The media is moist
from humidity.
Remove the moist media and replace it
with new, dry media.
Media misfeed message stays
on.
Top cover needs to
be opened and
closed again to reset
the printer.
Open and close the top cover again.
Some media remains
misfed in the printer.
Recheck the media path and make
sure that you have removed all of the
misfed media.
Duplex
option misfeeds.
Unsupported media
(wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is
being used.
Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved
media. See “Print Media” on page 5-2.
Also, refer to http://printer. konicaminolta.com for a complete list of currently approved media.
Only Letter/A4 plain paper and recycled paper can be autoduplexed if the
duplex option is installed and the
media type is set properly in the driver.
Make sure that you have not mixed
media types in Tray 1.
Do not duplex envelopes, labels, thick
stock, postcard, or letterheads.
Media is still being
misfed.
Recheck the media path inside the
duplex option and make sure that you
have removed all of the misfed media.8-20 Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds
Media is
misfeeding.
The media is not correctly positioned in
the tray.
Remove the misfed media and reposition the media properly in the tray.
The number of sheets
in the tray exceeds
the maximum
allowed.
Remove the excess media and reload
the correct number of sheets in the
tray.
The media guides are
not correctly adjusted
to the media size.
Adjust the media guides in the Tray 1
to match the size of the media.
Warped or wrinkled
media is loaded in the
tray.
Remove the media, smooth it out, and
reload it. If it still misfeeds, do not use
that media.
The media is moist
from humidity.
Remove the moist media and replace it
with new, dry media.
Custom-sized media,
envelopes, labels,
postcards, thick
stock, or letterheads
are loaded in Tray 2.
Special media must be loaded in Tray
1 only.
The recommended
label sheet is facing
the wrong way in Tray
1.
Load the label sheets according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Envelopes are facing
the wrong way in Tray
1.
Load the envelopes in Tray 1 with the
flaps facing down.
If the flaps are on the long edge (Envelope C6 and Envelope DL), load the
envelopes with the flap edge toward
the printer and the flap side facing
down.
Unsupported media
(wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is
being used.
Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved
media. See “Print Media” on page 5-2.
Also, refer to http://printer. konicaminolta.com for a complete list of currently approved media.
The media feed roller
is dirty.
Clean the media feed roller.
For more details, refer to “Cleaning the
Media Feed Roller” on page 7-5.
Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Other Problems 8-21
Solving Other Problems
" To order KONICA MINOLTA consumables, go to www.q-shop.com.
Symptom Cause Solution
Printer
power is not
on.
The power cord is not
correctly plugged into
the outlet.
Turn off the printer, confirm that the
power cord is correctly plugged into the
outlet, and then turn on the printer.
Something is wrong
with the outlet connected to the printer.
Plug another electrical appliance into
the outlet and see whether it operates
properly.
The power switch is
not correctly turned
on (I position).
Turn the power switch off (O position),
then turn it back to the on (I position).
The printer is connected to an outlet
with a voltage or frequency that does not
match the printer
specifications.
Use a power source with the specifications listed in appendix A, “Technical
Specifications”.
The control
panel displays X
TONER
LOW much
sooner than
expected.
One of the toner cartridges may be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and check
each for damage. If one or more is
damaged, replace it.
You printed with
heavy toner coverage.
See specifications in appendix A,
“Technical Specifications”.
You can’t
print the configuration
page.
The tray is empty. Check that at least Tray 1 is loaded
with media, in place, and secure.
There is a media
misfeed.
Clear the media misfeed.8-22 Solving Other Problems
Printing
takes too
much time.
The printer is set to a
slow printing mode
(for example, thick
stock).
It takes more time to print with special
media. When using regular paper,
make sure that the media type is set
properly in the driver.
The printer is set to
power saving mode.
It takes time for printing to start in
power saving mode.
The job is very complex.
Wait. No action needed.
A toner cartridge for a
different region is
installed (X INCORRECT is displayed in
the message window).
Install a correct KONICA MINOLTA
toner cartridge approved for your specific printer.
Blank pages
are printed.
One or more of the
toner cartridges are
defective or empty.
Check the toner cartridges. The image
will not print correctly or not at all, if a
cartridge is empty.
The wrong media is
being used.
Check that the media type set in the
driver matches the media loaded in the
printer.
Printer
returned to
IDLE before
the configuration menu
was
changed.
The printer was in the
configuration menu
structure without a
selection being made
within two minutes.
When in the configuration menu structure, select your choice within 2 minutes.
Not all pages
print.
The Cancel key was
pressed.
Make sure no one pressed the Cancel
key while your job was printing.
The tray is empty. Check that the tray is loaded with
media, in place, and secure.
A document is printed
with an overlay file
which has been created by a non-suitable driver.
Print the overlay file using a suitable
driver.
Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Other Problems 8-23
Printer
resets or
turns off frequently.
The power cord is not
correctly plugged into
the outlet.
Turn off the printer, confirm that the
power cord is correctly plugged into the
outlet, and then turn on the printer.
A system error
occurred.
Contact Technical Support with the
error information.
You are
experiencing duplex
problems.
Media or settings are
not correct.
For autoduplexing, make sure that you
have a duplex option installed.
Make sure that you are using correct
media.
Only Letter/A4 plain paper can be
autoduplexed.
Do not duplex envelopes, labels,
postcards, thick stock, letterheads,
or plain paper with a size other than
Letter/A4.
Make sure that you have not mixed
media types in Tray 1.
Make sure the duplex option is installed
and declared in the Windows printer
driver (Properties/Configure tab).
In the printer driver (Layout tab),
choose “Double-sided”.
You hear
unusual
noises.
The printer is not
level.
Place the printer on a flat, hard, level
surface.
The tray is not
installed correctly.
Remove the tray that you are printing
from and reinsert it completely into the
printer.
There is a foreign
object stuck inside
the printer.
Turn off the printer and remove the
object. If you cannot remove it, contact
Technical Support.
The
web-based
utility cannot
be accessed.
The PageScope Web
Connection Administrator’s password is
incorrect.
The PageScope Web Connection
Administrator password has a 1-character minimum and a 16-character
maximum. For details of the PageScope Web Connection administrator
password, refer to the Reference Guide
on the Utilities and Documentation CD/
DVD.
Symptom Cause Solution8-24 Solving Other Problems
Media is
wrinkled.
The media is moist
from humidity or having water spilled on it.
Remove the moist media and replace it
with new, dry media.
The media feed roller
or fuser unit is defective.
Check them for damage. If necessary,
contact Technical Support with the
error information.
Unsupported media
(wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is
being used.
Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved
media. See “Print Media” on page 5-2.
Also, refer to http://printer. konicaminolta.com for a complete list of currently approved media.
The date and
time is not
correctly
maintained
on the
printer.
The backup battery
has reached the end
of its service life.
Contact Technical Support.
Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Problems with Printing Quality 8-25
Solving Problems with Printing Quality
Symptom Cause Solution
Nothing is
printed, or
there are
blank spots
on the
printed page.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check if any is damaged.
The imaging cartridge
may be defective.
Remove the imaging cartridge and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
The media is moist
from humidity.
Adjust the humidity for media storage.
Remove the moist media and replace it
with new, dry media.
The media set in the
printer driver mismatches the media
loaded in the printer.
Load the correct media in the printer.
The power source
does not match the
printer specifications.
Use a power source with the proper
specifications.
Several sheets are
being fed at the same
time.
Remove the media from the tray and
check for static electricity. Fan plain
paper or other media, and replace it in
the tray.
Media is not set properly in the tray(s).
Remove the media, tap it to straighten
it out, return it into the tray, and realign
the media guides.
Entire sheet
is printed in
black or
color.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check each for damage. If one or more
is damaged, replace it.
The imaging cartridge
may be defective.
Remove the imaging cartridge and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.8-26 Solving Problems with Printing Quality
Image is too
light; there is
low image
density.
The print head window is dirty.
Clean the print head window.
The media is moist
from humidity.
Remove the moist media and replace
with new, dry media.
There is not much
toner left in the cartridge.
Replace the toner cartridge.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check each for damage. If one or more
is damaged, replace it.
Media type is set
incorrectly.
When printing envelopes, labels, postcards, thick stock, or letterheads, specify the appropriate media type in the
printer driver.
Image is too
dark.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check each for damage. If one or more
is damaged, replace it.
The imaging cartridge
may be defective.
Remove the imaging cartridge and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
Image is
blurred;
background
is lightly
stained;
there is
insufficient
gloss of the
printed
image.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check each for damage. If one or more
is damaged, replace it.
The imaging cartridge
may be defective.
Remove the imaging cartridge and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Problems with Printing Quality 8-27
The print or
color density
is uneven.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be defective or low.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
The imaging cartridge
is defective.
Remove the imaging cartridge and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
The printer is not
level.
Place the printer on a flat, hard, level
surface.
Irregular
print or mottled image
appears.
The media is moist
from humidity.
Adjust the humidity in the media storage area.
Remove the moist media and replace it
with new, dry media.
Unsupported media
(wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is
being used.
Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved
media. See “Print Media” on page 5-2.
Also, refer to http://printer. konicaminolta.com for a complete list of currently approved media.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and check
each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it.
The imaging cartridge
is defective.
Remove the imaging cartridge and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
There is
insufficient
fusing or the
image
comes off
when
rubbed.
The media is moist
from humidity.
Remove the moist media and replace it
with new, dry media.
Unsupported media
(wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is
being used.
Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved
media. See “Print Media” on page 5-2.
Also, refer to http://printer. konicaminolta.com for a complete list of currently approved media.
Media type is set
incorrectly.
When printing envelopes, labels, postcards, thick stock, or letterheads, specify the appropriate media type in the
printer driver.
Symptom Cause Solution8-28 Solving Problems with Printing Quality
There are
toner
smudges or
residual
images.
One or more of the
toner cartridges are
defective or installed
incorrectly.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check each for damage. If one or more
is damaged, replace it.
There are
toner
smudges on
the back side
of the page
(whether or
not it has
been
duplexed).
The media path is
dirty with toner.
Print several blank sheets and the
excess toner should disappear.
One or more of the
toner cartridges are
defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check each for damage. If one or more
is damaged, replace it.
The imaging cartridge
is defective.
Remove the imaging cartridge and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
Abnormal
areas (white,
black, or
color) appear
in a regular
pattern.
The print head window is dirty.
Clean the print head window.
A toner cartridge may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridge with the
color causing the abnormal image.
Replace it with a new toner cartridge.
The imaging cartridge
is defective.
Remove the imaging cartridge and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Problems with Printing Quality 8-29
Image
defects.
The print head window is dirty.
Clean the print head window.
A toner cartridge may
be leaking.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
A toner cartridge may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridge with the
color causing the abnormal image.
Replace it with a new toner cartridge.
The imaging cartridge
may be defective.
Remove the imaging cartridge and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
Lateral lines
or bands
appear on
image.
The printer is not
level.
Place the printer on a flat, hard, level
surface.
The media path is
dirty with toner.
Print several sheets and the excess
toner should disappear.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check each for damage. If one or more
is damaged, replace it.
The imaging cartridge
is defective.
Remove the imaging cartridge and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
Thin white
horizontal
lines appear
at intervals
on images.
Toner is not evenly
adhering to the
media.
Perform IMAGE REFRESH. (On the
control panel menu, go to MAIN
MENU/QUALITY MENU/IMAGE
REFRESH, then select YES.)
If the problem persists, contact your
vendor or authorized service provider.
Colors look
drastically
wrong.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and verify
that the toner is distributed evenly on
each cartridge roller, and reinstall the
toner cartridges.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be low or empty.
Check the control panel for an X
TONER LOW or X TONER OUT message. If necessary, replace the specified toner cartridge.
Symptom Cause Solution8-30 Solving Problems with Printing Quality
If the problem is not resolved, even after all of the above have been performed, contact Technical Support with the error information.
For contact information, refer to the Need Assistance Sheet.
Colors are
not registering properly;
colors are
mixed or
have pageto-page variation.
The imaging cartridge
is not correctly
seated.
Remove the imaging cartridge and
reinstall it.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check each for damage. If one or more
is damaged, replace it.
The media is moist
from humidity.
Remove the moist media and replace it
with new, dry media.
The color
has a poor
reproduction
or has poor
color density.
The imaging cartridge
may be defective.
Remove the imaging cartridge and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
Perform AIDC. (On the control panel
menu, go to MAIN MENU/QUALITY MENU/AIDC/REQUEST
AIDC, then select YES.)
Symptom Cause SolutionStatus, Error, and Service Messages 8-31
Status, Error, and Service Messages
Status, error, and service messages are displayed in the control panel message window. They provide information about your printer and help you locate
many problems. When the condition associated with a displayed message
has changed, the message is cleared from the window.
Standard Status Messages
This message... means... do this...
CALIBRATING Whenever you replace a
toner cartridge or reboot the
printer after making environmental changes, the printer
automatically pauses to do
an Auto-Image Density Control (AIDC) cycle. This process is provided to make
reliable printer operation
with optimum output quality
possible.
No action needed.
CANCELLING JOB The job is being cancelled.
ENERGY SAVER The printer is in Energy
Saver mode to reduce
power consumption during
periods of inactivity.
In addition, the machine will
return to its normal operating
condition when any key on
the control panel is pressed.
IDLE The printer is on and ready
to receive data.
INITIALIZING The printer is being initialized.
PRINTING The printer is printing.8-32 Status, Error, and Service Messages
Error Messages (Warning)
PROCESSING The printer is processing
data.
No action needed.
magicolor 1650
STARTING PRINTER
The printer is being started
up.
PORT AUTH ACTIVE The IEEE802.1x port is
being authorized.
WARMING UP The printer is warming up.
REFRESHING The printer is adjusting the
toner distribution.
This message... means... do this...
CHECK TRAY1
PAPER
(Displaying alternately)
PRESS
MENU/SELECT
Tray 1 is empty. Load the media into
Tray 1, and then press
the Menu Select key.
Media has misfed in
Tray 1.
Remove the misfed
media.
I/C END The imaging cartridge
has reached the end
of its life.
Replace the imaging
cartridge.
"Printing can
continue,
however, the
printing result are
not guaranteed.
If printing is
continued, the
message "I/C
LIFE END"
appears and
printing stops.
I/C LOW The imaging cartridge
is near the end of its
life.
Prepare a new imaging
cartridge.
TRAY 2 IS EMPTY Tray 2 is empty. Load the media into
Tray 2.
This message... means... do this...Status, Error, and Service Messages 8-33
TRAY 2 OPEN Tray 2 cassette is not
installed or is not fully
closed.
Close Tray 2 or print
from another tray.
VIDEO I/F ERROR A video interface
error occurred in the
printer.
Turn off the printer. After
a few seconds, turn on
the printer.
X INCORRECT The X toner cartridge
is an unapproved
type.
Install a
KONICA MINOLTA
toner cartridge of the
appropriate type (AM,
EU, AP or GC). See
page 6-3.
X MEMORY ERROR A memory error
occurred in the toner
cartridge.
Re-install the specified
toner cartridge.
X TONER LOW The X toner cartridge
is nearly empty.
Prepare the specified
color toner cartridge.
X TONER OUT
(Ready Indicator: On. Error
Indicator: Off)
The X toner cartridge
is empty.
(If the MAIN MENU/
QUALITY MENU/
TONER OUT ACTION
menu is set to
CONTINUE.)
Replace the toner cartridge.
"Printing can
continue,
however, the
printing results
are not
guaranteed.
If printing is
continued, the
message "X
TONER LIFE
END" appears
and printing
stops.
This message... means... do this...8-34 Status, Error, and Service Messages
Error Messages (Operator Call)
This
message...
means... do this...
AUTH
TIMEOUT
The user is automatically
logged off due to IEEE802.1x
port authorization.
Reauthorize the IEEE802.1x
port, and then log on.
AIDC
ERROR
AIDC sensor error. Open and close front cover
to automatically clean AIDC
parts.
BELT
ERROR
The printer detected incorrect
image position on the image
transfer belt.
Check the cyan and black
toner cartridges and replace
them if they have run out.
If the error has not been
recovered by this procedure, please call Technical
Support.
DUPLEX
UNIT
PANEL
OPEN
Duplex cover is open. Close the duplex cover.
DOWNLOAD
IMAGE
INVALID
While updating code, an error
has occurred.
The user should attempt the
upgrade process again.
I/C LIFE
END
The imaging cartridge is
reached the end of its life.
Replace the imaging cartridge.
PAPER JAM
DUPLEX
Media has misfed in the
duplex option.
Locate and remove the misfeed.
PAPER JAM
EXIT
Media has misfed in the fuser
area.
PAPER JAM
FUSER
PAPER JAM
TRANSFER
Media has misfed in the transfer roller area. This type of
misfeed means that the media
did not make it to the paper
exit area.
PAPER JAM
TRAY 2
Media has misfed while being
pulled from Tray 2.
Locate and remove the misfeed.Status, Error, and Service Messages 8-35
PUT
"SIZE"
"TYPE"
IN TRAY 1
The size of paper being
printed on is different from the
size of paper specified in the
printer driver.
Load the correct paper on
Tray1, and press the Menu
Select key, then specify the
size and type of the paper.
PUT
“SIZE”
“TYPE”
IN TRAY 2
The paper size set from the
printer driver is different from
the size of paper loaded into
Tray 2.
Open Tray 2 and keep
correct paper size. Then
close Tray 2.
Specify the correct paper
size in the MAIN MENU/
PAPER MENU/INPUT
TRAY/TRAY2/MEDIA
SIZE menu.
TOP COVER
OPEN
The printer’s top cover is
open.
Close the top cover.
The imaging cartridge is not
installed.
Install the imaging cartridge.
A imaging cartridge incompatible with the machine is
installed.
Replace the imaging cartridge with a correct one.
X TONER
LIFE END
The X toner cartridge has
reached the end of its life.
Replace the toner cartridge.
"If the MAIN MENU/
QUALITY MENU/
TONER OUT
ACTION menu is set
to CONTINUE.
X TONER
MISSING
The X toner cartridge is not
installed.
Install a X toner cartridge.
X TONER
OUT
REPLACE
XXXX
(Ready Indicator: Off. Error
Indicator: On)
The X toner cartridge is empty.
(If the MAIN MENU/
QUALITY MENU/TONER OUT
ACTION menu is set to STOP.)
Replace the toner cartridge.
"If the MAIN MENU/
QUALITY MENU/
TONER OUT
ACTION menu is set
to CONTINUE,
printing can continue.
However, the printing
results are not
guaranteed.
This
message...
means... do this...8-36 Status, Error, and Service Messages
Service Messages
These messages indicate a more serious error that can only be corrected by
a customer service engineer. If one of these messages appears, turn the
printer off, then turn it on again. If the problem persists, contact your local
vendor or authorized service provider.
This service
message...
means... do this...
SERVICE
CALL XXXX
An error has been detected
with the item indicated “XXXX”
in the service message.
Reboot the printer. This often
clears the service message,
and printer operation can
resume.
If the problem persists, contact Technical Support.Installing
Accessories9-2 Introduction
Introduction
Note
Use of accessories not manufactured or supported by
KONICA MINOLTA will void your warranty.
This chapter provides information about the following accessories.
Note
Installing accessories always requires that the printer and accessories
are turned off and unplugged during installation.
" For details on the available options, refer to
printer.konicaminolta.com.
Tray 2 500-sheet tray
Duplex Option Auto duplexing
"In order for the duplex option to be installed,
Tray 2 must be installed on the printer.
Duplex Option and
Attachment
Auto duplexing
"The attachment is an interface unit for
installing the duplex option on the machine.
"During installation, install the attachment
before installing the duplex option.Tray 2 9-3
Tray 2
If Tray 2 is installed, up to 500 additional sheets of A4/Letter-size paper can
be loaded.
Installing Tray 2
Note
Since consumables are installed in the printer, be sure to keep the
printer level when moving it in order to prevent accidental spills.
1 Turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord and interface cables.9-4 Tray 2
2 Remove the dust cover from Tray 1.
Close Tray 1 and the output tray.
3 Prepare Tray 2.
" Be sure to place Tray 2 on a level surface.
4 Lift the printer and place it on top
of Tray 2, making sure that the
positioning pins on Tray 2 correctly fit into the holes in the bottom of the printer.
5 Open Tray 1 and reattach the dust cover.
6 Load paper into Tray 2.
For details on loading paper, refer to “Tray 2” in “Loading Plain Paper” on
page 5-18.
7 Insert Tray 2 into the printer.
8 Reconnect all interface cables.Tray 2 9-5
9 Reconnect the power cord, and
turn on the printer.
10 Declare the Tray 2 in the Windows printer driver (Properties/Configure
tab, see page 2-2).9-6 Duplex Option
Duplex Option
Duplex (Double Sided) printing can be performed automatically with the
duplex option installed.
See “Duplexing” on page 5-21.
In order for the duplex option to be installed, either of the following must be
installed on the printer.
z Tray 2
z Attachment
" If Tray 2 is installed, it is not necessary to install the attachment. In this
case, skip “Installing the Attachment”, and continue with “Installing the
Duplex Option” on page 9-8.
Installing Attachment
If the attachment is installed, the duplex option can be installed.
(The attachment cannot be used by itself; it must be used together with the
duplex option.)
Note
Since consumables are installed in the printer, be sure to keep the
printer level when moving it in order to prevent accidental spills.
Duplex option AttachmentDuplex Option 9-7
1 Turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord and interface cables.
2 Remove the dust cover from
Tray 1.
Close Tray 1 and the output tray.
3 Prepare the attachment.
" Be sure to place the attachment on a level surface.
4 Lift the printer and place it on top
the attachment, making sure that
the positioning pins on the
attachment correctly fit into the
holes on the bottom of the
printer.
5 Open Tray 1 and reattach the dust cover.
Next, install the duplex option.9-8 Duplex Option
Installing the Duplex Option
" The illustrations in the following installation procedure show the printer
with Tray 2 installed; however, the installation procedure would be the
same if the attachment was installed.
1 Turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord and interface cables.
2 Remove the tape affixed to the
rear cover.
3 Prepare the duplex option.Duplex Option 9-9
4 Install the duplex option.
Align the duplex option with its
installation position, and then
push down on the bottom of the
duplex option until it locks into
place.
Note
When attaching the duplex option, attach the bottom of the option first.
If the duplex option is attached incorrectly, it may be damaged.
5 Open the duplex cover.
While holding the duplex option
against the printer, tighten the
screws inside the cover to complete the installation of the
duplex option.9-10 Duplex Option
6 Reconnect all interface cables.
7 Reconnect the power cord, and
turn on the printer.
8 Declare the duplex in the Windows printer driver (Properties/Configure
tab, see page 2-2).AppendixA-2 Technical Specifications
Technical Specifications
Printer
Type Desktop full color laser beam printer
Printing system Dual laser diode with polygon mirror
Developing system Mono component development system
Fusing system Heat roller system
Resolution 600 dpi × 600 dpi × 4 bits or
600 dpi × 600 dpi × 1 bit
First print Simplex
Monochrome:
13.0 seconds for A4, Letter (plain paper)
Full color:
22.0 seconds for A4, Letter (plain paper)
Duplex
Monochrome:
26.0 seconds for A4, Letter (plain paper)
Full color:
35.0 seconds for A4, Letter (plain paper)
Print speed Simplex
Monochrome:
20.0 pages per minute for A4, Letter (plain
paper)
Full color:
5.0 pages per minute for A4, Letter (plain
paper)
Duplex
Monochrome:
Tray 1: 8.0 pages per minute for A4, Letter
(plain paper)
Tray 2: 13.2 pages per minute for A4, Letter (plain paper)
Full color:
5.0 pages per minute for A4, Letter (plain
paper)
Warm-up time Avg. 45 secondsTechnical Specifications A-3
Media sizes Tray 1
Paper width:92 to 216 mm (3.6 to 8.5")
Paper length:
Plain paper:
195 to 356 mm (7.7 to 14.0")
Thick stock 1/2:
184 to 297 mm (7.25 to 11.7")
Tray 2 (Optional)
A4/Letter
Paper/Media Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2
; 16 to 24 lb bond)
Envelope
Thick stock 1 (91 to 163 g/m2
)
Thick stock 2 (164 to 209 g/m2
)
Postcard
Letterhead
Label sheet
Input capacity Tray 1
Plain paper: 200 sheets
Envelope: 10 envelopes
Label/Letterhead/Postcard/Thick Stock:
50 sheets
Tray 2 (Optional)
Plain paper: 500 sheets
Output capacity Output tray: 100 sheets (A4, Letter)
Operating temperature 10 to 35°C (50 to 95°F)
Operating humidity 15 to 85%
Power supply 120 V, 60 Hz
220 to 240 V, 50 to 60 Hz
Power consumption 120 V: 1000 W or less
220 to 240 V: 1060 W or less
Energy Saver Mode: 18.5 W or less
Amperage 120 V: 8.4 A or less
220 to 240 V: 4.4 A or less A-4 Technical Specifications
Acoustic Noise Printing: 50 dB or less (monochrome)
49 dB or less (color)
Standby: 29 dB or less
External dimensions Height: 275 mm (10.8")
Width: 396 mm (15.6")
Depth: 380 mm (14.9")
Weights 11.9 kg (without consumables)
15.1 kg (with consumables)
Interface USB 2.0 High-Speed compliant, 10Base-T/
100Base-TX Ethernet
Standard memory 256 MBTechnical Specifications A-5
Consumable Life Expectancy Chart
User-Replaceable
Service-Replaceable
" The values listed in the above table indicate the number of pages for
simplex printing using A4/Letter-size media with 5% coverage.
The actual life may differ (be shorter) depending on the printing conditions (coverage, paper size, etc.), differences in the printing method,
such as continuous printing or intermittent printing (when print jobs of
one page are often printed), or the type of paper used, for example,
thick paper. In addition, the life will be affected by the temperature and
humidity of the operating environment.
Item Average Life Expectancy (in Simplex Pages)
Toner cartridge Starter Cartridge =
500 pages (Y, M, C)
1,000 pages (K)
Replacement Cartridge =
Standard-capacity: 1,500 pages (Y, M, C)
High-capacity: 2,500 pages (Y, M, C, K)
Imaging cartridge Monochrome:
45,000 pages (Continuous)
10,000 pages (1 page per job)
Full color:
11,250 pages (Continuous)
7,500 pages (1 page per job)
Fuser unit 50,000 pages
Item Average Life Expectancy
Transfer roller 50,000 pagesA-6 Our Concern for Environmental Protection
Our Concern for Environmental Protection
As an ENERGY STAR
®
Partner, we have determined that this machine meets
the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency.
What is an ENERGY STAR product?
An ENERGY STAR product has a special feature that allows it to automatically switch to a “low-power mode” after a period of inactivity. An ENERGY
STAR product uses energy more efficiently, saves you money on utility bills
and helps protect the environment.Index
Index A-7
A
Accessories
Duplex option ..............................9-6
Tray 2 ..........................................9-3
C
Configuration menu .....................4-5
Consumables
Fuser Unit .................................6-19
Imaging Cartridge .....................6-16
Toner cartridge ...........................6-2
Control panel ................................4-2
D
Duplexing ....................................5-21
Duplex option ..............................9-6
E
Envelope ....................................... 5-5
Error messages .......................... 8-32
L
Labels ........................................... 5-6
Letterhead .................................... 5-7
Loading media ........................... 5-10
M
Maintenance ................................. 7-2
Media
Clearing misfeeds ...................... 8-5
Loading .................................... 5-10
Path ............................................ 8-5
Preventing misfeeds ................... 8-4
Printable area ............................. 5-8
Media misfeed
Duplex option ........................... 8-17A-8 Index
Interior .........................................8-5
Tray 2 ........................................8-14
Media path .....................................8-5
Media storage .............................5-23
Media type
Envelope .....................................5-5
Labels .........................................5-6
Letterhead ...................................5-7
Plain paper ..................................5-3
Postcard ......................................5-7
Thick stock ..................................5-4
Message window ..........................4-2
Messages ....................................8-31
Misfeed problems .......................8-19
Clearing ......................................8-5
Media path ..................................8-5
Preventing ...................................8-4
O
Output tray ..................................5-22
P
Page margins ................................5-9
Plain paper ....................................5-3
Postcard ........................................5-7
Preventing media misfeeds .........8-4
Print quality .................................8-25
Printable Area ...............................5-8
Printer
Parts ...........................................1-4
Printer driver .................................2-6
Advanced tab ..............................2-7
Basic tab .....................................2-8
Cover page tab ...........................2-8
Displaying ...................................2-5
Layout tab ...................................2-8
Other Tab ....................................2-9
Quality Tab .................................2-9
Uninstalling .................................2-4
Watermark/Overlay Tab ..............2-8
S
Service messages ......................8-36
Status Monitor ..............................3-2
Closing ....................................... 3-3
Opening ...................................... 3-2
Using .......................................... 3-2
T
Thick stock ................................... 5-4
Tray 2 ............................................ 9-3
Troubleshooting .......................... 8-1
User’s Guide [Copy Operations]bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-1
Table of contents
1 Introduction
1.1 Welcome .......................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.1 User's guides ..................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.2 User's Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2 Conventions used in this manual .................................................................................................. 1-4
1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual ............................................................................................................. 1-4
To use this machine safely................................................................................................................. 1-4
Procedural instruction........................................................................................................................ 1-4
Key symbols....................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.2 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-5
Original and paper sizes .................................................................................................................... 1-5
Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-5
2 Part names and their functions
2.1 Options............................................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.1.1 bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS................................................................................................ 2-2
2.1.2 bizhub C452....................................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2 Main Body........................................................................................................................................ 2-7
2.2.1 Outside of the main body (front) ........................................................................................................ 2-7
2.2.2 Outside of the main body (rear) ......................................................................................................... 2-9
2.2.3 Main bodyInside............................................................................................................................... 2-11
bizhub C652/C552/C452 ................................................................................................................. 2-11
bizhub C652DS/C552DS ................................................................................................................. 2-13
2.2.4 Control panel.................................................................................................................................... 2-14
Adjusting the angle of the control panel .......................................................................................... 2-15
2.2.5 Touch panel ..................................................................................................................................... 2-16
2.3 Option............................................................................................................................................. 2-18
2.3.1 Finisher FS-526/Saddle stitcher SD-508/Punch kit PK-516............................................................ 2-18
2.3.2 Job separator JS-602 ...................................................................................................................... 2-20
2.3.3 Z Folding Unit ZU-606 ..................................................................................................................... 2-21
2.3.4 Post Inserter PI-505 ......................................................................................................................... 2-22
2.3.5 Finisher FS-527/ Saddle Stitcher SD-509/ Punch Kit PK-517/ Job Separator JS-603................... 2-23
2.3.6 Job Separator JS-504...................................................................................................................... 2-25
2.3.7 Large capacity unit LU-301/LU-204 ................................................................................................ 2-26
3 Using this machine
3.1 Turning on or off the machine ....................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Basic copy operations.................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.1 Placing originals................................................................................................................................. 3-4
Loading the original into the ADF ...................................................................................................... 3-4
Placing the original on the original glass ........................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.2 Basic copy operations ....................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.3 Copy operations using multiple functions ......................................................................................... 3-6
Functions that cannot be combined .................................................................................................. 3-8
4 Control Panel Keys
Control panel and functions............................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1 About the [Start] key, the [Stop] key, and the [Interrupt] key..................................................... 4-4
The [Start] key .................................................................................................................................... 4-4
The [Stop] key .................................................................................................................................... 4-4bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-2
The [Interrupt] key .............................................................................................................................. 4-4
The [Reset] key .................................................................................................................................. 4-4
4.2 About the [Copy] key, the [Fax/Scan] key, and the [User Box] key ........................................... 4-5
The [Copy] key ................................................................................................................................... 4-5
The [Fax/Scan] key ............................................................................................................................ 4-5
The [User Box] key............................................................................................................................. 4-5
4.3 The [Utility/Counter] key ................................................................................................................ 4-6
4.4 The [Mode Memory] key................................................................................................................. 4-7
4.5 The [Access] key............................................................................................................................. 4-8
Controlling access to the machine by user/account (user authentication/account track)................. 4-8
Using the machine during non-scheduled hours............................................................................. 4-10
4.6 The [Power Save] key ................................................................................................................... 4-11
4.7 The [Accessibility] key.................................................................................................................. 4-12
4.8 The [Enlarge Display] key............................................................................................................. 4-14
4.9 The [Guidance] key ....................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.10 The [C] (Clear) key ........................................................................................................................ 4-17
4.11 The [Proof Copy] key .................................................................................................................... 4-18
Printing one set to check the copy result (Proof Copy) ................................................................... 4-18
Using a preview image to check the copy result (Advanced Preview) ............................................ 4-19
5 Copy Function
5.1 Basic................................................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.1.1 Color .................................................................................................................................................. 5-4
5.1.2 Paper.................................................................................................................................................. 5-5
Configuring a custom size ................................................................................................................. 5-6
Configuring wide paper...................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.1.3 Zoom.................................................................................................................................................. 5-7
5.1.4 Duplex/Combine ................................................................................................................................ 5-8
5.1.5 Finishing........................................................................................................................................... 5-10
5.1.6 Post Inserter..................................................................................................................................... 5-12
Keys on control panel ...................................................................................................................... 5-12
Finishing using Post Inserter............................................................................................................ 5-13
5.1.7 Separate Scan ................................................................................................................................. 5-13
5.1.8 Auto Rotate OFF .............................................................................................................................. 5-14
5.2 Original Setting.............................................................................................................................. 5-15
Copying mixed originals .................................................................................................................. 5-16
Copying Z-folded originals............................................................................................................... 5-17
5.3 Quality/Density .............................................................................................................................. 5-18
5.4 Application..................................................................................................................................... 5-20
5.4.1 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert............................................................................................................. 5-21
OHP Interleave................................................................................................................................. 5-21
Cover Sheet ..................................................................................................................................... 5-22
Insert Sheet...................................................................................................................................... 5-23
Insert Image ..................................................................................................................................... 5-24
Chapters .......................................................................................................................................... 5-26
Program Jobs .................................................................................................................................. 5-27
5.4.2 Edit Color ......................................................................................................................................... 5-29
Neg./Pos. Reverse ........................................................................................................................... 5-29
Mirror Image..................................................................................................................................... 5-30
Background Color............................................................................................................................ 5-31
Color Adjustment ............................................................................................................................. 5-31
5.4.3 Book Copy/Repeat .......................................................................................................................... 5-33
Book Copy ....................................................................................................................................... 5-33
Image Repeat................................................................................................................................... 5-34
Poster Mode .................................................................................................................................... 5-35
Booklet Original................................................................................................................................ 5-36
5.4.4 Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 5-37
5.4.5 Image Adjust .................................................................................................................................... 5-39bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-3
5.4.6 Booklet............................................................................................................................................. 5-40
5.4.7 Erase ................................................................................................................................................ 5-41
Frame Erase..................................................................................................................................... 5-41
Non-Image Area Erase..................................................................................................................... 5-42
5.4.8 Stamp/Composition......................................................................................................................... 5-43
Date/Time......................................................................................................................................... 5-44
Page Number................................................................................................................................... 5-45
Stamp............................................................................................................................................... 5-47
Copy Protect.................................................................................................................................... 5-48
Copy Guard...................................................................................................................................... 5-49
Password Copy................................................................................................................................ 5-50
Stamp Repeat .................................................................................................................................. 5-51
Header/Footer.................................................................................................................................. 5-53
Watermark........................................................................................................................................ 5-54
Overlay............................................................................................................................................. 5-55
Registered Overlay........................................................................................................................... 5-56
5.4.9 Card Copy........................................................................................................................................ 5-59
5.4.10 Save in User Box ............................................................................................................................. 5-60
5.5 Left panel display .......................................................................................................................... 5-61
5.5.1 Job List ............................................................................................................................................ 5-62
5.5.2 Check Job........................................................................................................................................ 5-64
6 User Settings
6.1 System Settings .............................................................................................................................. 6-3
6.2 Custom Display Settings ................................................................................................................ 6-6
6.3 Copier Settings................................................................................................................................ 6-8
6.4 Fax/Scan Settings......................................................................................................................... 6-11
6.5 Printer Settings ............................................................................................................................. 6-12
6.6 Change Password......................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.7 Change E-Mail Address................................................................................................................ 6-14
6.8 Change Icon .................................................................................................................................. 6-15
6.9 Register Authentication Information........................................................................................... 6-16
6.10 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting ......................................................................................................... 6-18
7 Administrator Settings
7.1 System Settings .............................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.1.1 Power Save Settings.......................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.1.2 Output Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-4
7.1.3 Date/Time Settings ............................................................................................................................ 7-5
7.1.4 Daylight Saving Time ......................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.1.5 Weekly Timer Setting ......................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.1.6 Restrict User Access.......................................................................................................................... 7-8
7.1.7 Expert Adjustment ............................................................................................................................. 7-9
Leading Edge Adjustment................................................................................................................ 7-13
Centering.......................................................................................................................................... 7-13
Media Adjustment............................................................................................................................ 7-14
Center Staple Position ..................................................................................................................... 7-14
Half-Fold Position ............................................................................................................................ 7-15
Tri-Fold Position Adjustment ........................................................................................................... 7-15
Punch Vertical Position Adjustment................................................................................................. 7-16
Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment ............................................................................................ 7-16
Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment ............................................................................................... 7-17
Punch Edge Sensor Adjustment...................................................................................................... 7-17
Vertical Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment ................................................................................... 7-17
Horizontal Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment............................................................................... 7-18
1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment ....................................................................................................... 7-18
2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment ...................................................................................................... 7-19
Punch Unit Size Detect Sensor........................................................................................................ 7-19bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-4
Color Registration Adjust................................................................................................................. 7-20
Gradation Adjustment...................................................................................................................... 7-21
7.1.8 List/Counter ..................................................................................................................................... 7-22
7.1.9 Reset Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-23
7.1.10 User Box Settings ............................................................................................................................ 7-24
7.1.11 Standard Size Setting ...................................................................................................................... 7-24
7.1.12 Stamp Settings ................................................................................................................................ 7-25
7.1.13 Blank Page Print Settings ................................................................................................................ 7-26
7.1.14 Skip Job Operation Settings............................................................................................................ 7-26
7.1.15 Default Bypass Paper Type Setting ................................................................................................. 7-27
7.1.16 Advanced Preview Setting............................................................................................................... 7-27
7.1.17 Page Number Print Position............................................................................................................. 7-28
7.2 Administrator/Machine Settings.................................................................................................. 7-29
7.3 One-Touch/User Box Registration.............................................................................................. 7-30
7.4 User Authentication/Account Track............................................................................................ 7-31
7.4.1 General Settings .............................................................................................................................. 7-32
7.4.2 User Authentication Settings ........................................................................................................... 7-34
7.4.3 Account Track Settings.................................................................................................................... 7-37
7.4.4 Print without Authentication............................................................................................................. 7-38
7.4.5 Print Counter List ............................................................................................................................. 7-38
7.4.6 External Server Settings................................................................................................................... 7-39
7.4.7 Limiting Access to Destinations....................................................................................................... 7-39
7.4.8 Authentication Device Settings........................................................................................................ 7-40
7.4.9 User/Account Common Setting....................................................................................................... 7-41
7.4.10 Scan to Home Settings.................................................................................................................... 7-41
7.4.11 Scan to Authorized Folder Settings ................................................................................................. 7-41
7.5 Network Settings .......................................................................................................................... 7-42
7.6 Copier Settings.............................................................................................................................. 7-43
7.7 Printer Settings ............................................................................................................................. 7-45
7.8 Fax Settings................................................................................................................................... 7-46
7.9 System Connection....................................................................................................................... 7-47
7.10 Security Settings ........................................................................................................................... 7-49
7.10.1 Administrator Password................................................................................................................... 7-49
7.10.2 User Box Administrator Setting ....................................................................................................... 7-49
7.10.3 Administrator Security Levels .......................................................................................................... 7-50
7.10.4 Security Details ................................................................................................................................ 7-51
7.10.5 Enhanced Security Mode................................................................................................................. 7-54
Required settings............................................................................................................................. 7-54
Settings to forcibly changed ............................................................................................................ 7-54
7.10.6 HDD Settings ................................................................................................................................... 7-55
7.10.7 Function Management Settings....................................................................................................... 7-56
7.10.8 Stamp Settings ................................................................................................................................ 7-57
7.10.9 Driver Password Encryption Setting ................................................................................................ 7-57
7.11 License Settings............................................................................................................................ 7-58
7.12 OpenAPI Authentication Management Settings ........................................................................ 7-59
8 Maintenance
8.1 Paper ................................................................................................................................................ 8-2
8.1.1 Checking the paper............................................................................................................................ 8-2
Replenishment message.................................................................................................................... 8-2
Precautions regarding the use of paper ............................................................................................ 8-2
Paper storage..................................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.2 Loading paper.................................................................................................................................... 8-3
Loading paper into trays 1 and 2....................................................................................................... 8-3
Loading paper into trays 3 and 4....................................................................................................... 8-4bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-5
Loading paper into the bypass tray ................................................................................................... 8-5
Loading paper into the LCT ............................................................................................................... 8-7
8.2 Consumables................................................................................................................................... 8-8
8.2.1 Checking comsumables .................................................................................................................... 8-8
Replacement message ...................................................................................................................... 8-8
Checking consumables status......................................................................................................... 8-10
Viewing counters.............................................................................................................................. 8-10
Checking the total number of pages printed ................................................................................... 8-11
8.3 Cleaning procedure ...................................................................................................................... 8-12
Slit glass (bizhub C652/C552/C452)................................................................................................ 8-12
Slit glass (front) (bizhub C652DS/C552DS)...................................................................................... 8-12
Slit glass (back) (bizhub C652DS/C552DS) ..................................................................................... 8-13
Original glass, control panel, paper take-up roller........................................................................... 8-13
Housing, document pad .................................................................................................................. 8-14
9 Troubleshooting
9.1 When the message "Trouble" appears (call a service representative)...................................... 9-2
Problems that cannot be corrected by the user ................................................................................ 9-2
9.2 Troubleshooting table..................................................................................................................... 9-4
Simple troubleshooting...................................................................................................................... 9-4
Main messages and their remedies ................................................................................................... 9-8
Icons that appear in the touch-panel screen ................................................................................... 9-10
9.3 If print quality is deteriorated....................................................................................................... 9-12
Cleaning the electrostatic charger wire ........................................................................................... 9-12
Cleaning the print head.................................................................................................................... 9-13
10 Authentication unit (biometric type)
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) ............................................................................ 10-2
10.1.1 Configuring this machine ................................................................................................................. 10-3
10.1.2 Registering a user ............................................................................................................................ 10-5
Registering a user using the control panel of this machine............................................................. 10-5
Registering a user using Data Administrator ................................................................................... 10-6
Checking the version of the installed Data Administrator................................................................ 10-7
Setup................................................................................................................................................ 10-7
User registration............................................................................................................................. 10-11
10.1.3 Logging in to this machine............................................................................................................. 10-17
When 1-to-many authentication has been specified ..................................................................... 10-17
When 1-to-1 authentication has been specified............................................................................ 10-18
11 Authentication unit (IC card type)
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) ..................................................................................... 11-2
11.1.1 Configuring this machine ................................................................................................................. 11-2
11.1.2 Registering a user ............................................................................................................................ 11-4
Registering a user using the control panel of this machine............................................................. 11-4
Registering a user using Data Administrator ................................................................................... 11-6
Checking the version of the installed Data Administrator................................................................ 11-6
Setup................................................................................................................................................ 11-7
User registration............................................................................................................................. 11-11
11.1.3 Logging in to this machine............................................................................................................. 11-15
When IC card authentication is enabled........................................................................................ 11-15
When IC card authentication + password authentication is enabled ............................................ 11-16
12 Specifications
12.1 Paper .............................................................................................................................................. 12-2
Paper types and paper capacities ................................................................................................... 12-2
12.2 Machine specifications................................................................................................................. 12-4
bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452.................................................................................... 12-4bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-6
Automatic duplex unit...................................................................................................................... 12-7
Reverse automatic document feeder (bizhub C652/C552/C452).................................................... 12-7
Reverse automatic document feeder (bizhub C652DS/C552DS).................................................... 12-7
12.3 Options........................................................................................................................................... 12-8
Large capacity unit LU-301.............................................................................................................. 12-8
Large capacity unit LU-204.............................................................................................................. 12-8
Finisher FS-526................................................................................................................................ 12-9
Saddle stitcher SD-508.................................................................................................................. 12-10
Punch kit PK-516........................................................................................................................... 12-11
Job Separator JS-602.................................................................................................................... 12-12
Z-Folding Unit ZU-606................................................................................................................... 12-12
Post Inserter PI-505 ....................................................................................................................... 12-13
Finisher FS-527.............................................................................................................................. 12-13
Saddle stitcher SD-509.................................................................................................................. 12-14
Punch Kit PK-517 .......................................................................................................................... 12-15
Job Separator JS-504.................................................................................................................... 12-15
Job Separator JS-603.................................................................................................................... 12-16
Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101.................................................................................. 12-16
Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-102.................................................................................. 12-17
Authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201 ..................................................................................... 12-17
13 Appendix
13.1 Colors............................................................................................................................................. 13-2
Hue, brightness, and saturation....................................................................................................... 13-2
Red, green, and blue........................................................................................................................ 13-4
13.2 Image quality ................................................................................................................................. 13-5
Contrast, copy density, and sharpness ........................................................................................... 13-5
Color balance (CMYK) ..................................................................................................................... 13-6
13.3 Glossary ......................................................................................................................................... 13-7
14 Index
14.1 Index by item ................................................................................................................................. 14-2
14.2 Index by button.............................................................................................................................. 14-61 Introductionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 1-2
1.1 Welcome
1
1 Introduction
1.1 Welcome
Thank you for purchasing this machine.
This User's Guide describes the functions, operating instructions, precautions for correct operation, and
simple troubleshooting guidelines of this machine. In order to obtain maximum performance from this
product and use it effectively, please read this User's Guide as necessary.
1.1.1 User's guides
Printed manual Overview
Quick Guide [Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations]
This manual describes operating procedures and the
functions that are most frequently used in order to enable you to begin using this machine immediately.
This manual also contains notes and precautions that
should be followed to ensure safe usage of this machine.
Please be sure to read this manual before using this
machine.
User's guide CD manuals Overview
Copy Operations This manual describes details on copy mode operations and the settings of this machine.
• Specifications of originals and copy paper
• Copy function
• Maintaining this machine
• Troubleshooting
Enlarge Display Operations This manual describes details on operating procedures of enlarge display mode.
• Copy function
• Scanning function
• G3 fax function
• Network fax function
Print Operations This manual describes details on printer functions.
• Printer function
• Configuring the printer driver
Box Operations This manual describes details on the boxed functions
using the hard disk.
• Saving data in User Boxes
• Retrieving data from User Boxes
• Printing and transferring data from User Boxes
Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations This manual describes details on transmitting
scanned data.
• Scan to E-Mail, FTP TX, SMB TX, Save in User
Box, WebDAV and Web Service
• G3 fax
• IP Address Fax, Internet Fax
Fax Driver Operations This manual describes details on the fax driver function that transmits faxes directly from a computer.
• PC-FAX
Network Administrator This manual describes details on setting methods for
each function using the network connection.
• Network settings
• Settings using PageScope Web Connectionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 1-3
1.1 Welcome
1
1.1.2 User's Guide
This User's Guide is intended for a wide range of users ranging from those using this machine for the first
time to administrators.
It describes basic operations, functions that enable more convenient operations, maintenance procedures,
simple troubleshooting operations, and various setting methods of this machine.
Note that basic technical knowledge about the product is required to enable users to perform maintenance
work or troubleshooting operations. Limit your maintenance and troubleshooting operations to the areas
explained in this manual.
Should you experience any problems, please contact our service representative.
Advanced Function Operations This manual describes details on functions that become available by registering the optional license kit
and by connecting to an application.
• Web browser function
• Image Panel
• PDF Processing Function
• Searchable PDF
• My panel and My address function
Trademarks/Copyrights This manual describes details on trademarks and
copyrights.
• Trademarks and copyrights
User's guide CD manuals Overviewbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 1-4
1.2 Conventions used in this manual
1
1.2 Conventions used in this manual
1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual
Symbols are used in this manual to express various types of information.
The following describes each symbol related to correct and safe usage of this machine.
To use this machine safely
7 WARNING
- This symbol indicates that a failure to heed the instructions may lead to death or serious injury.
7 CAUTION
- This symbol indicates that negligence of the instructions may lead to mishandling that may cause injury
or property damage.
NOTICE
This symbol indicates a risk that may result in damage to this machine or originals.
Follow the instructions to avoid property damage.
Procedural instruction
0 This check mark indicates an option that is required in order to use conditions or functions that are
prerequisite for a procedure.
1 This format number "1" represents the first step.
2 This format number represents the order of serial steps.
% This symbol indicates a supplementary explanation of a
procedural instruction.
% This symbol indicates transition of the control panel to access a desired menu item.
This symbol indicates a desired page.
dReference
This symbol indicates a reference.
A procedural operation
is illustrated.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 1-5
1.2 Conventions used in this manual
1
View the reference as required.
Key symbols
[ ]
This symbol represents a key name on the control panel, touch panel or the computer screen, power switch,
etc.
1.2.2 Original and paper indications
Original and paper sizes
The following explains the indication for originals and paper described
in this manual.
When indicating the original or paper size, the Y side represents the
width and the X side the length.
Original and paper indications
w indicates the paper size with the length (X) being longer than the
width (Y).
v indicates the paper size with the length (X) being shorter than the
width (Y).2 Part names and their
functionsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-2
2.1 Options
2
2 Part names and their functions
2.1 Options
2.1.1 bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS
No. Name Description
1 Main unit The original is scanned by the scanner section, and the
scanned image is printed by the printer section.
Referred to as the "machine", the "main unit", or the
"C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS" throughout the manual.
2 Authentication unit (biometric type)
AU-101
Performs user authentication by scanning vein patterns in the finger.
Working table WT-506 is required to install the authentication unit.
3 Authentication unit (biometric type)
AU-102
4 Authentication unit (IC card type)
AU-201
Performs user authentication by scanning information
recorded on the IC card.
Working table WT-506 is required to install the authentication unit.
5 Working table WT-506 Provides an area to temporarily place an original or
other materials. This is also used when the authentication unit is installed.
5
6
2 3
1
4
10
8
9
7
15
16
18 19 20
17
12
11
13 14bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-3
2.1 Options
2
6 Keyboard holder KH-101 Mount this kit to use a compact keyboard.
For details on compact keyboards, contact your service representative.
7 Output Tray OT-503 Collects printed pages.
8 Mount kit MK-715 Used for banner printing.
• This option may not be available depending on the
sales area.
9 Image controller IC-412 v1.1 Allows you to use this machine as a network-enabled
color printer.
10 Large capacity unit LU-301 Can be loaded with up to 3,000 sheets of 8-1/2 e 11-
size (A4 -size) paper.
Referred to as the LCT throughout the manual.
11 Large capacity unit LU-204 Can be loaded with up to 2,500 sheets of 12 e 18-size
(A3-size) paper.
To change the paper size, contact your service representative.
Referred to as the LCT throughout the manual.
12 Saddle Stitcher SD-509 Install this unit onto the Finisher to allow Fold/Bind.
This unit is hereinafter referred to as the Saddle Stitcher through the manual.
13 Finisher FS-527 Sorts, groups and staples printed paper before feeding
out.
14 Punch Kit PK-517 Install this unit onto the Finisher to allow punching
holes.
15 Job Separator JS-603 Install this unit onto the Finisher.
Collects printed pages.
16 Z Folding Unit ZU-606 Installed onto the finisher to allow Z folding or punching.
17 Saddle stitcher SD-508 Installed onto the finisher to allow Fold/Bind.
Referred to as the saddle stitcher throughout the manual.
18 Finisher FS-526 Sorts, groups and staples printed paper before feeding
out.
19 Punch kit PK-516 Installed onto the finisher to punch holes.
20 Post Inserter PI-505 Installed onto the finisher to enable insertion of a cover
sheet into copied sheets. This unit also allows you to
manually operate the finisher (only the lower tray is
available).
21 Job Separator JS-602 Install this unit onto the Finisher.
Collects printed pages.
No illustration is provided as the options are built into the main body.
22 Fax kit FK-502 Allows this machine to function as a fax machine. Alternatively, it allows more telephone lines to be connected.
23 Stamp unit SP-501 Applies a stamp to originals that have been scanned.
24 Spare TX Maker stamp 2 A replacement stamp for the stamp unit.
25 Mount kit MK-720 Attach this kit to install an optional fax kit.
26 Local interface kit EK-604 Install this kit when using the compact keyboard. This
kit contains a speaker.
For details on compact keyboards, contact your service representative.
27 Local Interface Kit EK-605 Install this kit when using the connection function with
a Bluetooth-compatible cellular phone or PDA. This kit
contains a speaker and a receiving device for Bluetooth communication.
For details on compact keyboards, contact your service representative.
No. Name Descriptionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-4
2.1 Options
2
28 Video interface kit VI-505 Required for installing the image controller onto this
machine.
29 Security Kit SC-507 Allows you to use Copy Guard or Password Copy.
This kit is used to prevent unauthorized copying.
30 i-Option LK-101 v2 Enables a Web browser and the Image Panel function
to be used on the control panel.
31 i-Option LK-102 Enables PDF document encryption with a digital ID, attachment of a digital signature, and property settings
when distributing a PDF document using the scan or
User Box function.
32 i-Option LK-103 v2 Provides both i-Option LK-101 v2 and LK-102 functions.
• This option may not be available depending on the
sales area.
33 i-Option LK-105 Provides the searchable PDF function.
34 Upgrade kit UK-203 Required when using Web browser, image panel, PDF
processing, searchable PDF, My panel, or My address
function. If necessary, you can increase up to nine languages, which can be displayed in the control panel of
this machine.
No. Name Descriptionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-5
2.1 Options
2
2.1.2 bizhub C452
No. Name Description
1 Main unit The original is scanned by the scanner section, and the
scanned image is printed by the printer section.
Referred to as the "machine", the "main unit", or the
"C452" throughout the manual.
2 Authentication unit (biometric type)
AU-101
Performs user authentication by scanning vein patterns
in the finger.
Working table WT-506 is required to install the authentication unit.
3 Authentication unit (biometric type)
AU-102
4 Authentication unit (IC card type)
AU-201
Performs user authentication by scanning information recorded on the IC card.
Working table WT-506 is required to install the authentication unit.
5 Working table WT-506 Provides an area to temporarily place an original or other
materials. This is also used when the authentication unit
is installed.
6 Keyboard holder KH-101 Mount this kit to use a compact keyboard.
For details on compact keyboards, contact your service
representative.
7 Output Tray OT-503 Collects printed pages.
8 Mount kit MK-715 Used for banner printing.
• This option may not be available depending on the
sales area.
9 Image controller IC-412 v1.1 Allows you to use this machine as a network-enabled
color printer.
10 Large capacity unit LU-301 Can be loaded with up to 3,000 sheets of 8-1/2 e 11-size
(A4 -size) paper.
Referred to as the LCT throughout the manual.
2 3
1
4
16
11
9
10
8
13
12
14 15
5
6
7bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-6
2.1 Options
2
11 Large capacity unit LU-204 Can be loaded with up to 2,500 sheets of 12 e 18-size
(A3-size) paper.
To change the paper size, contact your service representative.
Referred to as the LCT throughout the manual.
12 Saddle Stitcher SD-509 Install this unit onto the Finisher to allow Fold/Bind.
This unit is hereinafter referred to as the Saddle Stitcher
through the manual.
13 Finisher FS-527 Sorts, groups and staples printed paper before feeding
out.
14 Punch Kit PK-517 Install this unit onto the Finisher to allow punching holes.
15 Job Separator JS-603 Install this unit onto the Finisher.
Collects printed pages.
16 Job Separator JS-504 Install this unit onto the Output Tray of the main unit to
offset the printed papers. This unit is hereinafter referred
to as the Job Separator through the manual.
No illustration is provided as the options are built into the main body.
17 Fax kit FK-502 Allows this machine to function as a fax machine. Alternatively, it allows more telephone lines to be connected.
18 Stamp unit SP-501 Applies a stamp to originals that have been scanned.
19 Spare TX Maker stamp 2 A replacement stamp for the stamp unit.
20 Mount kit MK-720 Attach this kit to install an optional fax kit.
21 Local interface kit EK-604 Install this kit when using the compact keyboard. This kit
contains a speaker.
For details on compact keyboards, contact your service
representative.
22 Local Interface Kit EK-605 Install this kit when using the connection function with a
Bluetooth-compatible cellular phone or PDA. This kit
contains a speaker and a receiving device for Bluetooth
communication.
For details on compact keyboards, contact your service
representative.
23 Video interface kit VI-505 Required for installing the image controller onto this machine.
24 Security Kit SC-507 Allows you to use Copy Guard or Password Copy.
This kit is used to prevent unauthorized copying.
25 i-Option LK-101 v2 Enables a Web browser and the Image Panel function to
be used on the control panel.
26 i-Option LK-102 Enables PDF document encryption with a digital ID, attachment of a digital signature, and property settings
when distributing a PDF document using the scan or
User Box function.
27 i-Option LK-103 v2 Provides both i-Option LK-101 v2 and LK-102 functions.
• This option may not be available depending on the
sales area.
28 i-Option LK-105 Provides the searchable PDF function.
29 Upgrade kit UK-203 Required when using Web browser, image panel, PDF
processing, searchable PDF, My panel, or My address
function. If necessary, you can increase up to nine languages, which can be displayed in the control panel of
this machine.
30 Heater HT-508 Install this unit into the tray to dehumidify the paper. Dehumidifying prevents paper in the tray from absorbing
moisture.
• This option may not be available depending on the
sales area.
No. Name Descriptionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-7
2.2 Main Body
2
2.2 Main Body
2.2.1 Outside of the main body (front)
No. Name
1 Control panel
2 Left-side cover release lever
3 Left-side cover
4 Lateral guide
5 ADF
6 Original tray
7 Original output tray
8 Sub power switch
9 USB port (type A) USB 2.0/1.1
10 USB port (type A) USB 2.0/1.1 (For compact keyboard)
11 Automatic duplex unit release lever
12 Automatic duplex unit
5
9
10
16
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
1 4 6
7
8
11
14
13
12
15
17
18
19
22 20 21
30
2
3bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-8
2.2 Main Body
2
13 Upper right-side door
14 Upper right-side door release lever
15 Bypass tray door
16 Bypass Tray
17 Bypass tray door release lever
18 Lower right-side door
19 Lower right-side door release lever
20 Paper-empty indicator
21 Total counter
22 Main power switch
23 Tray 4
24 Tray 3
25 Tray 2
26 Tray 1
27 Lower front door
28 Upper front door
29 Output tray
30 Status indicator
No. Namebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-9
2.2 Main Body
2
2.2.2 Outside of the main body (rear)
The illustration above shows the main unit with an optional video interface kit, fax kit, and mount kit.
No. Name
1 Finisher connector
2 Filter
3 Power cord
4 Power switch for dehumidifying heater
5 Jack for connecting a telephone (TEL PORT2)
6 Telephone jack 2 (LINE PORT2)
1
2
13
10
11
12
9
8
4 3
7
5
6bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-10
2.2 Main Body
2
7 Jack for connecting a telephone (TEL PORT1)
8 Telephone jack 1 (LINE PORT1)
9 USB port (type A) USB 2.0/1.1
10 RS-232C port
11 USB port (type B) USB 2.0/1.1
12 Network connector (10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T)
13 Ozone filter
No. Namebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-11
2.2 Main Body
2
2.2.3 Main bodyInside
bizhub C652/C552/C452
No. Name
1 Original glass
2 Fusing unit
3 Fusing unit cover lever
4 Print head glass cleaning tool
1
8
2
3
4
5
9
7
10
11
12 13
6bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-12
2.2 Main Body
2
5 Waste toner box
6 Imaging unit
7 Charger-cleaning tool
8 Imaging unit release lever
9 Toner cartridges
10 Slit glass
11 Original scales
12 Jam removal dial
13 Slit glass cleaner
No. Namebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-13
2.2 Main Body
2
bizhub C652DS/C552DS
No. Name
1 Original glass
2 Fusing unit
3 Fusing unit cover lever
4 Print head glass cleaning tool
1
8
2
3
4
5
9
7
10
11
12 13
14
6bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-14
2.2 Main Body
2
2.2.4 Control panel
5 Waste toner box
6 Imaging unit
7 Charger-cleaning tool
8 Imaging unit release lever
9 Toner cartridges
10 Slit glass (front)
11 Original scales
12 Opening and closing guide
13 Slit glass cleaner
14 Slit glass (back)
No. Name
No. Name
1 Stylus pen
2 Touch panel
3 Main power indicator
4 Sub power switch
5 Function key
6 Data indicator
1 2
3
5
4
8
7 6bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-15
2.2 Main Body
2
Adjusting the angle of the control panel
You can adjust the angle of the control panel of this machine among three levels. You can also tilt the control
panel to the left. Use the control panel at an angle convenient to use.
NOTICE
When tilting the control panel, do not grab the touch panel.
1 Pull the control panel release lever toward you, and then pull the
control panel up or down.
You can tilt the angle of the control panel to one of the three
positions.
2 To tilt the control panel to the left or right, hold the bottom of the
control panel, and then tilt the panel to the left or right.
7 Keypad
8 Brightness adjustment dial
No. Namebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-16
2.2 Main Body
2
2.2.5 Touch panel
When the machine has been turned on and is ready to begin the copy operation, the basic settings screen
appears. To activate a function or to select a setting, lightly press the desired button appearing in the screen.
The basic settings screen can be switched between the Basic tab and Quick Copy tab. The arrangement of
the buttons and screens differ with the Basic tab and Quick Copy tab; however, the functions that can be set
are the same. This manual describes procedures for configuring settings from the Basic tab. The Quick Copy
tab displays the setting items of the Basic tab on one screen, which is useful for configuring multiple settings.
NOTICE
Do not apply excessive pressure on the touch panel. Such impact may leave a flaw on the panel, inviting
damage to the touch panel. When operating in the touch panel, never press down on the touch panel with
force or with a pointed object such as a mechanical pencil.
Basic tab
Quick Copy tab
No. Name
1 Message display area
2 Functions/settings display area
3 Icon/shortcut key display area
4 Toner supply indicators
5 Left panel
6 Check Job
7 Job List
8 Copier setting button (arrow)
3
2
5
7
6
4
1
3
2
5
7
8
4
1
9bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-17
2.2 Main Body
2
dReference
To switch the basic settings screen:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Custom Display Settings] ö [Copier Settings] ö [Default
Tab].
To configure color selection settings for buttons and tabs:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Custom Display Settings] ö [Color Selection Settings] .
9 Color settings
No. Namebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-18
2.3 Option
2
2.3 Option
2.3.1 Finisher FS-526/Saddle stitcher SD-508/Punch kit PK-516
No. Name
1 Output tray 2
2 Output tray 1
3 Front door
1
26
20
19
18
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10
21
22
23
11
12
13
14
16
15
17
25 24bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-19
2.3 Option
2
* Press the output tray switch to move folded and center stapled paper to the end of the folding output tray.
4 Horizontal transport unit cover
5 Jam removal dial [FN8]
6 Guide lever [FN7]
7 Guide lever [FN9]
8 Jam removal dial [FN6]
9 Jam removal dial [FN5]
10 Guide lever [FN3]
11 Guide lever [FN4]
12 Punch kit
13 Punch scrap box
14 Guide lever [FN10]
15 Recessed pull
16 Jam removal dial [FN11]
17 Saddle stitcher
18 Output belt
19 Output tray switch
*
20 Folding output tray
21 Jam removal dial [FN2]
22 Guide lever [FN1]
23 Staple replacement door
24 Guide lever [FN13]
25 Guide lever [FN14]
26 Exit cover
No. Namebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-20
2.3 Option
2
2.3.2 Job separator JS-602
No. Name
1 Finishing tray
2 Job separator cover
1 2bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-21
2.3 Option
2
2.3.3 Z Folding Unit ZU-606
No. Name
1 Z folding/conveyance unit
2 Guide lever [FN1]
3 Punch scrap box
4 Front door
5 Guide lever [FN6]
6 Guide lever [FN7]
7 Guide lever [FN8]
8 Recessed pull [FN2]
9 Jam removal dial [FN5]
1
2
4 3
5 8 9
7 11 10
6bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-22
2.3 Option
2
2.3.4 Post Inserter PI-505
10 Guide lever [FN3]
11 Jam removal dial [FN4]
No. Name
No. Name
1 Post inserter control panel
2 Lower tray paper guide
3 Lower Tray
4 Upper Tray
5 Upper Tray paper guide
6 Upper unit release lever
6
1
3
4
5
2bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-23
2.3 Option
2
2.3.5 Finisher FS-527/ Saddle Stitcher SD-509/ Punch Kit PK-517/ Job Separator
JS-603
1
2
3 4 5 6 7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-24
2.3 Option
2
No, Name
1 Output tray 2
2 Output tray 1
3 Front door
4 Horizontal transport unit cover
5 Stapler
6 Guide lever [FN3]
7 Jam removal dial [FN2]
8 Guide lever [FN1]
9 Guide lever [FN4]
10 Staple holder
11 Punch scrap box
12 Saddle stitcher
20
17
18
19
15 16bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-25
2.3 Option
2
2.3.6 Job Separator JS-504
13 Jam removal dial [FN6]
14 Recessed pull [FN5]
15 Transport unit
16 Punch kit
17 Job separator
18 Staple cartridge
19 Recessed pull [FN7]
20 Folding output tray
No, Name
No. Name
1 Jam removal dial
2 Eject assist lever
3 Output tray 2
4 Tray extension
5 Output tray 1
1
2
3
4
5bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-26
2.3 Option
2
2.3.7 Large capacity unit LU-301/LU-204
No. Name
1 Jam removal cover
2 Upper door
3 Paper take-up roller
4 Paper-empty indicator
5 Release lever
1 3
2
5
4
1
3
2
5
43 Using this machinebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-2
3.1 Turning on or off the machine
3
3 Using this machine
3.1 Turning on or off the machine
This machine has two power controls: the [main power switch] and [sub power switch].
The [main power switch] turns on or off all functions of the machine. Normally, keep the [main power switch]
on.
The [sub power switch] turns on and off machine operations, for example, for copying, printing or scanning.
Turning [sub power switch] off causes the machine to enter power-saving mode.
0 When the [sub power switch] is turned on, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange, and a
screen appears to indicate that the machine is starting up. After a few seconds, the message "Warming
up. Ready to scan." appears in the touch panel, and the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue,
indicating that a job can now be queued.
0 A job can also be queued while the machine is warming up after the [sub power switch] is turned on.
After the machine has finished warming up, the scanned image will be printed.
0 The default settings are the settings that are selected immediately after the machine is turned on and
before any settings are configured from the control panel or touch panel, and those that are selected
when the [Reset] key is pressed to cancel all settings configured from the control panel or touch panel.
The default settings can be changed.
0 Do not turn off the [main power switch] while a queued job or stored data is waiting to be printed. The
jobs yet to be printed will be deleted.
0 Settings that have not been registered and jobs in the printing queue are cleared when the [main power
switch] and [sub power switch] are turned off.
0 To turn the [main power switch] on immediately after turning it off, wait for 10 or more seconds before
turning it on again. Not doing so may result in an operation failure.
0 Do not turn off the [main power switch] or [sub power switch] while images are being scanned,
transmitted, or received. Data being scanned or communicated will be deleted.
0 Do not turn off the [main power switch] or [sub power switch] during the copying or printing process. If
you turn it off, a paper jam may occur.
0 Do not connect or disconnect the USB cable of the compact keyboard while this machine is turned on.
Do not also connect another medium to the USB port for the compact keyboard.
1 To turn the power on, open the main power switch cover, and then
press n on the [main power switch].
2 Close the main power switch cover.
3 Press the [sub power switch].
Check that the touch panel is turned on.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-3
3.1 Turning on or off the machine
3
4 To turn the power off, press the [sub power switch], then the [main power switch].
dReference
To change the default settings for Copy:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Copier Settings] ö [Default Copy Settings].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-4
3.2 Basic copy operations
3
3.2 Basic copy operations
The following procedures describe how to set the original and the basic copy operations.
3.2.1 Placing originals
Place the original in the ADF or on the original glass. Select the optimal position for setting the original
according to the type of the original to be copied.
- Using the ADF, a multi-page original can be fed and scanned automatically, one page at a time from
the top. The ADF can also be used to automatically scan 2-sided originals.
- When using the original glass, place the original directly on the original glass for scanning. This method
is suited for originals in the form of a book and the like that cannot be fed through the ADF.
Load the original, and configure settings for relevant functions as needed.
Loading the original into the ADF
The following types of originals should not be loaded into the ADF. If loaded, paper may be jammed or the
original may be damaged.
- Wrinkled, folded, curled, or torn originals
- Highly translucent or transparent originals , such as OHP transparencies or diazo photosensitive paper
- Coated originals such as carbon-backed paper
- Originals printed on paper thicker than 55-7/8 lb (210 g/m2
)
- Originals printed on paper thicker than 34-1/16 lb (128 g/m2
) for 2-sided printing
- Originals that are bound, for example, with staples or paper clips
- Originals that are bound in a book or booklet form
- Originals with pages bound together with glue
- Originals with pages that have had cutouts removed or are cutouts
- Label sheets
- Offset printing masters
- Originals with binder holes
- Originals that have just been printed with this machine
1 Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of the original.
2 Load the original face up in the original tray and arrange according
to the scanning order. Load the original pages so that the top of
the original is toward the back side of the machine.
% Do not load more than 100 sheets or up to the point where the
top of the stack is higher than the , mark. Such an action may
cause an original paper jam or damage to the original. It may
also invite machine failure. However, an original that exceeds
100 pages can be scanned in separate batches.
% If the original is not loaded correctly, it may not be fed in
straight, causing it to jam or become damaged.
% If the document is loaded in any orientation other than with the
top of the document toward the back of the machine, be sure
to select the document orientation.
3 Slide the adjustable lateral guides against the edges of the original.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-5
3.2 Basic copy operations
3
Placing the original on the original glass
0 When placing the original on the original glass, be sure to lift open the ADF at least 15°. If the original
is placed on the original glass without the ADF being lifted at least 15°, the correct document size may
not be detected.
0 Do not place an original weighing more than 4-7/16 lb (2 kg) on the original glass. Furthermore, do not
use a strong force to press down on a book or any other form of original that must be spread on the
original glass. Otherwise, the machine may be damaged or a failure may occur.
0 For thick books or large objects, perform scanning without closing the ADF. When a document is being
scanned with the ADF open, do not look directly at the original glass surface where light may be emitted
through. Note, however, that the light coming through the original glass is not a laser beam, and will not
expose the user to the related hazards.
0 When Non-Image Area Erase is selected, you do not have to close the ADF to copy the original. Place
the original anywhere on the original glass. The area surrounding the original text will be excluded from
the copy. For details, refer to page 5-42.
1 Lift open the ADF.
2 Place the original face down on the original glass.
% Load the original by placing it so that its top side faces the
back side of the machine.
3 Align the original with the mark in the back-left corner of the
original scales.
% For transparent or translucent originals, place a blank sheet of
paper of the same size as the original over the original.
% For bound originals spread over two facing pages, such as a
book or a magazine, position the top of the original toward the back of this machine and align the
original with the mark in the back-left corner of the original scales.
% When Non-Image Area Erase is selected, the original can be placed anywhere on the original glass.
4 Close the ADF.
3.2.2 Basic copy operations
The following procedure describes the basic copy operations.
1 Arrange originals in the order you want them to be scanned and
load them face up in the ADF.
% The original should be placed face down on the original glass.
2 Using the keypad, enter a value for the number of copies you desire.
% If you have entered incorrect number of copies, press the [C] (clear) key on the keypad, and then reenter the correct number.
3 Press the [Start] key.
The original is scanned and copied.
% To interrupt the copy operation being performed, press the [Stop] key.
% A "Ready to accept another job" message that appears during the current printing job indicates that
the next original can be scanned.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-6
3.2 Basic copy operations
3
% If an original with copy guard patterns embedded is scanned, the copy operation is stopped and
the job is discarded.
% If an original with a password embedded by the password copy function is scanned, the copy
operation starts after you enter the password.
% If multiple originals with different passwords are scanned at the same time, you will need to enter a
password for each original.
3.2.3 Copy operations using multiple functions
This section describes copy operations using combination of functions.
1 Load the original.
2 Press [Original Setting].
% For details on original setting, refer to page 5-15.
3 Press [Basic] ö [Duplex/Combine].
% For details on the Duplex/Combine settings, refer to page 5-8.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-7
3.2 Basic copy operations
3
4 Press [Basic] and then configure settings for respective functions.
% For details on color setting, refer to page 5-4.
% For details on paper size setting, refer to page 5-5.
% For details on magnification setting, refer to page 5-7.
% For details on image quality of originals, refer to page 5-18.
% For details on copy density setting, refer to page 5-18.
% For details on the setting not to rotate images, refer to page 5-14.
5 Press [Application] and then configure settings for respective functions.
% For setting for the application functions, refer to page 5-20.
6 Press [Basic] ö [Finishing].
% For details on copy finishing and folding/binding, refer to page 5-10.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-8
3.2 Basic copy operations
3
7 Press [Check Job] ö [Check Details].
% For details on checking job settings, refer to page 5-64.
8 Using the keypad, enter a value for the number of copies you desire.
% If you have entered incorrect number of copies, press the [C] (clear) key on the keypad, and then reenter the correct number.
9 Press the [Start] key.
The original is scanned and copied.
% To interrupt the copy operation being performed, press the [Stop] key.
% A "Ready to accept another job" message that appears during the current printing job indicates that
the next original can be scanned.
Functions that cannot be combined
Some settings cannot be combined with each other. If they are combined improperly, the settings will be
given priorities in either of the two ways described below.
- The setting configured last is given priority. (The setting specified first is canceled.)
- The setting configured first is given priority. (A warning message appears.)4 Control Panel Keysbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-2
4
4 Control Panel Keys
This section describes the functions of the keys on the operation panel.
Control panel and functions
Press the keys on the operation panel to use the Copy, Fax/Scan, User Box or other functions.
No. Name Description Page
1 Touch panel Displays various screens and messages. You can
configure various settings by directly touching the
touch panel.
-
2 Power indicator Lights up in blue when the machine is turned on with
the [main power switch].
-
3 [Sub power switch] Turns on or off machine operations. When turned off,
the machine is in the power-saving mode.
-
4 [Power Save] Enters Power Save mode. While the machine is in
Power Save mode, the indicator on the [Power Save]
key lights up in green and the touch panel goes off.
To exit from Power Save mode, press the [Power
Save] key again.
p. 4-11
5 [Mode Memory] Allows you to register (store) the desired
copy/fax/scan settings as a program or to recall a
registered program.
p. 4-7
6 [Utility/Counter] Switches to the Utility screen or the Meter Count
screen.
p. 4-6
7 [Reset] Resets all settings (except programmed settings)
entered using the control panel or touch panel.
p. 4-4
1
2
5
4
6
3
7
8
9
1413 10
15
16
17
18
12 11
19
20
21
22bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-3
4
8 [Interrupt] Switches to Interrupt mode. While the machine is in
Interrupt mode, the indicator on the [Interrupt] key
lights up in green and the message "Now in Interrupt
mode" appears in the touch panel. To cancel Interrupt mode, press the [Interrupt] key again.
p. 4-4
9 [Stop] Temporarily stops the operation while copying,
scanning or printing.
p. 4-4
10 [Proof Copy] Allows you to print a single proof copy to be checked
before printing a large number of copies. You can
also display a finishing image using the current settings in the touch panel.
p. 4-18
11 [Start] Starts the copy, scan or fax operation. p. 4-4
12 Data indicator Flashes in blue while a print job is being received.
Lights up in blue when a print job is queued to be
printed or while it is being printed. Lights up in blue
when there is saved fax data or unprinted fax data.
-
13 [C] (Clear) Clears a value (such as the number of copies, a
zoom ratio and size) entered using the keypad.
p. 4-17
14 Keypad Allows you to enter the number of copies to be produced, the zoom ratio, and various other setting values.
-
15 [Guidance] Switches to the Guidance screen. You can display
descriptions of the functions and operating procedures.
p. 4-15
16 [Enlarge Display] Enters Enlarge Display mode. If you are using PageScope Authentication Manager for authentication,
the Enlarge Display screen will not be available.
p. 4-14
17 [Accessibility] Switches to the screen for configuring settings for
user accessibility functions.
p. 4-12
18 [Access] If user authentication or account track settings have
been applied, press the [Access] key after entering
the user name and password (for user authentication) or the account name and password (for account track) in order to use this machine.
p. 4-8
19 [Brightness] dial Allows you to adjust the brightness of the touch panel.
-
20 [User Box] Enters User Box mode. While the machine is in User
Box mode, the indicator on the [User Box] key lights
up in green.
For details on User Box functions, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".
p. 4-5
21 [Fax/Scan] Enters Fax/Scan mode. While the machine is in
Fax/Scan mode, the indicator on the [Fax/Scan] key
lights up in green.
For details on the fax/scan function, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".
p. 4-5
22 [Copy] Enters Copy mode. (As a default, the machine is in
Copy mode. ) While the machine is copying, the indicator on the [Copy] key lights up in green.
p. 4-5
No. Name Description Pagebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-4
4.1 About the [Start] key, the [Stop] key, and the [Interrupt] key
4
4.1 About the [Start] key, the [Stop] key, and the [Interrupt] key
The [Start] key
% Start the copy, scan or fax operation.
Press this key again to restart a suspended job.
% When this machine is ready to begin the operation, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue.
If the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange, the copy operation cannot begin. (Check that
no warning or message is displayed in the touch panel.)
The [Stop] key
% Press the [Stop] key while copying to temporarily stop the scanning or printing operation.
% To resume a temporarily stopped job, press the [Start] key.
% To delete a temporarily stopped job, select a job in the suspended job list in the screen, and press
the [Delete] key.
The [Interrupt] key
Press this key to start a new copy job with different copy settings by suspending the current job in process.
This is convenient when you need to make copies urgently.
0 The [Interrupt] key cannot be operated while an original is being scanned.
0 Pressing the [Interrupt] key restores the default settings.
1 Load the original.
2 Press the [Interrupt] key.
The indicator on the Interrupt key lights up in green and printing of the current job is suspended.
3 Configure the copy settings.
4 Press the [Start] key.
5 After the interrupting job has finished printing, press the [Interrupt] key.
The Interrupt indicator goes off and the interrupting copy settings are canceled.
The copy settings return to those specified before the interrupting copying job.
The [Reset] key
Resets all settings (except programmed settings) entered using the control panel or touch panel.
% Press the [Reset] key.
The basic settings screen appears.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-5
4.2 About the [Copy] key, the [Fax/Scan] key, and the [User Box] key
4
4.2 About the [Copy] key, the [Fax/Scan] key, and the [User Box] key
This machine operates in Copy, Fax/Scan and User Box modes, from which the user can select a desired
function. The indicator on the selected key lights up in green.
The [Copy] key
% Enters Copy mode.
The basic settings screen appears.
The [Fax/Scan] key
% Press this key to enter Fax/Scan mode.
For details on the fax/scan function, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax
Operations]".
The [User Box] key
% Enters User Box mode.
For details on User Box functions, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-6
4.3 The [Utility/Counter] key
4
4.3 The [Utility/Counter] key
Press the [Utility/Counter] key to display the Utility screen. You can configure the machine settings and check
its use status in the Utility menu screen.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
Settings
One-Touch/User Box Registration
Allows you to register items related to the fax/scanner and User Boxes operations.
For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]" and "User's Guide [Box Operations]".
User Settings Provides setting items that can be operated by the user.
Administrator Settings Provides setting items that can only be operated by the administrator of the
machine.
Check Consumable Life Allows you to check the status (usage level) of consumables.
Banner Printing Allows you to select whether to enable or disable printing on long sheets
of paper.
This menu item appears when the optional finisher is not installed.
For details on long paper print, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]".
Device Information Displays information about this machine.
Function Version: Allows you to check the function version of the currently
installed firmware. Check the function version of this machine and of the
printer driver. Ensure that they match before using this machine.
IPv4 Address: Allows you to check the currently specified IPv4 address.
IPv6 Address: Allows you to check the currently specified IPv6 address.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-7
4.4 The [Mode Memory] key
4
4.4 The [Mode Memory] key
Combine frequently used copy settings into programs and register them with this machine. These programs
can easily be recalled as programs.
0 Up to 30 programs can be registered.
0 To register a program, configure the copy settings to be registered before pressing the [Mode Memory]
key.
% Press the [Mode Memory] key.
dReference
To prohibit modification and deletion of copy programs:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access] ö
[Copy Program Lock Settings].
To delete a copy program:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access] ö
[Delete Saved Copy Program].
Settings
Recall Copy Program Select the button for the copy program registered with the copy settings to
be recalled.
Register Program • From the copy program buttons displayed in the screen, press the button you want to register copy settings with, and then press [Register
Program].
• Enter the registration name, and then press [OK].
Check Program settings Press this button to check the copy settings registered with the selected
copy program button.
Edit Name Press this button to rename the registration name of the selected copy program button.
After enabling Copy Program Lock, [Edit Name] will not be displayed.
Delete Press this button to delete the selected program button.
After enabling Copy Program Lock, [Delete] will not be displayed.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-8
4.5 The [Access] key
4
4.5 The [Access] key
If the administrator has configured user authentication settings/account track settings, only the users who
have been registered or the users whose accounts have been registered can use this machine.
If the administrator has configured a usage schedule, a user can use the machine by entering a password for
non-business hours.
Controlling access to the machine by user/account (user
authentication/account track)
0 With the user authentication/account track functions enabled, only the users who enter passwords for
users or for accounts can use this machine.
0 Thus, the number of copies among others can be managed by user/account.
0 Contact the administrator for information on the user name, account name, password and server name.
0 The login page that appears may vary depending on the user authentication/account track settings.
0 The user authentication settings can be used together with the account track settings. If the User
Authentication/Account Track is set to [Do Not Synchronize], complete user authentication, and then
log in by using the Account Track screen.
0 If MFP authentication or external server authentication has been set, a total of 1,000 users and accounts
can be registered.
0 After copying is completed, press the [Access] key to log out from the machine.
0 To get permission to use the machine, you can use an authentication unit (biometrics type/IC card type)
for authentication.
0 The account, which sets the use of this machine to suspend in Account Track Settings, cannot log in
to this machine. The users, who belong to the suspended account, cannot also log in to this machine.
0 If authentication is performed with PageScope Authentication Manager, check with your server
administrator for information on the login procedure.
% Press the [Access] key.
Screen for user authentication
Screen for account trackbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-9
4.5 The [Access] key
4
dReference
To configure user authentication/account track:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track].
Settings
User Authentication Performs the user authentication procedure to use this machine.
Public User Access Allows users who have no access to the user
name or password to use this machine.
This item is not displayed when [Public User Access] is set to [Restrict] in the General Settings of
Administrator Settings.
If enhanced security mode has been enabled,
[Public User Access] is not displayed.
User Name Enter the user name.
User Name List Select a user name from a displayed list.
• If enhanced security mode has been enabled,
[User Name List] is not displayed.
• The user, who has set the use of this machine
to suspend in User Authentication Settings, is
not displayed in the [User Name List].
Password Enter the password.
Server Name Indicates the name of the default server. Press
[Server Name] to display the names of the registered servers. Select the desired server.
Login Displays the basic settings screen, enabling you
to use this machine.
Account Track Performs the account track procedure to use this machine.
Account Name Enter the account name.
Password Enter the password.
When the account track input method is set to
[Password Only] in Administrator Settings, the
login screen displays only [Password]. The user
can directly enter the password in the login
screen from the keypad. For an all-number password, the user can log in without displaying the
keyboard screen, simply by pressing [Login], or
the [Access] key.
• For a password containing alphabets, numbers and/or symbol characters, press [Password] and then enter the password.
• After entering numbers from the keypad,
press [Password] to enter alphabets and symbols in succession.
Login Displays the basic settings screen, enabling you
to use this machine.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-10
4.5 The [Access] key
4
Using the machine during non-scheduled hours
The machine can be set to automatically enter Sleep mode according to a usage schedule determined by the
administrator so the use of the machine can be limited. This is referred to as Weekly Timer. Follow the
procedure described below to use the machine while the Weekly Timer is being used.
0 From the [Password for Non-Business Hours] screen (displayed from Administrator Settings mode), the
machine can be set so that the screen for entering the password for non-business hours is not
displayed.
1 Press the [Power Save] key.
2 Enter the password for non-business hours.
3 Press [OK].
4 Using the keypad, enter the length of time to elapse before the machine enters Sleep mode again.
5 Press [OK].
The basic settings screen appears.
dReference
To configure Weekly Timer:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Weekly Timer Settings].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-11
4.6 The [Power Save] key
4
4.6 The [Power Save] key
If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the touch panel goes off and the machine
automatically enters a mode where it conserves energy. This is referred to as Low Power or Sleep mode.
The following describes the procedure for returning from Low Power or Sleep mode.
0 Although the machine conserves more energy in Sleep mode than in Low Power mode, the warm-up
process for returning to ready-for-copy state from Sleep mode is more time-consuming.
0 As the factory default, Low Power mode is set to restart after 15 minutes and Sleep mode after 30
minutes. In other words, the machine enters Low Power mode if no operation is performed for 15
minutes. Likewise, it enters Sleep mode after 30 minutes has elapsed.
0 The machine can receive jobs even while it is in Low Power mode.
% Press the [Power Save] key.
The machine returns from Low Power mode when any other key on the control panel or the touch panel
surface is pressed.
dReference
To enable Low Power mode:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Power Save Settings].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-12
4.7 The [Accessibility] key
4
4.7 The [Accessibility] key
This section describes the procedures for configuring settings for the control panel and adjusting the touch
panel.
0 To return to the basic settings screen from the Accessibility Setting screen, press the [Accessibility] key,
the [Reset] key or [Close].
0 In the Enlarge Display screen, [Default Enlarge Display Settings] appears, enabling you to configure
default settings for use in the Enlarge Display mode using the copy or fax/scan functions.
% Press the [Accessibility] key.
Page 1/2
Page 2/2
Settings
Touch Panel Adjustment Adjust the position of touch panel buttons when they do not respond correctly because they may not be correctly aligned with the position of the
actual touch sensor.
• The touch sensors are not aligned in the touch panel if pressing [Touch
Panel Adjustment] does not activate any action. Press the [1] key on the
keypad.
• Press the four check point buttons ([+]) on the touch panel adjustment
screen while listening on a buzzer sound each time. When the checking
by pressing the check point buttons is completed successfully, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue. Press the [Start] key.
• The check point buttons ([+]) can be pressed in any order.
• To perform adjustment again, press the [C] (Clear) key, and then press
the four check point buttons ([+]) again.
• To cancel the touch panel adjustment process, press the [Stop] or [Reset] key.
• If the touch panel cannot be adjusted, contact your service representative.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-13
4.7 The [Accessibility] key
4
Key Repeat Start/Interval
Time
Specify the length of time until the value begins to change after a touch
panel button is held down, and also specify the length of time for the value
to change to the next number.
The settings specified for Key Repeat Start/Interval Time are only applied
in Enlarge Display mode.
System Auto Reset Confirmation
Specify whether to display a message when the system auto reset operation is performed in Enlarge Display mode, allowing the user to choose either to continue operating without exiting Enlarge Display mode or to exit
Enlarge Display mode and return to the basic settings screen.
Also specify the duration of time for displaying the confirmation screen.
Auto Reset Confirmation Specify whether to display a message when the automatic panel reset operation is performed in Enlarge Display mode, allowing the user to choose
either to continue operating without resetting the current settings or to reset the settings.
Also specify the duration of time for displaying the confirmation screen.
Enlarge Display Mode
Confirmation
Specify whether to display a message when the [Enlarge Display] key is
pressed to change the display of the screen, requesting confirmation to
cancel the settings that cannot be specified in Enlarge Display mode.
Message Display Time Specify the duration of time for displaying warning messages, which appear, for example, when an incorrect operation is performed.
Sound Setting Configure the settings for sounding associated with key operations. The
following sound setting functions are available. To produce a sound, press
[Yes], and then select the volume from [Low], [Medium] and [High]. To not
produce a sound, press [No].
[Operation Confirmation Sound]
• [Input Confirmation Sound]: A sound produced when a key in the control panel or a button in the touch panel is pressed for an entry
• [Invalid Input Sound]: A sound produced for invalid button operation in
the control panel or the touch panel
• [Basic Sound]: A sound produced when the default value item is selected for an option subject to rotational switching
[Successful Completion Sound]
• [Completed Operation Sound]: A sound produced when the operation
has completed normally
• [Completed Transmission Sound]: A sound produced when a communications-related operation is completed normally
[Completed Preparation Sound]: A sound produced when a device is ready
[Caution Sound]
• [Simple Caution Sound (Level 1)]: A sound produced when the replacement time is nearing for supplies or a replaceable part and a message
appears in the touch panel
• [Simple Caution Sound (Level 2)]: A sound produced for a user error
• [Simple Caution Sound (Level 3)]: A sound produced when an error occurs that can be corrected by the user by referring to the message that
appears or the User's Guide
• [Severe Caution Sound]: A sound produced when an error occurs that
cannot be corrected by the user or requires action by a service representative
Default Enlarge Display
Settings
For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Enlarge Display Operations]".
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-14
4.8 The [Enlarge Display] key
4
4.8 The [Enlarge Display] key
Press this key to enter Enlarge Display mode and enable machine operation using a screen with a layout with
larger-size characters.
For details on the Enlarge Display screen, refer to the "User's Guide [Enlarge Display Operations]".
0 Press the [Enlarge Display] key to return to normal display.
0 If PageScope Authentication Manager is used for authentication, the login screen cannot be switched
to the enlarged display mode.
% Press the [Enlarge Display] key.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-15
4.9 The [Guidance] key
4
4.9 The [Guidance] key
Press this key to view and check descriptions of various functions and operating procedures. When the
[Guidance] key is pressed, the Guidance screen for the displayed screen appears.
0 From the Help main menu screen, you can find the target Guidance screen based on the function or
purpose.
0 Refer to the left panel of the Guidance screen to check the position of the displayed Guidance screen
in the menu structure.
0 Press [Close] in the Guidance screen to move up one level in the menu structure. Press [Exit] to exit
Guidance mode and return to the screen that was displayed before the [Guidance] key was pressed.
Press [To Menu] to display the Help main menu.
0 In the Main Menu and Guidance Menu screens, select items by pressing the button or by pressing the
key in the keypad.
0 The Guidance screens cannot be displayed when the following operations are being performed:
Scanning, printing a proof copy, preview of a finished copy, operating in Enlarge Display mode, or
operating in Accessibility mode
0 While the Guidance screen is displayed, the following keys on the operation panel are disabled:
[Start], [C], [Interrupt], [Proof Copy], [Access], [Mode Memory], and [Enlarge Display]
% Press the [Guidance] key.
Settings
Function Check descriptions by selecting a Guidance menu grouped by function
type and name.
Search by Operation Check descriptions by selecting a Guidance menu grouped by operation
type.
• With [Go to function] displayed, the function for the selected operation
can be set. However, when the fax/scan function is used, for example,
[Go to function] displayed on a Guidance screen for the copy function,
for example, cannot be selected as it is a different function from the one
in use.
• Select [Copy] and press [Scan special original]; instructions and animation guidance are displayed to enable the user to view the procedure
for placing an original. However, Start Guidance is not displayed in the
animation guidance for placing an original.
Function Map Check descriptions from a navigation destination of the current screen or
the menu structure it belongs to.
Other Functions Check descriptions by selecting a Guidance menu grouped by useful function.
Name and Function of
Parts
Check the description of the main unit and its options.
Service/Admin. Information
Check the name, extension number and E-mail address of the administrator.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-16
4.9 The [Guidance] key
4
Consumables Replace/
Processing Procedure
Check procedures for replacing the toner cartridge, imaging unit or waste
toner box, adding staples or discarding punch-hole scraps by viewing animations. Press the target button, and then press [Start Guidance].
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-17
4.10 The [C] (Clear) key
4
4.10 The [C] (Clear) key
Clears a value (such as the number of copies, a zoom ratio and size) entered using the keypad.
% Press the [C] key.
The value is deleted. Enter the correct value.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-18
4.11 The [Proof Copy] key
4
4.11 The [Proof Copy] key
Printing one set to check the copy result (Proof Copy)
Print a single proof copy for checking before printing a large number of copies. This prevents copy errors
from occurring.
0 When printing a proof copy, specify multiple copies.
1 Load the original.
2 Select the desired copy settings.
3 Press the [Proof Copy] key.
4 Press [Print] and then select the original direction.
5 Press the [Start] key.
This prints one copy when the original has been loaded in the ADF.
6 When it has been loaded on the original glass, press the [Finish], then the [Start] key.
A single proof copy is printed.
7 Check the proof copy.
% If the proof copy is found all right, go to Step 10.
To change the copy settings, go to Step 8.
8 Press [Change Setting] in the proof copy screen.
After changing the copy settings in the Change Settings screen, press [OK]
% "Number of Sets" in the proof copy screen indicates "the number of sets printed in the proof copy
mode/the number of sets specified to be printed", and "Total # of Pages Printed" indicates "the
number of sheets printed in the proof copy mode/the total number of sheets to be printed".
% To stop copying while the screen for changing the settings is displayed, select the proof copy job
to be stopped from the list of jobs in the left panel, and then press [Delete].
% If no operation is performed for the specified length of time while this screen is displayed, the copy
job for which proof copy has been completed is registered as a stored job and the basic settings
screen appears again.
Stored job registration is performed when the System Auto Reset function is activated or one minute
after (if System Auto Reset is set to "OFF").
9 Press the [Proof Copy] key to repeat proof copy.
10 Press [Print].
The number of copies yet to be printed is registered as a copy job.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-19
4.11 The [Proof Copy] key
4
Using a preview image to check the copy result (Advanced Preview)
Check the finishing image of a copy in the touch panel before printing. This prevents copy errors from
occurring.
0 When you scan the original using the Program Jobs function, scan all originals, press [Finish], and then
preview the finishing state.
0 When you attempt to scan the original with an insert page specified, the machine scans the original first,
and then the insert original. When this process is complete, you can preview the finishing state.
0 To use the Book Copy or Booklet function, no preview is available. Check the finishing state after
printing.
0 The Punch settings are available only if the Punch Kit PK-516 or Z Folding Unit is installed on the
Finisher FS-526 or the Punch Kit PK-517 is installed on the Finisher FS-527.
0 Fold and Center Staple & Fold is available only if the Saddle Stitcher is installed on the optional Finisher.
0 The Z-fold settings are available only if the Z Folding Unit is installed on the optional Finisher FS-526.
1 Load the original.
2 Select the desired copy settings.
3 Press the [Proof Copy] key.
4 Press [Preview on Screen] for the proof copy method and then select the original direction.
5 Press the [Start] key.
The Preview (View Status) screen appears.
6 Check the preview image.
% To change the settings, press [View Pages]. Go to Step 7.
% To start printing, press the [Start] key.
% To scan another original, press [Finish], load the original, and then press the [Start] key.
7 Change the settings, and then press [View Status].
Settings
Prev. Page/
Next Page
Switch from the current screen to either the previous or the next screen.
Zoom Enlarge the preview image and check the details. Press [+] and [-] to
change the zoom ratio from full size to 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. To
select a different area to be enlarged, touch the scroll bar arrows on the
right and at the bottom side of the image.
The finishing state cannot be displayed if you change the display size.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-20
4.11 The [Proof Copy] key
4
8 Press the [Start] key.
Select this menu to start printing.
Rotate Image Rotate the preview image 180 degrees in order to correct the orientation of
the original if necessary.
Pressing rotates the currently displayed page.
Pressing [Rotate Pages] displays the Scanned Page List. Select the page
to be rotated. Up to six scanned pages can be displayed. Press [ ] or [ ]
to change the selection.
View Finishing View the finishing settings using icons or in text on the preview screen, and
check the finishing state.
Change Setting Change the settings for the next original to be scanned.
View Pages/View Status Switch between the View Status and View Pages tab in the Preview screen.
Perform image rotation and setting changes on [View Pages] and stop
scanning on [View Status].
Settings5 Copy Functionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-2
5
5 Copy Function
You can configure the settings for multiple copy features by pressing buttons on the operation or touch panel.
This chapter describes the functions that can be configured by pressing the buttons in the touch panel.
Item
Basic Configure the basic settings for making copies. p. 5-3
Original Setting Configure the type and size of the original. p. 5-15
Quality/Density Configure the quality or density for the original to optimize copy
quality.
p. 5-18
Application Configure the application settings for making copies. p. 5-20
Left panel Job List Check jobs currently being performed
and jobs waiting to be performed.
p. 5-62
Check Job Check the current settings and the result
of the settings.
p. 5-64bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-3
5.1 Basic
5
5.1 Basic
Configure the basic settings for making copies.
Item
Color Specify the print color for making copies. p. 5-4
Paper Select the paper type to be printed on and paper tray. p. 5-5
Zoom Select the zoom ratio of the image to be copied. p. 5-7
Duplex/Combine Configure the 2-sided copy and combined copy settings. p. 5-8
Finishing program
button
Configure frequently used offset and finishing settings in advance.
You can activate preferred finishing functions by simply pressing
this button.
p. 6-8
Finishing Press this button to select the settings for offsetting and finishing
copies.
p. 5-10
Separate Scan Select this item to divide a large original and scan it in a number of
batches.
p. 5-13
Auto Rotate OFF Select this item to copy the original according to the paper orientation without rotating the image.
p. 5-14
Language Selection Display the Language Selection screen to specify the language to
be displayed on the touch panel. This item is not displayed when
two shortcut keys are configured.
-
Shortcut Key Allows you to arrange shortcut keys for the frequently used Application functions on the Basic screen.
-bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-4
5.1 Basic
5
5.1.1 Color
Select the print color for making copies.
For the print color, you can select one from [Auto Color], [Full Color], [2 Color], [Black] and [Single Color].
% Press [Basic] ö [Color].
Settings
Auto Color Automatically detects whether the scanned original is in color or in black
and white, and selects the appropriate color setting (full color or black).
Full Color Makes copies in full color, regardless of whether the scanned original is in
color or in black and white.
2 Color Prints all areas of the scanned original determined to be in color with the
specified color, and prints all areas determined to be black in black.
Black Prints the copy in black and white, regardless of whether the scanned original is in color or in black and white.
Single Color Prints the copy in the specified single color, regardless of the color of the
scanned original.
When you specify a single color, the original is copied by converting the
color differences (apparent color densities) and the gradation levels into
density differences of the single color.
Average Density Copies the original by only converting the gradation levels into density differences of the single
color, regardless of the color differences in the
original, bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-5
5.1 Basic
5
5.1.2 Paper
Select the paper type and size to be printed, or to change the paper size and paper type settings specified
for each paper tray.
The paper size can be selected automatically according to the original size or it can be specified manually.
0 If you select [Transparency], specify [Black] for [Color] in advance.
0 The auto zoom setting and the auto paper setting cannot be selected at the same time.
0 If a setting for special paper is selected for a paper tray, that tray is not selected automatically with the
Auto Paper setting. (However, a paper tray set to Single Side Only is given priority to be selected with
1-sided printing.) When setting special paper in the paper tray, be sure to set the paper type. For details
on special paper, refer to page 12-2.
% Press [Basic] ö [Paper].
Settings
Auto Automatically selects the paper size according to the original size.
1-4 Trays Allows you to specify the paper manually.
# (Bypass Tray)
L Large capacity unit
(Optional)
Change Tray Settings Specify the paper type and paper size for the selected paper tray.
Paper Type Specify the paper type for the selected paper tray.
Paper Size Specify the paper size for the selected paper tray.
[Auto Detect]:
Automatically detects the paper size.
[12-1/4 e 18 w] (Only for Tray 1 and Tray 2):
Enables 12-1/4 e 18 w to be selected.
[Standard Size] (only for Bypass Tray):
Specify a paper size to use the bypass tray as a
paper tray dedicated to the paper size.
[Custom Size] (only for Bypass Tray):
Enter the paper size.
[Wide Paper]:
Select a paper size larger than the original.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-6
5.1 Basic
5
Configuring a custom size
% [Basic] ö [Paper] ö [Bypass Tray] ö [Change Tray Settings] ö [Custom Size].
Configuring wide paper
% [Basic] ö [Paper] ö [Bypass Tray] ö [Change Tray Settings] ö [Wide Paper].
Settings
X/Y • North American model (inch): Configure the length [X] and width [Y] with
pressing [+] or [-].
• European model (cm): Enter the length [X] and width [Y] of the paper.
Store Register custom paper sizes.
memory 1 to 5 Select the memory button where the paper size is
to be stored.
Change Custom Size
Name
Rename memory button names.
Settings
Wide Paper Select the size of the paper to be loaded.
Change Size X/Y Enter the length [X] and width [Y] of the paper.
Preset Paper Sizes Enables 12 e 18 w to be selected.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-7
5.1 Basic
5
5.1.3 Zoom
The original image size in the original can be enlarged or reduced.
0 The auto zoom setting and the auto paper setting cannot be selected at the same time.
0 If the auto zoom setting is selected and an enlargement is to be copied on paper larger than the original,
load the original with the same orientation as the paper.
% Press [Basic] ö [Zoom].
dReference
To set image rotation:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Copier Settings] ö [Enlargement Rotation].
Settings
Auto Automatically selects the most appropriate zoom ratio based on the size of
the loaded original and the specified paper size.
Full Size Copies the original image in the size identical to the original (100%).
Manual • Enter the zoom ratio (25.0% - 400.0%) of the copy.
• Under "Set Individual Zoom", you can enter different zoom ratios for
the X and Y directions.
Set Zoom Enter the desired zoom and select the button to
register the value with.
"User Preset Zoom" indicates the registered
zoom.
Minimal Copies an original image slightly smaller than the original size or the specified size. The image in the original is centered on the paper without any
cutoff.
Select this setting when you want to copy the entire scope of the original
within the paper used.
-/+ Configure the zoom ratio (25.0% - 400.0%) of the copy without changing
the aspect ratio.
Fixed Zoom Select a preset zoom when copying from a fixed size original onto a fixed
size paper.
User Preset Zoom Select a registered copy zoom value. To change the registered zoom values, use [Set Zoom].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-8
5.1 Basic
5
5.1.4 Duplex/Combine
Configure whether to scan one side or both sides of the originals and whether to print on one side or both
sides of the paper. Multiple (2, 4 or 8) pages of original images can be reduced in size and printed on a single
page.
Using the Duplex/Combine function, you can save paper sheets for copying.
% Press [Basic] ö [Duplex/Combine].
Settings
1-Sided > 1-Sided
2-Sided > 1-Sided
1-Sided > 2-Sided
2-Sided > 2-Sided
Binding Position Configure the binding position of the original and copies to be output.
Without setting the Binding Position, the resulting copy may not be what
you intended.
When [1- Sided > 1- Sided] is selected, the binding position cannot be set.
Original Binding
Position
Select the original binding position from [LeftBind], [Right-Bind], [Top] and [Auto].
• If the binding position for the original is set to
[Auto], the position of the binding margin is
automatically selected. A binding margin
along the long side of the paper is selected if
the original length is 11-11/16 inch (297 mm)
or less. If the original length is more than 11-
11/16 inch (297 mm), a binding margin along
the short side of the paper is selected.
• If [Auto] is selected for the original binding position, the binding margin is set at the top or
on the left.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-9
5.1 Basic
5
Binding Position Output Binding Position
Select the output binding position from [Left
Bind], [Right Bind], [Top] and [Auto].
• If the binding position for the copy is set to
[Auto], the binding position is automatically
determined according to the orientation of the
loaded original. If the original length is 11-
11/16 inch (297 mm) or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the original length is more than 11-11/16
inch (297 mm), a binding position along the
short side of the paper is selected.
• If Output Binding Position is set to [Auto], the
binding position is set at the top or on the left.
Original Direction Select the orientation of the original loaded into the ADF or placed on the
original glass.
Without setting original direction, the resulting copy may not be what you
intended.
No Disables combined copy.
2in1 Copies images on two original pages on one sheet of paper.
Portrait original pages
Landscape original pages
4in1/8in1 4in1 Copies images of four original pages on one
sheet of paper.
8in1 Copies images of eight original pages on one
sheet of paper.
Horizontal Specify the combine order of the original (Numbering Direction setting).
Vertical
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-10
5.1 Basic
5
5.1.5 Finishing
Various settings can be selected for sorting and finishing copies fed into the copy output tray.
0 The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed.
0 The Punch settings are available only if the Punch Kit PK-516 or Z Folding Unit is installed on the
Finisher FS-526 or the Punch Kit PK-517 is installed on the Finisher FS-527.
0 The Fold/Bind is available only if the Saddle Stitcher is installed on the optional Finisher.
0 The Z-fold settings are available only if the Z Folding Unit is installed on the optional Finisher FS-526.
0 "Staple" cannot be used together with "Offset".
0 The Half-Fold, Center Staple & Fold or Tri-Fold function cannot be used together with any of "Offset",
"Staple" or "Punch".
% Press [Basic] ö [Finishing].
Settings
Sort Prints the copied sets separately when a multi-page original is copied.
Group Makes multiple copies of each page when you make multiple copies of a multipage original.
1
1
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
1
1
1bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-11
5.1 Basic
5
Offset Yes/No Specify whether to separate each set of copies from another set in the output
tray when copying multiple sets of multi-page originals.
When the Finisher or Job Separator JS-504 is not installed:
If the following conditions are met, printed copies are fed out and sorted in an
alternating crisscross pattern.
• 8-1/2 e 11, A4 or B5 paper is used
• Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray
• Auto paper selection is specified for the paper size setting
When the Finisher or Job Separator JS-504 is installed:
The copies are fed out and stacked on top of each other with each set shifted
to separate it.
Fold/Bind When the Saddle Stitcher SD-508 is installed on the Finisher FS-526:
Half Fold Center Staple & Fold Tri-Fold
Z-Fold
To configure the Z folding setting, install the Z Folding Unit ZU-606.
When the Saddle Stitcher SD-509 is installed on the Finisher FS-527:
Half Fold Center Staple & Fold
Staple Staples copies in corner or at two points before they are output.
Punch Punches holes in copies before they are output.
Settings
1bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-12
5.1 Basic
5
5.1.6 Post Inserter
When the Post Inserter PI-505 is installed on the Finisher FS-526, you can manually operate the Finisher
FS-526 using the post inserter control panel.
Reference
- Only the lower tray can be used as the output tray. The upper tray is not available.
Keys on control panel
Position Setting Configure desired staple or hole-punch positions.
Select Auto, and the machine automatically judges the staple or punch positions for the paper relative to the original direction loaded.
• A staple or hole-punch position is set along the long side of the paper if the
original length is 11-11/16 inch (297 mm) or less.
• Staple or hole-punch positions are set along the short side of the paper if
the original length is more than 11-11/16 inch (297 mm).
• Staple or punching positions are set on the upper or left-side end.
• Be sure to load the original so that its top side is placed in the back.
• If desired, press [Original Direction], and then select the original direction.
Settings
No. Name
1 Corner staple lamp
2 Center staple & fold lamp
3 [Finishing] key
4 2-hole lamp
5 3-hole lamp
6 [Select punch] key
7 [Start/stop] key
8 4-hole lamp
9 Tri-fold lamp
10 2 position staple lamp
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
10 9 8bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-13
5.1 Basic
5
Finishing using Post Inserter
1 Place paper in the lower tray of the Post Inserter, and align the lateral guide to the paper size.
% Set the paper by placing it so that its top side faces the back of the machine.
% To use the corner staple or 2-staple option, load the paper face up.
% To perform Punch, load the paper face up.
% To perform Bind, load the front side of the bound paper face down.
% To perform Tri-Fold, load the outside of the tri-folded paper face down.
2 Press [Finishing] key and [Select punch] key, and select the desired finishing.
% To configure Finishing settings, press [Finishing] key to turn the LED on. To configure punch
settings, press [Select punch] key to turn the LED on.
% Punch settings are available together with the corner staple or 2-staple option.
3 Press the [Start/stop] key.
% If [Start/stop] key is pressed during operation, the operation will be stopped.
5.1.7 Separate Scan
When the original contains pages exceeding the capacity of the ADF, you can divide the original into several
batches to handle each lot as a single copy job. You can also use the copy function by switching between
the ADF and the original glass for scanning the originals.
0 Do not load original sheets beyond the upper limit for the ADF. It would cause jamming and/or spoiling
of the original or failure of the machine.
0 When making 2-sided or combined copies using the original glass, the machine can scan a number of
original pages without enabling Separate Scan.
1 Load the original.
2 In the Basic tab, press [Separate Scan].
ABC
Front
Cover Front
Cover
ABC ABC ABCbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-14
5.1 Basic
5
3 Press the [Start] key.
The original is scanned.
4 Load the next batch of the original, and then press the [Start] key.
% To change the scanning settings, press [Change Setting].
5 Repeat Step 4 until all pages of the original are scanned.
6 After all original pages have been scanned, press [Finish].
7 Press the [Start] key.
dReference
To set the Separate Scan output method:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Copier Settings] ö [Separate Scan Output Method].
5.1.8 Auto Rotate OFF
Select this setting to copy the original according to the paper orientation without rotating the image.
0 For some paper sizes or zoom values, part of the image may be cut off.
% Press [Basic] ö [Auto Rotate OFF].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-15
5.2 Original Setting
5
5.2 Original Setting
Configure the original status or original direction for outputting desired copies.
% Press [Original Setting].
Settings
Mixed Original Loads originals of different sizes into the ADF and scan them at a time.
Z-Folded Original Correctly detects the original size when folded originals are loaded into the
ADF and copied.
Original Size Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically.
If the size of the original is not automatically detected, select the original
size.
Custom Size Enter the original size.
Photo Size Select the photo size.
Binding Position Specify the original binding position (page margin) to prevent the copy
from being printed upside-down when scanning a 2-sided original,
Auto Automatically configures the binding position of
the original.
• A binding margin along the long side of the
paper is selected if the original length is 11-
11/16 inch (297 mm) or less.
• If the original length is more than 11-11/16
inch (297 mm), a binding margin along the
short side of the paper is selected.
Original Direction Specify the original direction to load into the ADF or place on the original
glass when copying 2-sided originals or making 2-sided or combined copies.
Despeckle Reduces the influence of a dirt of the slit glass upon a copy output when
loading an original in the ADF.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-16
5.2 Original Setting
5
Copying mixed originals
Loads originals of different sizes into the ADF and scan them at a time.
To copy onto paper of the same size as the original, select [Full Size] in the Zoom tab and select [Auto] on
the Paper tab. To copy all original pages on paper of the same size, select [Auto] in the Zoom tab and select
the desired paper size on the Paper tab.
0 When [1-Sided > 2-Sided] is selected together with Auto Paper, the back side becomes blank if its
paper size is different from that of the front side. For example, if a single-sided original is copied in the
order of 11 × 17 (A3) and 8-1/2 × 11 (A4), it results in copying of the front side (11 × 17 (A3)) / back side
(blank) and of the front side (8-1/2 × 11 (A4)) / back side (blank).
NOTICE
Load all of the original pages into the ADF so that the top of the pages is toward the back or the left side of
the machine.
1 Slide the adjustable lateral guides of the ADF to fit the size of the
largest original page.
2 Arrange originals in the order you want them to be scanned and
load them face up in the ADF.
3 In the basic settings screen, press [Original Setting].
4 Press [Mixed Original].
% To cancel the setting, press [Mixed Original] again to deselect
it.
The following chart shows the possible combinations of standard-sized paper that can be used for the Mixed
Original setting.
Original Size
Maximum Original Width
11 e 17
w (A3
w)
8-1/2 e
11 v
(A4 v)
8-1/2 e
14 w
(B4 w)
8-1/2 e
11 w
(A4 w)
5-1/2 e
8-1/2 v
(A5 v)
5-1/2 e
8-1/2
w (A5
w)
(B5 v) (B5 w)
11 e 17 w (A3
w)
o o - - - - - -
8-1/2 e 11 v
(A4 v)
o o - - - - - -
8-1/2 e 14 w
(B4 w)
o o o - - - o -
8-1/2 e 11 w
(A4 w)
o o o o o - o -
5-1/2 e 8-1/2
v (A5 v)
- - o o o - o -
5-1/2 e 8-1/2
w (A5 w)
- - - - - o - o
(B5 v) o o o - - - o -
(B5 w) - - o o o - o o
o Possible to combine
- Not possible to combinebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-17
5.2 Original Setting
5
Copying Z-folded originals
Correctly detects the original size when folded originals are loaded into the ADF and copied.
The length of the first page of the original is detected, and the subsequent pages are scanned as pages of
the same size.
NOTICE
Unfold folded originals before loading them into the ADF. If the original is copied without being unfolded, a
paper jam may occur.
1 Load the original into the ADF.
2 In the basic settings screen, press [Original Setting].
3 Press [Z-Folded Original].
% To cancel the setting, press [Z-Folded Original] again to
deselect it.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-18
5.3 Quality/Density
5
5.3 Quality/Density
Select the setting for the image type of the original to better adjust the copy quality/density.
% Press [Quality/Density].
Settings
Original Type Select the original type (text and image type) to obtain better copy quality.
Text Copies originals containing only text. The edges of
copied text are reproduced with sharpness, providing an image that is easy to read.
Text/Photo [Photo Paper]:
Select this setting to print photos from originals
containing both text and images onto photographic paper. A smooth copy image is produced.
[Printed Photo]:
Select this setting to copy printed originals containing both text and images, such as pamphlets or
catalogs.
Photo [Photo Paper]:
Select this setting when the original photos are
printed on photographic paper. Halftone original
images (photographs, etc.) that cannot be reproduced with the usual settings will be reproduced in
as nearly an original state as possible. A smooth
copy image is produced.
[Printed Photo]:
Select this setting to copy printed originals, such
as pamphlets or catalogs. Halftone original images
(photographs, etc.) that cannot be reproduced with
the usual settings will be reproduced in as nearly
an original state as possible.
Map Select this setting to copy originals with a background color, originals containing pencil markings
or fine colored lines such as maps. A sharp copy
image is produced.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-19
5.3 Quality/Density
5
Original Type Dot Matrix Original Select this setting to copy originals containing only
text that appears faint (such as that written with a
pencil). The copied text is reproduced so that it is
darker, making it easier to read.
Copied Paper Select this setting to copy images (originals) printed using this machine.
Density Adjust copy density.
Background Removal Adjust the density of the background area for originals with colored background (newsprints, recycle paper, etc.) or originals on thin paper showing
text or images from the back.
Select [Auto] for "Background Removal Level" to enable automatic background density adjustment for copying with the optimal background density.
For "Background Removal", normally [Bleed Removal] is selected. However,
when copying an original with colored background, select [Paper Discoloration Adj] to make adjustment for background removal for copying.
Text Enhancement Adjust the text reproduction level for an original with a photo overlapping the
text (background text) to clarify the text on the background.
To emphasize the text on the background, press [Daker Text] to adjust the
setting toward +.
To emphasize the background image, press [Lighter Text] to adjust the setting toward -.
[Text Enhancement] can be configured when an item other than [Photo] is
selected.
Glossy Makes copies with a glossy finish.
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-20
5.4 Application
5
5.4 Application
Configure the application settings for making copies.
Item
Sheet/Cover/Chapter
Insert
Inserts another sheet of paper or adds a cover page to the paper
for copying. You can also scan multiple copies of the original with
different settings.
p. 5-21
Edit Color Inverts the contrast or gradation of the original or prints the original
in the mirror image. It also adds a color in the background or adjust
the quality of a color image.
p. 5-29
Book Copy/Repeat Configure the settings for a book or catalog. An image on a single
sheet of original can be repeatedly copied or divided and enlarged
in parts to produce copies of the respective parts.
p. 5-33
Page Margin Select the binding margin (blank area) of the paper used for copying.
p. 5-37
Image Adjust Configure the layout for the image when the paper is larger than the
original.
p. 5-39
Booklet Automatically arranges the page order of the scanned original and
makes 2-sided 2 in 1 copies to produce a page layout for a centerbound book, such as a magazine.
p. 5-40
Erase Erases unnecessary outside portion of the original body text or
erases the area outside the original placed on the original glass.
p. 5-41
Stamp/Composition Prints the date/time, page number or a stamp printed on copies.
This function also allows you to embed information for preventing
unauthorized copying in a document.
p. 5-43
Card Copy Copies the contents of the front and back sides of a card-size original, for example, insurance card, driver's license, or business card,
on one sheet.
p. 5-59
Save in User Box Saves the scanned original data in a User Box. p. 5-60bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-21
5.4 Application
5
5.4.1 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert
OHP Interleave
Prevent copies printed onto OHP transparencies from sticking together because of the heat produced during
copying by having paper (interleaves) inserted between the transparencies.
0 Printing on OHP transparencies is possible only in black.
0 Use interleaf paper with the same size as the OHP transparencies.
0 The number of copies is fixed to one. You cannot change.
0 The finishing function cannot be changed.
0 Load transparencies into the bypass tray.
0 Do not use a transparency that has been through the machine even once. It may lead to reduced print
quality, a paper jam or a damage to the machine. (Even if a transparency has been discharged without
printing, it cannot be reused.)
1 Load the original.
2 Press [Basic] ö [Color] ö [Black].
3 Load transparencies into the bypass tray. Load the interleave paper into the desired paper tray.
4 Set the paper type of the bypass tray to [Transparency] and press [OK].
5 Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [OHP Interleave].
dReference
Setting Black for Color Settings:
Press [Basic] ö [Color] ö [Black].
Settings
Interleave Paper Select the paper tray loaded with paper with a transparency interleaf.
Transparency Indicates the paper size of the loaded transparency.
EFGH
EFGH
EFGH
EFGH
EFGH
EFGHbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-22
5.4 Application
5
Cover Sheet
Copies the front and back cover sheets onto separate paper when copying an original with a front/back cover
sheet. When the original to copy does not have a front and back cover, you can insert blank sheets of paper
as the front and back covers.
0 Use paper of the same size for the body text and cover sheets, and ensure the same orientation of
paper for both purposes.
% Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [Cover Sheet].
dReference
To configure the 2-sided copy mode:
Press [Basic] ö [Duplex/Combine].
Settings
None Disables copying of the front/back cover and blank sheet insertion.
Front (Copy) For 1-sided copy:
Copies the first page of the original onto paper for the front cover sheet.
For 2-sided copy:
Copies the second page of the original onto the back of the paper for the
front cover sheet.
Front (Blank) Adds paper for the front cover sheet as the first page of the copy.
Back (Copy) For 1-sided copy:
Copies the last page of the original onto the back cover page.
For 2-sided copy:
Copies the last two pages of the original the 2-sided copy mode onto both
sides of the paper for the back cover when copying an original with an even
number of pages.
Back (Blank) Add paper for the back cover sheet to the last page of the copy.
Paper Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the front/back cover page or
blank cover pages.
You can select the paper tray of the Post Inserter when [Front(Blank)] or
[Back(Blank)] is selected while the optional Post Inserter is installed.
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
4
4
3
3
2
2
2
2
1
1
REPORTbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-23
5.4 Application
5
Insert Sheet
A different sheet of paper (such as colored paper) can be inserted as specified pages in the copies. You can
select from two options: [Copy] and [Blank] to enable or disable copying to the inserted sheet.
0 You can specify up to 30 positions for insert sheets.
0 Use paper of the same size for the sheets to be inserted and for the original copies, and ensure the
same orientation of paper for both.
% Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [Insert Sheet].
Settings
P --- Specify where to insert sheets of a different paper type.
Sort Sorts specified pages in the ascending order.
Insert Paper Select the paper tray loaded with the paper to be inserted. You can select the
paper tray of the Post Inserter when [Blank] is selected while the optional Post
Inserter is installed.
Copy Copies the original with the specified paper inserted for the specified pages.
When setting the specified page to "2"
For 1-sided copy:
Inserts the specified paper as the second page of the copies, and copies the
second page of the original onto it.
For 2-sided copy:
Leaves the back side of the first page of the copy blank, inserts the specified
paper for the second page of the copy, and makes a 2-sided copy of the second and third pages of the original onto the inserted sheet.
6
6
4
4
5
2
2
3
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
1
1
REPORTbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-24
5.4 Application
5
dReference
To configure the 2-sided copy mode:
Press [Basic] ö [Duplex/Combine].
Insert Image
A multi-page original scanned on the original glass can be inserted at the pre-set location in an original first
scanned with the ADF.
0 With the Insert Image function, the inserted original is added after the specified page.
0 You can specify up to 30 positions for the original to be inserted.
0 If the document scanned on the original glass has more pages than the number of pages specified in
the Insert Image screen, the remaining pages of the inserted original are printed at the end of the
original.
0 The original on the original glass is scanned with the same settings as for the original scanned in the
ADF.
0 If the original scanned on the original glass has fewer pages than the number of pages specified in the
Insert Image screen, the missing insertion pages will not be printed.
0 If the same page number is specified twice, two insertion original pages are added at the specified
location.
0 If the specified page number is greater than the total number of pages in the main original, the
corresponding insertion original page is added at the end of the copy.
1 Load the original into the ADF.
Blank Select this option to insert the specified paper sheet after the page you have
specified.
When setting the specified page to "3"
For 1-sided copy:
Inserts the specified paper as the fourth page of the copy.
For 2-sided copy:
Leaves the back side of the second page of the copy blank, and inserts the
specified paper for the third page of the copy.
Settings
6
6
4
4
5
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
1
1
2
REPORT
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
A B
4
3
B
2
1 A
1
REPORTbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-25
5.4 Application
5
2 Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [Insert Image].
3 Press the [Start] key.
4 Place the original to be inserted on the original glass.
5 Press the [Start] key.
% To insert a multi-page original, repeat steps 4 and 5 until all pages of the insertion original are
scanned in the order that they are to be inserted.
6 Press [Finish].
7 Press the [Start] key.
Copying begins.
Settings
P --- Specify the position to insert the page scanned through the original
glass.
Sort Sorts specified pages in the ascending order.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-26
5.4 Application
5
Chapters
When making 2-sided copies, the pages specified as the first page of a chapter can be printed on the front
side of the paper. If the document was arranged so that the specified page would be printed on the back side
of a page, the page is left blank and the specified page is printed on the front side of the next page.
0 You can set up to 30 positions for the first page of chapters.
0 Enable the Chapters function to set [1-Sided > 2-Sided]. For a 2-sided original, select [2-Sided >2-
Sided].
0 Make sure that the paper loaded for the first page of the chapter and for text copies have the same size
and orientation.
% Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [Chapters].
dReference
To configure the 2-sided copy mode:
Press [Basic] ö [Duplex/Combine].
Settings
P --- Specify the first page of the chapters.
Sort Sorts specified pages in the ascending order.
Chapter Paper Specify the paper tray for paper to be inserted for the first page of the chapter.
Copy Insert Makes copies of the first pages of the chapters on paper of a different type
from that for the text pages.
None Copies all pages with the same type of paper.
3
7
7
8
6
2 6
4
4
5
3
3
3
7
7
8
5
5
6
3
3
4
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-27
5.4 Application
5
Program Jobs
When the originals to be copied include different types of materials such as a 1-sided original for full size
copying and a 2-sided original for enlarged copying among other things, you can use this setting for scanning
various originals with different settings and then copy them all in a single copying job.
Different Zoom or Paper settings can be specified for a part of the original or Finishing settings or a numbering
function can be set after the entire original is scanned, and then all copies can be printed together.
0 Up to 100 types of originals can be scanned.
0 When configuring a program job, the [Group] setting cannot be selected in the Finishing screen.
Instead, select [Sort].
1 Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [Program Jobs].
2 Select the desired copy settings, and then press the [Start] key.
3 Press [Fix].
% Press [Retry] to delete the scanned job. Press [Change Setting] to configure the copy settings.
% When the original has been loaded on the original glass, press [Finish].
4 Load the next original and press [Change Setting].
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
4
2
3
3
2
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
1
1
0001
REPORTbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-28
5.4 Application
5
5 Select the desired copy settings, and then press the [Start] key.
% Repeat Steps 3 to 5 until all originals have been scanned.
6 After all original pages have been scanned, press [Finish].
7 Press [Yes].
8 Specify finish settings as needed.
9 Press [Start] or the [Start] key.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-29
5.4 Application
5
5.4.2 Edit Color
Neg./Pos. Reverse
Use this function to enable the original to be copied with the density and gradations of the image inversed.
The images in the original are copied and output reversed like negative film of photographs.
0 If a single color is selected, the images are reversed relative to the selected color.
0 If a background color is selected, colors are reversed relative to the selected base color and the color
of the images.
% Press [Application] ö [Edit Color] ö [Neg./Pos. Reverse].
% To cancel the Neg./Pos. Reverse function, press [Neg./Pos. Reverse] again.
dReference
To set Single Color:
Press [Basic] ö [Color] ö [Single Color].
To Set Background Color:
Press [Application] ö [Edit Color] ö [Background Color]. bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-30
5.4 Application
5
Mirror Image
Copy originals as mirror images.
% Press [Application] ö [Edit Color] ö [Mirror Image].
Settings
Original Size Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically.
If the size of the original is not automatically detected, select the original
size.
Custom Size Enter the original size.
Photo Size Select the photo size.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-31
5.4 Application
5
Background Color
Color the blank area of the original with a specified background color.
% Press [Application] ö [Edit Color] ö [Background Color].
Color Adjustment
Adjust the image quality to fit an image based on the color-copied original.
1 Press [Application] ö [Edit Color] ö [Color Adjust].
Settings
Select Color Select a background color.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-32
5.4 Application
5
2 Configure respective functions.
% Press [Sample Copy] to see how it will appear with the currently specified color quality adjustment
settings.
Settings
Brightness Adjust the brightness of the copied image.
Contrast Adjust the copy density balance.
Saturation Adjust how vivid colors should be for full color copies.
Red Adjust how vivid red colors should be for full color copies.
Green Adjust how vivid green colors should be for full color copies.
Blue Adjust how vivid blue colors should be for full color copies.
Hue Adjust the hue for full color copies.
The hue refers to a color trend relative to discrete colors such as red,
blue and yellow. By adjusting the hue, the image can attain more reddish or bluish tone, for example.
Copy Density Adjust copy density (lighter or darker).
Sharpness Adjust the sharpness to emphasize the edges of text so that copied
text can be read more easily. You can make an overly sharp original
image softer or a blurry image clearer.
Color Balance Adjust the individual concentrations of yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan
(C), and black (K) for full-color copies.
Full-color copy reproduces colors of the original by mixing toners of
four colors: yellow, magenta, cyan, and black.
By changing the amount of each of the four toners, adjust the tints in
the copy.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-33
5.4 Application
5
5.4.3 Book Copy/Repeat
Book Copy
Divides or does not divide page spreads (such as a book or catalog) into left and right pages to copy data.
This function enables copying with the ADF open by placing the original on the Original Glass. If necessary,
you can place an original image at the center of the paper to copy.
0 Place the original on the original glass.
0 If [Book Copy] is selected, [Image Adjust] is set to [Centering] and [Erase] is set to [Non-Image Area
Erase] automatically. For details on [Centering], refer to page 5-39. For details on [Non-Image Area
Erase], refer to page 5-41. The automatically set [Centering] or [Non-Image Area Erase] can be
cancelled.
0 When [Book Spread] or [Separation] is selected, pressing the [Start] key starts printing.
0 When [Front and Back Cover] is selected, the scanning operation starts with the front cover followed
by scanning of the back cover, and ends with scanning of all two-page spreads of the body text in the
order of the page numbers.
0 When [Front Cover] is selected, all two-page spreads are scanned in order after the front cover.
0 When [Front and Back Cover] or [Front Cover] is selected, wait until all pages in the original are scanned
and then press [Finish] and then the [Start] key to start printing.
% Press [Application] ö [Book Copy/Repeat] ö [Book Copy].
Settings
Book Spread Copies both pages of a two-page spread original as a one page original.
Separation Copies the right and left pages of two-page spreads separately in the order
of the page numbers.
Front Cover Copies the front cover, the right and left pages of two-page spreads separately in the order of the page numbers, and the back cover in this order.
Front and Back Cover Copies the front cover, separate copies of each page in the page spreads
and the back cover in the original page order.
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
SURVEYOR’S
REPORTbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-34
5.4 Application
5
Image Repeat
An original image can be repeatedly printed on a single sheet of paper. Specify the original and paper sizes
or the zoom to automatically calculate the number of images to be copied accordingly. Alternatively, specify
the desired number of repetitions.
% Press [Application] ö [Book Copy/Repeat] ö [Image Repeat].
Frame Erase Erases projection of the dark shadow around the book.
Frame Configure the width of the area around the entire
frame to be erased.
Top, Right, Bottom,
Left
Configure the width of the top, right side, bottom
and left side of the frame to be erased.
None Select this settings to not erase the frame.
Center Erase Erases projection of the dark shadow at the center of the book.
Binding Position Select the binding position of the original.
To indicate it, select [Separation], [Front Cover], and [Front and Back Cover].
Settings
With Margin Repeats copying of the scanned area of the original so that the copy area of
the sheet is filled with the copied image. If the entire image does not fit into
the copy area, the extra range is not copied.
Without Margin Repeats copying of the scanned area of the original so that the sheet is filled
with the copied image. However, some parts of the image may be lost.
Auto Detect Automatically detects the area to be scanned.
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-35
5.4 Application
5
Poster Mode
This function enables enlarged copy of the original image to a size exceeding the paper size that can be
loaded in the machine, such as the 34 e 44 (A0) or 24 e 36 (B0) size. Specify the original size and the output
size (enlarged copy size) to output enlarged copies of divided sections of the original onto separate sheets
of paper respectively. Create an enlarged copy of the specified finished size by joining those copies of
sections.
To create an 34 e 44-size (A0-size) poster, create copies of sections on eight 11 e 17-size (A3-size) sheets
and join them together.
0 Place the original on the original glass.
0 In Poster Mode, the number of copies is set to 1.
% Press [Application] ö [Book Copy/Repeat] ö [Poster Mode].
Set Range Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically.
If the size of the original is not automatically detected, or the reading range
must be specified, select the original size.
Custom Size Enter the original size.
Photo Size Select the photo size.
2/4/8 Repeat 2 Repeat
4 Repeat
8 Repeat
Repeats copying of the scanned area of the original
as many times as specified. Note, however, that an
image that does not fit within the size of the paper
used is copied with partial cutoff.
[Repeat Interval Settings] can be configured only
for [2 Repeat].
Repeat Interval Settings
Specify the clearance between copied images.
Settings
Image Size Select the finished image size.
Custom Size Enter the finished image size.
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-36
5.4 Application
5
Booklet Original
A catalog with its staples removed can be copied and bound with staples at the center to create copies of
the original catalog.
0 This function is available if a saddle stitcher is installed in the optional finisher.
NOTICE
Load a catalog with the staples removed.
1 Load the original.
% To use the original glass, position the pages in order, starting with the side that includes the first
page, then the side that includes the second page, then the side that includes the third page.
Paper Size • North American model(inch):
Configure the width of the binding margin (1/16 inch to 3/4 inch) with
pressing [+] and [-]. When [None] is selected, the binding margin width is
set to 0 inch.
• European model(cm):
Enter the width of the binding margin (0.1 mm - 20.0 mm). When [None]
is selected, the binding margin width is set to 0 mm.
Zoom Enter the zoom to output a copy of the finished size.
Original Size Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically.
If the size of the original is not automatically detected, select the original
size.
Custom Size Enter the original size.
Photo Size Select the photo size.
Settings
7
2
2
1
8
2
2
7
7
5
4
4
3
6
5
4
4
3
6
Staples
+
2 7 8 1
4 5 6 3bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-37
5.4 Application
5
% To use the ADF, load the pages with the side that includes the first page on top.
2 Press [Application] ö [Book Copy/Repeat] ö [Booklet Original].
3 Press the [Start] key.
4 After all original pages have been scanned, press [Finish] and the [Start] key.
5.4.4 Page Margin
Copies can be printed with a binding margin so that the pages can easily be filed. When scanning a 2-sided
original, you can specify the paper binding position (binding margin for the paper) to prevent the copy from
being printed upside-down.
Left
Top
Right
0 You can specify the binding position without creating a binding margin.
0 For 2-sided copy, you need to set the paper binding position and the original direction. Otherwise, the
original image may be copied up-side-down.
0 If the positions of the staples or punched holes are different from the binding position, the positions of
the staples or punched holes are given priority.
0 If part of the image is lost when copied with the specified binding margin settings, reduce the zoom and
perform copying.
% Press [Application] ö [Page Margin].
3
3
4
6
6
5
1
1
2
8
8
7
4
4
ABC
DEF
GHI
3
3
ABC
DEF
GHI
2
2
ABC
DEF
1
1
ABC
DEF
GHI
3
3
ABC
DEF
GHI
1
2
AB
DE
GH
4
4
ABC
DEF
GHI
2
2
ABC
DEF
GHI
2
2
ABC
DEF
1
1
ABC
DEF
GHI
4
4
ABC
DEF
GHI
2
2
ABC
DEF
GHI
2
2
ABC
DEF
1
1
ABC
DEF
GHI
4
4
ABC
DEF
GHI
3
3
ABC
DEF
GHI
2
2
ABC
DEF
1
1
ABC
DEF
GHI
3
3
ABC
DEF
GHI
ABC
DEF
2 1
ABC
DEF
4 4
ABC
DEF
GHI
ABC
DEF
GHI
2 2
ABC
DEF
1
1
ABC
DEF
GHI 3
3
ABC
DEF
GHI
1
2
BC
EF
HI
4
4
ABC
DEF
GHI
2
2
ABC
DEF
GHI
2
2
ABC
DEF
1
1
ABC
DEF
GHIbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-38
5.4 Application
5
dReference
To set the zoom:
Press [Basic] ö [Zoom].
Settings
Margin Position Select an option from [Auto], [Left], [Top] and [Right].
When Auto is selected, the binding position is automatically set.
• This function automatically determines the binding position according to
the orientation of the loaded original. If the original length is 11-11/16
inch (297 mm) or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper
is selected. If the original length is more than 11-11/16 inch (297 mm), a
binding position along the short side of the paper is selected.
• The binding position is set on the upper or left-side end.
• Be sure to load the original so that its top side is placed in the back. If
the document is loaded in any other orientation, this setting fails.
Image Shift Adjust the image position according to the binding margin.
Change Back Shift Adjust the image position on the back side of the
paper in the 2-sided copy mode.
Adjust Value • North American model (inch): Configure the width of the binding margin
(1/16 inch to 3/4 inch) with pressing [+] and [-]. When [None] is selected,
the binding margin width is set to 0 inch.
• European model (cm): Enter the width of the binding margin (0.1 mm -
20.0 mm). When [None] is selected, the binding margin width is set to 0
mm.
Original Direction Select the orientation of the original loaded into the ADF or placed on the
original glass.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-39
5.4 Application
5
5.4.5 Image Adjust
If the paper is larger than the original, you can enlarge the original and copy it into the center of the paper.
Full Size
Center Zoom
Centering
% Press [Application] ö [Image Adjust].
Settings
Full Size Enlarges the image up to the largest possible paper size that can contain the
entire original, and copies the image at the center of the paper.
Place the original on the original glass.
Center Zoom Enlarges the image up to the largest possible paper size that can contain the
entire original, and copies the image at the center of the paper. However,
some parts of the image may be lost.
Place the original on the original glass.
Centering Copies the original image at the center of the paper without enlarging it.
Original Size Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically.
If the size of the original is not automatically detected, select the original
size.
Custom Size Enter the original size.
Photo Size Select the photo size.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-40
5.4 Application
5
5.4.6 Booklet
The page order of the scanned original is automatically arranged to produce 2-sided 2 in 1 copies in a page
layout for center binding, such as for a magazine.
0 Center Staple & Fold or Half-Fold is available if the Saddle Stitcher is installed in the optional Finisher.
0 Generally, a multiple of 4 pages is required with a 1-sided original, and a multiple of 2 pages is required
with a 2-sided original. If there are not enough pages, blank pages are automatically added at the end.
0 If a booklet is selected with the Auto Paper Select enabled, the zoom is automatically set at 64.7%
(70.7%).
% Press [Application] ö [Booklet].
Settings
Left Bind/Right Bind Select the output binding position for copies to be output.
Center Staple & Fold Staples copies at two places along the center, then folds the copies in half
before feeding them out.
Half-Fold Feeds out a copied sheet by folding it in two.
No This setting feeds out a copied sheet without Center Staple & Fold or HalfFold.
Paper Select the paper tray loaded with the desired paper.
Cover Sheet Copies the front and back cover sheets onto separate paper when copying
an original with a front/back cover sheet. When the original to copy does not
have a front and back cover, you can insert blank sheets of paper as the
front and back covers.
8
8
7
7
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
6 3
6 3
5
4
8 1
8 1
7
REPORT
2
8
8
7
7
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
3 6
6 6
4
5
1 8
1 8
2
REPORT
7
Right binding
Left bindingbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-41
5.4 Application
5
dReference
To set to an appropriate zoom:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Copier Settings] ö [Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet].
5.4.7 Erase
Frame Erase
Copies can be produced by erasing shadows of punched holes, unnecessary areas around the original text,
such as the transmission information on received faxes and the shadows of punched holes. All four sides
around the original can be erased in the same width or in a different width for each side.
% Press [Application] ö [Erase] ö [Frame Erase].
Settings
Frame Erases the four sides of the original in the same width.
Top Right Bottom Left Erases each frame side in a different width.
+/- • North American model (inch): Press [+], [-] to set the erasing width between 1/16 inch and 2 inch.
• European model (cm): Press [+], [-] to set the erasing width between 0.1
mm and 50.0 mm. The erasing width can also be entered using the keypad.
None Sets the erasing width to 0 inch (0 mm).
A
A:1/16 inch to 2 inch (0.1 mm to 50.0 mm)
Abizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-42
5.4 Application
5
Non-Image Area Erase
This function enables copying with the ADF open while having an original that cannot be loaded in the ADF
placed at a desired position on the original glass.
The original is automatically detected and the area outside the original text is erased.
Erase methods include "Bevel" and "Rectangular". "Bevel" is used when the background of the original is
thin and "Rectangular" is used when it is dark.
You can place the original on any position without opening or closing the ADF so that you can make copies
promptly. In addition, toner consumption will be reduced as the area outside the original text is erased.
0 If erasing is not performed as desired, set "Erase Operation" under "Erase Adjustment" in Administrator
Settings.
0 The size of the original automatically detected is 3/8 inch e 3/8 inch (10 mm e 10 mm) or larger.
If the detection fails, a blank sheet of paper is output.
0 You cannot make copies with the ADF closed.
0 The original image may be defected at its top or end.
% Press [Application] ö [Erase] ö [Non-Image Area Erase].
dReference
To set Erase Operation:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö
[Erase Adjustment].
Rectangular erasing
Bevel erasingbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-43
5.4 Application
5
5.4.8 Stamp/Composition
Add date and time, page number, stamp, image, or header or footer to make copies.
Item
Date/Time Adds date and time to copies.
Page Number Adds page numbers or chapter numbers to copies.
Stamp Adds preset or registered stamps to copies.
Copy Security Adds a hidden text for preventing unauthorized copying in a document when
copying. This function also allows you to copy a text with copy inhibit information or password embedded. Using this function, you can prevent original
information from being leaked.
Stamp Repeat Repeats copying of a stamp or the date and time onto the paper.
Header/Footer Adds date and time to the top or bottom of the paper to print copies.
Watermark Adds a watermark (watery text) to the center of the copied pages.
Overlay Makes copies with the image of the first scanned original page overlapping
the subsequent original images.
Registered Overlay Saves an image of the scanned original as a registered overlay in the hard
disk and later overlay the registered image on the copy of another original.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-44
5.4 Application
5
Date/Time
You can select the print position and notation format to print the date and time. Specify whether to print on
all pages or only on the first page.
0 The date/time stamp cannot be printed on blank pages inserted using the Cover Sheet, Insert Sheet
and Chapters functions. Change the setting for printing on blank pages in Administrator Settings to
enable blank page printing.
0 The date/time as of scanning the original is stamped on the paper.
% Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Date/Time].
dReference
To enable printing on blank pages:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Blank Page Print Settings].
Settings
Date Format Select the type (format) of date and time notation.
Time Format Select the type (format) of date and time notation. When [None] is selected,
the time is not printed.
Pages Select to print the date/time on all pages or only on the first page.
Print Position Select a position from the nine print position options.
Adjust Position Adjust horizontal and vertical positions between
1/16 inch (0.1 mm) and 1-15/16 inch (50.0 mm).
Text Details Set the text color, size and type.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-45
5.4 Application
5
Page Number
You can select the print position and notation format to print page numbers and chapter numbers. Page and
chapter numbers are printed on all pages.
0 Page numbers cannot be printed on blank pages inserted using the Cover Sheet, Insert Sheet and
Chapters functions. Change the setting for printing on blank pages in Administrator Settings to enable
blank page printing.
% Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Page Number].
Settings
Starting Page Number • Set [Page Number] between -99999 and 99999, and set [Chapter] between -100 and 100.
• Press [*] to switch over the signs (+ and -) of the setting.
• If a negative value is specified, the numbers are not printed until the numbering reaches 1. For example, if "-1" was specified, the numbers are
printed starting with "1" on the third copied page.
• The entered chapter number is printed if [1-1, 1-2...] is selected under
"Page Number Type".
Starting Chapter Number
Page Number Type Select the type (format) of the page.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-46
5.4 Application
5
dReference
To configure the settings for the Cover Sheet, Insert Sheet and Chapters functions:
Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert].
To configure the settings for the Chapters function:
Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [Chapters].
To enable printing on blank pages:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Blank Page Print Settings].
Insert Sheet Setting Set this parameter when using the Cover Sheet, Insert Sheet and Chapters
functions together.
Cover Sheet Print on Front and Back Cover:
Prints on the front and back covers.
Print on Back Cover Only:
Prints a page number on the back cover but not on
the front cover. Page number printing starts with
"2" for 1-sided copy and with "3" for 2-sided copy.
Do not print Page Number:
Disables printing on the front or back cover. Page
number printing starts with "2" for 1-sided copy
and with "3" for 2-sided copy.
Insert Sheet (Copy) Print page #:
Prints on inserted pages.
Do Not Print #:
Counts but not prints on inserted pages.
Skip the Page(s):
Disables counting and printing on inserted pages.
Insert (Blank) Do Not Print #:
Counts but not prints on inserted pages.
Skip the Page(s):
Disables counting and printing on inserted pages.
Print Position Select a position from the nine print position options.
Adjust Position Adjust horizontal and vertical positions between
1/16 inch (0.1 mm) and 1-15/16 inch (50.0 mm).
Text Details Set the text color, size and type.
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-47
5.4 Application
5
Stamp
You can select the print position and notation format to print the stamp. Select printing on all pages or only
on the first page.
0 A stamp refers to text with printing contents fixed and preset. You can also select a stamp registered
with the Copy Protection Utility.
0 Stamps cannot be printed on blank pages inserted using the Cover Sheet, Insert Sheet and Chapters
functions. Change the setting for printing on blank pages in Administrator Settings to enable blank page
printing.
% Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Stamp].
dReference
To enable printing on blank pages:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Blank Page Print Settings].
Settings
Stamp Type/Preset
Stamps
Select a stamp to be printed from the eight types available.
Pages Select to print the stamp on all pages or only on the first page.
Text Size Select the character size used for the stamp.
Text Color Select the text color for the stamp.
Print Position Select a position from the nine print position options.
Adjust Position Adjust horizontal and vertical positions between
1/16 inch (0.1 mm) and 1-15/16 inch (50.0 mm).bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-48
5.4 Application
5
Copy Protect
This function allows you to print a hidden text for preventing unauthorized copying, for example, a preset
stamp such as Private or date, in the background without particular distinction. If you copy a document with
Copy Protect printed, a text is highlighted on the entire sheet of paper to be printed, enabling you to know
that the copy is not authorized.
0 The copy protection text is printed on all pages. The page to start with cannot be specified.
0 The selected copy protection text formats appear in the order they are placed, and can be used in
combination for up to eight text lines.
0 Use the PageScope Web Connection or Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp.
0 Multiple registered stamps or preset stamps cannot be selected.
% Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Copy Security]ö [Copy Protect].
Settings
Registered Stamp Select one from registered stamps.
Preset Stamp Select a stamp to be printed from the eight types available.
Date/Time Select the type of date and time notation. When [None] is selected for Time
Format, the time is not printed.
The date/time as of scanning the original is stamped on the paper.
Other Job Number Select Yes to print the copy job number.
Serial Number Select Yes to print the serial number of this machine.
For details on setting for the serial number, contact
your service representative.
Distribution Control
Number
Prints the distribution control number.
Specify the distribution control number using a value between 1 and 99999999.
Detail Settings Configure the settings for Text/Background Color, Density, Copy Protect
Text, Text Size, Pattern Overwrite and Background Pattern.
ABCD
Draft Draft Draft
Draf aft
Draft
Draft Draft raft
Draft Draft
ABCD
Draft Draft Draft
Draf aft
Draft
Draft Draft raft
Draft Draft
ABCDbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-49
5.4 Application
5
dReference
To delete a registered stamp:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Stamp Settings] ö
[Delete Registered Stamp].
Copy Guard
This function prints a document, embedding a Copy Guard pattern in a copy protect text, for example, a
preset stamp such as Private or date.
If an attempt is made to copy copy-guarded sheets, the machine that supports this function scans a Copy
Guard pattern, stops copying, and discards the currently running job.
0 For a text, specify the pre-registered preset stamps.
0 The Copy Guard text is printed on all pages. The page to start with cannot be specified.
0 The selected Copy Guards appear in the order they are placed, and can be used in combination for up
to six text lines.
0 You can select the preset stamp, date/time, and the other items together.
0 Multiple preset stamps cannot be selected.
0 A Copy Guard cannot be printed on a colored paper, envelope, or transparency film.
% [Application] ö [Stamp/Compositon] ö [Copy Security] ö [Copy Guard]
Position Change the angle. The angle can be changed when there are no more than
four lines in the selected copy protection text.
Change Pos./Delete Change the arrangement order. Select the target
copy protection text and press [Up] or [Down].
To add a space to the copy protection text, press
[Insert Space]. Press either [Up] or [Down] to move
o that appears beside the specified copy protection text type, and then press [Insert].
To delete the copy protection text, press [Delete],
and then press the button for the copy protection
text to be deleted.
Settings
ABCD
Draft Draft Draft
Draf aft
Draft
Draft Draft raft
Draft Draft
ABCD
NGbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-50
5.4 Application
5
dReference
To specify and detect a Copy Guard:
Select Utility/Counter ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Security Details] ö [Copy Guard].
Password Copy
This function prints a document, embedding a copy protect text, for example, a preset stamp such as Private
or date, and a password for Password Copy.
If an attempt is made to copy password-copied sheets, the machine that supports this function scans a
Password Copy pattern and prompts you to enter the password. When the correct password is entered,
copying will start.
0 For a text, specify the pre-registered preset stamps.
0 A Password Copy is printed on all pages. The page to start with cannot be specified.
0 The selected Password Copy texts appear in the order they are placed, and can be used in combination
for up to six text lines.
0 You can select the preset stamp, date/time, and the other items together.
0 Multiple preset stamps cannot be selected.
0 A Password Copy cannot be printed on a colored paper, envelope, or transparency film.
0 If you fail to enter a password three times, the currently processed copy job will be erased.
0 If a password is detected on copies with Zoom, 2 Color, Grayscale, Color Adjust, Colored Paper,
Envelope, or Transparency specified, the currently processed copy job will be erased.
0 If multiple originals with different passwords are scanned, you will need to enter a password for each
original.
Settings
Copy Guard Type Preset Stamp Select a stamp to be printed from the eight types
available.
Date/Time Specify the type of the date or time to be printed on
paper. The date/time as of scanning the original is
stamped on the paper.
Other Specify Job Number, Serial Number, and Distribution Control Number to be printed on paper. Serial
Number is assigned at the time of shipment of this
machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative.
Detail Settings Specify Text/Background Color, Copy Guard Pattern, Text Size, and Background Pattern to be printed on paper.
ABCD
1234
1234
1234
Draft Draft Draft
Draf aft
Draft
Draft Draft raft
Draft Draft
ABCD
NG
Draft Draft Draft
Draf aft
Draft
Draft Draft raft
Draft Draft
ABCD
12bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-51
5.4 Application
5
% Select [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Copy Security] ö [Password Copy].
dReference
To specify and detect a Password Copy:
Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Security Details] ö [Password
Copy].
Stamp Repeat
You can print a stamp, the date and time, or other specified items on all pages of the copy.
0 The printing contents of the Stamp Repeat function are printed on all pages.
0 The selected Stamp appear in the order they are placed, and can be used in combination for up to eight
text lines.
0 Use the PageScope Web Connection or Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp.
0 Multiple registered stamps or preset stamps cannot be selected.
Settings
Password Enter the password to be embedded in paper.
Stamp Type Preset Stamp Select a stamp to be printed from the eight types
available.
Date/Time Specify the type of the date or time to be printed on
paper. The date/time as of scanning the original is
stamped on the paper.
Other Specify Job Number, Serial Number, and Distribution Control Number to be printed on paper. Serial
Number is assigned at the time of shipment of this
machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative.
Detail Settings Specify Text/Background Color, Password Copy
Pattern, Text Size, and Background Pattern to be
printed on paper.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-52
5.4 Application
5
% Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Stamp Repeat].
dReference
To delete a registered stamp:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Stamp Settings] ö
[Delete Registered Stamp].
Settings
Registered Stamp Select one from registered stamps.
Preset Stamp Select a stamp to be printed from the eight types available.
Date/Time Select the type of date and time notation. When [None] is selected for Time
Format, the time is not printed.
The date/time as of scanning the original is stamped on the paper.
Other Job Number Select Yes to print the copy job number.
Serial Number Select Yes to print the serial number of this machine.
For details on setting for the serial number, contact
your service representative.
Distribution Control
Number
Prints the distribution control number.
Specify the distribution control number using a value between 1 and 99999999.
Detail Settings Select the Text Color, Density, Text Size and Pattern Overwrite.
Position Change the angle as required when there are no more than four lines in the
selected repeating stamp.
Change Pos./Delete Change the arrangement order. Select the target
Stamp Repeat and press [Up] or [Down].
To add a space to repeated stamps, press [Insert
Space]. Press either [Up] or [Down] to move o that
appears beside the specified Stamp Repeat, and
then press [Insert].
To delete the Stamp Repeat text, press [Delete],
and then press the button for the Stamp Repeat
text to be deleted.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-53
5.4 Application
5
Header/Footer
This setting enables printing the date/time and text at the top or the bottom of the paper. The date/time or a
distribution number can be printed on each page. The header and footer can contain predetermined
contents, but you can also temporarily change the contents.
0 In order to use the Header/Footer function, a header/footer must be registered in advance in
Administrator Settings. If no header/footer is registered in Administrator Settings, the [Header/Footer]
menu does not appear.
% Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Header/Footer].
dReference
To register a header/footer:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Stamp Settings] ö
[Header/Footer Settings].
Settings
Recall Header/Footer Select a header/footer to be used.
Check/Change Temporarily
Check or temporarily change the contents of the registered header/footer.
Header Settings Select to enable or disable printing of a header/footer. To print a header/footer, configure the
following settings:
Text:
Enter the text for the header/footer.
Date/Time:
Select the type of date and time notation.
Other:
Select to print or not to print the distribution control
number, job number, or serial number.
Footer Settings
Pages Select to print the header/footer on all pages or
only on the first page.
Text Details Select the Text Color, Text Size and Text Type.
Reset Reset the settings to the initial contents.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-54
5.4 Application
5
Watermark
You can print a watermark (light text) at the center of the paper. Select fixed preset text to be printed such
as "Invalid Copy" and "Private".
Copying with a watermark enables explicit indication of the use of the copied paper. It also helps prevent
unauthorized copy from the copied paper.
0 The watermark is printed on all pages at an angle of 45 degrees. It is printed once per page.
0 In case other settings affect the watermark printing to cause partial loss, the Watermark function is
canceled upon copying.
% Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Watermark].
Settings
Watermark Type Select a watermark from the eight types available.
The watermark selected is printed over the original image.
Text Color Select the watermark color from [Black], [Magenta] and [Cyan].
The watermark is printed in the selected color.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-55
5.4 Application
5
Overlay
Makes copies with the image of the first scanned original page overlapping the subsequent original images.
For example, if you set Overlay to copy three original pages, two pages are output, including "a merged
image of the first and second pages" and "a merged images of the first and the third pages".
The Overlay function is useful for overlay of text, pictures or figures not prepared in other Stamp/Composition
functions on the original.
% Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Overlay].
Settings
Pages Select to print the overlay image on all pages or only on the first page. Selecting [1st Page Only] prints only on the second page of the original.
Original Size Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically.
If the size of the original is not automatically detected, select the original
size.
Custom Size Enter the original size.
Photo Size Select the photo size.
Density Use the keypad to enter the density of an overlay image (using a value between 20 to 100%).
Color Select the color of overlay image from [full color], [black], [red], [blue],
[green], [yellow], [cyan], or [magenta].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-56
5.4 Application
5
Registered Overlay
This function enables storing of an image from the scanned original as a registered overlay on the hard disk
for later use in copying another original. It is useful to register frequently used overlay images.
% Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Registered Overlay].
Composition Transparent Composes overlay image to be superimposed and
increases the brightness of the image. This setting
prevents an original from being hidden by the composed overlay image.
Background Composition (Original)
Composes the original as the background. The
overlay image is superimposed on the original
when they are printed.
Back Composes the overlay image as the background.
The original is superimposed on the overlay image
when they are printed.
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-57
5.4 Application
5
Settings
Recall Overlay Image Specify whether to print a registered overlay image on the front or back side.
Press an item to select an overlay image and configures its setting.
• You cannot select an overlay image when no overlay has been registered.
Thumbnail View
Display Name
In the screen view, you can check overlay images.
In the Display Name mode, you can check overlay
images using their file names. Select the desired
overlay image.
Detail Settings Density:
Use the keypad to enter the density of an overlay
image (using a value between 20 to 100%).
Color:
Select the color of overlay image from [full color],
[black], [red], [blue], [green], [yellow], [cyan], or [magenta].
Composition:
Transparent
Composes overlay image to be superimposed and
increases the brightness of the image. This setting
prevents an original from being hidden by the composed overlay image.
Background Composition(Original)
Composes the original as the background. The
overlay image is superimposed on the original
when they are printed.
Back
Composes the overlay image as the background.
The original is superimposed on the overlay image
when they are printed.
Image Details Check the "Name", "Registered Date", "Image
Size" and "Color" of the overlay image.
To confirm the enlarged overlay image, press [Preview].
Register Overlay Image New Enter the name of the overlay image to be registered.
Load the overlay image original on the original
glass and press the [Start] key to have the overlay
image registered.
Overwrite Select an overlay image to use for overwrite and
press [Overwrite].
Load the overlay image original on the original
glass and press the [Start] key to have the overlay
image overwritten.
Delete Select an overlay image to be deleted and press
[Delete].
Detail Settings Density:
Specify the density of an overlay to be registered
between 20% and 100%.
Color:
Select the color for the overlay image to be registered from [Auto Color], [Full Color] and [Black].
Pages Select to print the overlay image on all pages or only on the first page.
Original Size Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically.
If the size of the original is not automatically detected, select the original
size.
Custom Size Enter the original size.
Photo Size Select the photo size.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-58
5.4 Application
5
dReference
To prohibit changing the overlay registration:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access] ö
[Restrict Access to Job Settings] ö [Change Registered Overly].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-59
5.4 Application
5
5.4.9 Card Copy
Separately scans the contents of the front and back sides of a card, for example, insurance card, driver's
license, or business card, and copies them together on one sheet. You can copy a card with the full size or
enlarge an image to fit paper. Using the card copy function, you can save the number of sheets to be used.
0 A card must be placed in the erect mode on the original glass.
0 The card copy function and the auto paper function cannot be selected at the same time.
0 For some zoom values, part of the image may be cut off.
% Select [Application] ö [Card Copy].
dReference
To specify the default of Card Copy:
Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Copier Settings] ö [Card Copy].
Settings
Original Size Press [X] and [Y], and enter the size of the card to be copied. Also select the
pre-specified size from [size1] to [size4].
Layout Specify where to place the front and back sides of a card.
Zoom You can copy a card with the full size or enlarge an image to fit paper.
A A
B
Bbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-60
5.4 Application
5
5.4.10 Save in User Box
This function enables saving of data from the scanned originals on the hard disk (in the User Box) built in the
machine. Documents saved in User Boxes can be printed when necessary.
For details on using documents saved in User Boxes, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".
% Press [Application] ö [Save in User Box].
Settings
User Box Select the destination User Box.
Document Name Specify a document name for the read original.
A name automatically assigned to the document appears. You can change
the file name.
Save & Print [Yes]:
Select to copy the scanned original and save it in the specified User Box.
[No]:
Select to save the data of the scanned original in the specified User Box.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-61
5.5 Left panel display
5
5.5 Left panel display
In the left panel of the basic settings screen, you can view the job list and the job status information.
You can also view the result of the settings being configured.
dReference
To configure settings displayed as the default in the left panel:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Custom Display Settings] ö [Left Panel Display Default].
To prohibit other users from deleting jobs or to give permission to do so:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access] ö
[Restrict Access to Job Settings] ö [Delete Other User Jobs].
To prohibit or permit change if the print priority of jobs:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access] ö
[Restrict Access to Job Settings] ö [Changing Job Priority].
To hide the file name and destination in the job log:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Security Details] ö [Hide
Personal Information].
To delete all job logs:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Security Details] ö
[Initialize] ö [Job History].
Job List Check Job
Settings
Job List Lists jobs currently being performed or waiting to be performed.
If the Left Panel Display Default is set to "Status Display" in User Settings,
the job status is displayed.
Delete To delete a job, select the job from the job list, and
then press [Delete].
Job Details Opens the Job List screen.
Check Job Displays the result of the settings being configured.
Check Details Check or change the current copy settings.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-62
5.5 Left panel display
5
5.5.1 Job List
From the Job List screen, lists of jobs being performed by this machine and the jobs that have been
performed in addition to the job details can be viewed, and the job settings can be changed.
0 If user authentication settings have been applied and the machine is set so that jobs cannot be deleted
by other users, the job is not deleted.
0 If an Administrator Settings parameter was set so that the output priority of jobs cannot be changed,
[Increase Priority] does not appear and the output priority of the jobs cannot be specified.
0 When there is a job being printed, another job can be registered. Up to 251 jobs can be registered in
total.
0 If the authentication method is changed in Administrator Settings and all management data is cleared,
the jobs in the [Job History] are deleted.
% Press [Job List] ö [Job Details] ö [Print].
Settings
Print Opens the screen for checking print jobs.
Send Opens the screen for checking fax and scan transmission jobs. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".
Receive Opens the screen for checking fax reception jobs. For details, refer to
the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".
Save Opens the screen for saving jobs. For details, refer to the "User's
Guide [Box Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-63
5.5 Left panel display
5
Current Jobs Lists the jobs currently processed. Check the current status.
Delete Deletes a job.
Increase Priority
(Displayed for the list
of print jobs in process)
The currently processed print job is interrupted and printing of the job given priority begins. Printing of the interrupted job is
automatically restarted once printing for the
job given priority is finished.
If the currently processed print job cannot be
interrupted because it contains Fold or Staple, the job given priority is executed after the
currently processed print job has been completed.
Release Held Job
(Displayed for the list
of print jobs in process)
Select to switch to the held job list and
change the settings of, print, or delete a held
job.
The held job list contains jobs that could not
be printed because, for example, system
auto reset was activated during the proof
copy.
• If desired, press [Change Settings] to
change the copy settings.
• For confirmation, press the [Proof Copy]
key to print a copy from a stored job.
Check Job Set. Check job settings for stored jobs, jobs being
printed, jobs queued to be printed, and held
jobs.
Current Jobs Detail Check the status, results, error details, user
name, queued time, completed time, number
of original pages and number of copies for
jobs in process.
To delete the job, press [Delete] in the Detail
screen.
Job History Lists completed jobs.
• This list includes jobs that failed because of an error.
• You can check the job logs and results.
• [Scanned Image] in the left panel displays the first page of the selected job with a thumbnail. To display thumbnails in [Scanned Image], set [Job History Thumbnail Display] in Administrator Settings
to [ON]. For details, refer to page 7-51.
Deleted Jobs Displays only jobs that were deleted before
they were finished.
Finished Jobs Displays only jobs that were completed normally.
All Jobs Displays all jobs.
Detail Check the status, results, error details, user
name, queued time, completed time, number
of original pages and number of copies for
jobs in the Job History list.
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-64
5.5 Left panel display
5
5.5.2 Check Job
From the Check Job Settings screens, the current copy settings can be checked and changed if desired.
1 Press [Check Job] ö [Check Details].
2 Check the copy settings. To change the copy settings, press the relevant button.
3 After checking the settings, press [Close].6 User Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-2
6
6 User Settings
User Settings are for setting items that a user can adjust as appropriate.
The contents of these setting items depend upon how the Administrator settings are configured. User
Settings cannot be initialized all at once. To initialize all settings, either manually reset them one by one or
contact your service representative.
Settings
System Settings Configure the basic functions of this machine.
Custom Display Settings Change the touch panel display to the convenience of the user.
Copier Settings Configure the settings for copy functions to be used in copy operations.
Scan/Fax Settings Configure setting for fax and scan operations.
Printer Settings Configure setting is for the printer operations.
Change Password Change the password for the user who is currently logged in.
Change E-Mail Address Change the E-mail addresses specified for registered users.
Change Icon Change the icons specified for registered users.
Register Authentication Information
Register or delete the biometric authentication information or IC card authentication information of the current login user.
Cellular Phone/PDA Setting
Configure settings to print data from a cellular phone or PDA.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-3
6.1 System Settings
6
6.1 System Settings
Configure the basic functions of this machine.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [System Settings].
Settings
Language Selection Select the language for display in the touch panel.
Measurement Unit Settings Select the units for the values displayed in the touch panel.
Paper Tray Settings Auto Tray Selection
Settings
Select the trays to be selected automatically
when the Auto Paper Select function is enabled.
Also configure the priority for the auto tray switch
operation to switch paper trays when it is enabled.
• Configure "Auto Paper Selection Setting" to
use paper types other than plain paper as
plain paper in a regular auto paper selection
mode.
Auto Tray Switch
ON/OFF
Select whether a paper tray loaded with paper of
the same size is selected automatically when a
paper tray that was selected manually becomes
empty while printing copies.
No Matching Paper in
Tray Setting
Specify the action to be taken when the matching
paper is not loaded into the specified paper tray.
• [Stop Printing (Tray Fixed)]
Printing stops.
• [Switch Trays (Tray Priority)]
Whether the matching paper is loaded into the
specified paper tray is determined first. And if
not, another tray that has the matching paper
loaded (if any) is selected.
Print Lists Select the paper tray used for printing lists, such
as the sales counter and consumables indicators.
Also select whether to print lists in 1-Sided or 2-
Sided mode.
Post Inserter Settings Specify the paper tray, paper type, or paper size
when using the Post Inserter. This button appears
only when the Post Inserter is installed.
Auto Color Level Adjust. Adjust the reference level for detecting a color or black-and-white original
when the Auto Color setting is selected.
Power Save Settings Refer to page 7-3. Appears when user access is permitted under
Administrator settings.
Output Settings Refer to page 7-4.
AE Level Adjustment Refer to page 7-9.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-4
6.1 System Settings
6
Auto Paper Select for Small
Original
Specify the paper size to be used for a case where the document placed
on the original glass is too small to be detected in Auto Paper mode.
Copy on Small Size Prints on 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 (A5) paper.
• If 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 (A5) paper is not loaded in the
tray, a message that instructs you to load 5-
1/2 e 8-1/2 (A5) paper in the bypass tray appears.
Copy on Letter (Copy
on A4)
Prints on 8-1/2 e 11 (A4) paper.
Prohibit Copy Starts printing when a paper tray is selected manually and the [Start] key is pressed.
Blank Page Print Settings Appears when user access is permitted under Administrator settings. For
details, refer to page 7-26.
Page Number Print Position
Specify a page number print position when printing page numbers after
configuring 2-sided print or booklet settings. Select whether to print the
page numbers on a same position on all pages or on positions symmetric
with respect to the stapling position.
Select Keyboard Select the keyboard type displayed by default in the touch panel.
Factory default
Language Selection English
Measurement Unit Settings This value varies depending on the area.
Auto Tray Selection Settings
Tray Priority
Tray 1 ö Tray 2 ö Tray 3 ö Tray 4 ö LCT
LCT is displayed when the optional LCT is installed.
Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF Restrict
No Matching Paper in Tray
Setting
Stop Printing (Tray Fixed)
Print Lists • Tray 1
• 1-Sided
Post Inserter Settings Paper Tray: F1
Paper Type: Plain Paper
Paper size: Auto Detect
Paper Type Plain paper
Paper Size Auto Detect
Auto Color Level Adjust. Standard (3)
Low Power Mode Settings 15 min.
Sleep Mode Settings 30 min.
Print/Fax Output Settings Print: Page Print
Fax: Batch Print
Output Tray Settings • Copy: Tray 2
• Print: Tray 2
• Print Reports: Tray 1
• Fax: Tray 1
[Output Tray] is displayed when the Finisher FS-526, Finisher FS-527, or
Job Separator JS-504 is installed.
[Tray 3] is displayed if the Job Separator JS-603 is installed in the Finisher
FS-527.
AE Level Adjustment Standard (2)
Auto Paper Select for Small
Original
Prohibit Copy
Blank Page Print Settings Do Not Print
Page Number Print Position
Left & Right Bind: All the Same
Top & Bottom Bind: All the Same
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-5
6.1 System Settings
6
dReference
To enable Auto Paper:
Press [Basic] ö [Paper] ö [Auto Paper].
To enable Auto Color:
Press [Basic] ö [Color] ö [Auto Color].
To configure Background Removal to Auto:
Press [Quality/Density] ö [Background Removal] ö [Auto].
Select Keyboard Local Keyboard
Factory defaultbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-6
6.2 Custom Display Settings
6
6.2 Custom Display Settings
Change the touch panel display to the convenience of the user.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Custom Display Settings].
Settings
Copier Settings Default Tab Select either the standard Basic tab or the Quick
Copy tab as the basic settings screen in Copy
mode.
Shortcut Key 1 Allocate shortcut keys for frequently used Application functions to be added to the basic settings
screen. Pressing a shortcut key displays the desired setting screen.
• When the optional image controller is installed, only one shortcut key can be enabled.
Shortcut Key 2
Quick Settings 1 Allows you to register setting conditions for frequently used copy functions and place them on
the basic settings screen. The registered setting
condition can be invoked by only pressing the
corresponding easy setting key.
Quick Settings 2
Quick Settings 3
Quick Settings 4
Default Tab Density
Settings
Specify whether to display the copy density setting in the basic settings screen. If [ON] is selected, you can press [Dark] or [Light] in the basic
settings screen to adjust the copy density.
• If [ON] is selected, [Quick Settings 3] and
[Quick Settings 4] cannot be specified.
Scan/Fax Settings This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For
details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".
User Box Settings Configure settings for the User Box operations. For details, refer to the
"User's Guide [Box Operations]".
Copy Screen Configure whether to display the [Next Box Job], [Next Scan/Fax Job], or
[Next Copy Job] button or messages when you program the next job during the printing operation.
FAX Active Screen This setting is for the fax and network fax operations. For details, refer to
the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".
Color Selection Settings Select the color used for indicating that the button is selected.
Left Pane Display Default Left Panel Display
Default
Configure whether to display a list of jobs in process and in queue or to display the contents of the
current Copy settings as the default display of the
left panel.
Job Display Setting Configure whether to display a list of jobs in process and in queue or to display the progress of the
current job in process, when the default display of
the left panel set to "Job List".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-7
6.2 Custom Display Settings
6
Search Option Settings This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For
details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".
Factory default
Default Tab Basic
Shortcut Key 1/Shortcut
Key 2/Quick settings
1/Quick settings 2/Quick
settings 3/Quick settings 4
OFF
Default Tab Density Settings
OFF
Default Tab (Fax/Scan Settings)
Address Book
Program Default
(Fax/Scan Settings)
PAGE1
Address Book Index Default
(Fax/Scan Settings)
Favorites
Shortcut Key 1/Shortcut
Key 2
(Fax/Scan Settings)
OFF
Default Address Book
(Fax/Scan Settings)
Index
Default Address Type
(Fax/Scan Settings)
Group
Default Tab (User Box Settings)
Public
Shortcut Key 1/Shortcut
Key 2 (User Box Settings)
OFF
Copy Operating Screen No
Color Selection Settings Green
Left Panel Display Default Job List
Job Display Setting List Display
Uppercase and lowercase
letters
Differentiate
Search Option Screen OFF
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-8
6.3 Copier Settings
6
6.3 Copier Settings
Configure the settings used by the copy functions.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Copier Settings].
Settings
Auto Booklet ON when
Fold & Staple
Configure whether to automatically specify Booklet when Center Staple
and Fold is selected.
This item is displayed if the saddle stitcher is installed in the finisher.
Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet
Configure whether the preset zoom ratios are automatically selected when
Combine or Booklet is selected in Auto Paper mode.
• Select the recommended zoom ratios for the following zoom settings:
2 in 1, Booklet: 64.7% (70.7%)
4 in 1: 50.0%
8 in 1: 32.3% (35.3%)
Auto Sort/Group Selection Configure whether to output the copied pages automatically in Sort mode
when copying multiple-page original using the ADF.
Default Copy Settings Configure the initial values for the Copy function to be displayed when the
power in turned on or the [Reset] key is pressed.
Current Setting The current settings are used as the default settings.
Factory Default The factory settings are used as the default settings.
Default Enlarge Display
Settings
This setting is for the enlarged display screen operations. For details, refer
to the "User's Guide [Enlarge Display Operations]".
When AMS Direction is Incorrect
Configure whether to print or discard the job when the original orientation
does not match that of paper in Auto Zoom mode.
Separate Scan Output
Method
Configure the output for divided original loaded in the ADF or for multiple
pages of the original scanned on the original glass.
Page Print Printing of copies that can be printed begins while
the original is being scanned.
Batch Print Printing begins after all pages of the original have
been scanned.
Enlargement Rotation Configure whether to rotate and print a large-size original image when the
original orientation does not match that of paper.
Auto Zoom (Platen) Appears when user access is permitted under Administrator settings. For
details, refer to page 7-43.
Auto Zoom (ADF)
Specify Default Tray when
APS Off
Select Tray for Insert Sheet
Tri-Fold Print Side This item is displayed when user access is allowed in Administrator settings while the Finisher FS-526 is installed. For details, refer to page 7-43.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-9
6.3 Copier Settings
6
Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Specification
Specify whether to apply Half-Fold/Tri-Fold for all pages together or for
specific pages when handling a job containing multiple pages.
When Booklet is selected simultaneously with Half-Fold, all pages are halffolded together even if [One Sheet at a Time] is selected.
If the number of original pages exceeds the folding capacity of this machine, the "Fold" function setting is cancelled automatically, and the sheets
are printed without being folded.
This item is displayed if the Saddle Stitcher SD-508 is installed in the Finisher FS-526.
To change the folding capacity, contact your service representative.
Half-folding capacity setting: 1-3 (default:3)
Tri-folding capacity setting: 1-3 (default:1)
Half-Fold Specification Specify whether to apply Half-Fold together for all pages or for each page
when handling a job containing multiple pages.
When Booklet is selected simultaneously with Half-Fold, all pages are halffolded together even if [One Sheet at a Time] is selected.
If the number of original pages exceeds the folding capacity of this machine, the "Fold" function setting is cancelled automatically, and the sheets
are printed without being folded.
This item is displayed if the Saddle Stitcher SD-509 is installed in the Finisher FS-527.
To change the folding capacity, contact your service representative.
Half-folding capacity setting: 1-3 (default:3)
Print Jobs During Copy
Operation
Appears when user access is permitted under Administrator settings. For
details, refer to page 7-43.
Automatic Image Rotation
Finishing Program Configure whether to display the Finishing Program button in the basic settings screen. To display the button, register the contents of the finishing
program.
Register frequently used finishing functions so that you can set them at
once by using the button that appears in the basic settings screen.
This item is set if the finisher is installed.
Card Shot Settings Appears when user access is permitted under Administrator settings. For
details, refer to page 7-43.
Factory default
Auto Booklet ON when
Fold & Staple
Auto Select Booklet
Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet
Auto Display Zoom Ratio
Auto Sort/Group Selection Yes
Default Copy Settings Factory Default
When AMS Direction is Incorrect
Print
Separate Scan Output
Method
Page Print
Enlargement Rotation Allow
Auto Zoom (Platen) OFF
Auto Zoom (ADF) ON
Specify Default Tray when
APS Off
Tray Before APS ON
Select Tray for Insert Sheet Tray 2
Tri-Fold Print Side Inside
Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Specification
Multiple Sheets
Half-Fold Specification Multiple Sheets
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-10
6.3 Copier Settings
6
Print Jobs During Copy
Operation
Accept
Automatic Image Rotation When Auto Paper/Auto Zoom Is Set
Finishing Program ON
Card Shot Layout: Top/Bottom
Zoom: Full Size
Store Original Size: X: 3-1/2 inch (89.0 mm) Y: 21 inch (51.0 mm)
Factory defaultbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-11
6.4 Fax/Scan Settings
6
6.4 Fax/Scan Settings
This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide
[Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-12
6.5 Printer Settings
6
6.5 Printer Settings
This setting is for the printer operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-13
6.6 Change Password
6
6.6 Change Password
Change the password for the user who is currently logged in.
0 A public user cannot use this function.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Change Password].
2 Enter the previous password, and then press [OK].
3 Enter a new password.
4 Press [Password Confirmation], and then enter the new password again.
5 Press [OK].
The new password is registered.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-14
6.7 Change E-Mail Address
6
6.7 Change E-Mail Address
Change the E-mail addresses specified as registered user information.
0 When logged in as a registered user, you can change the E-mail address.
0 Appears when user access is permitted under Administrator settings. For details, refer to page 7-50.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Change E-Mail Address].
2 Press [E-mail Address].
3 Change the E-mail address.
4 Press [OK].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-15
6.8 Change Icon
6
6.8 Change Icon
Change the icon specified as registered user information.
0 When logged in as a registered user, you can change the E-mail address.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Change Icon].
2 Select the icon and press [OK].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-16
6.9 Register Authentication Information
6
6.9 Register Authentication Information
Register or delete the biometric authentication information or IC card authentication information about the
registered users.
You can register or delete authentication information when performing the following operations.
0 Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access] ö
[Restrict Access to Job Settings] ö [Biometric/IC Card Info. Registration] ö [Allow].
0 Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [User
Authentication Settings] ö [User Registration] ö [Function Permission] ö [Biometric/IC Card Info.
Registration] ö [Allow].
0 Log in as a registered user.
1 Select Utility/Counter ö [User Settings] ö [Register Authentication Settings].
2 Press [Edit].
To delete authentication information, press [Delete].
For biometric authentication
For IC card authenticationbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-17
6.9 Register Authentication Information
6
3 Register authentication information.
For biometric authentication, place your finger on the Authentication Unit to scan the finger vein pattern.
Scan the finger vein pattern three times; reset the same finger each time and then press [Scan] for each
scanning.
After scanning the finger vein patterns, place the same finger on the authentication unit, and press
[Authentication Test].
If your finger vein patterns have been authenticated in the authentication test, press [Register]. If
authentication has failed, retry scanning the finger.
For IC card authentication, place your IC card on the Authentication Unit, and press [OK].
4 Press [Close].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-18
6.10 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting
6
6.10 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting
Configure settings to print data in a cellular phone or PDA through this machine. For details, refer to the
"User's Guide Box Operations" and "User's Guide Print Operations".7 Administrator Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-2
7
7 Administrator Settings
Administrator Settings are used only by the administrator to adjust the settings. Logging on to Administrator
Settings requires the administrator password.
Settings
System Settings Configure the basic functions of this machine.
Administrator/Machine
Settings
Register administrator information and E-mail address of this machine.
One-Touch/User Box Registration
Configure settings for the User Box, network scan, fax, and network fax
operations.
User Authentication/Account Track
Configure the authentication settings to restrict the functions of this machine.
Network Settings Configure settings for the software, cellular phone, or PDA that can be accessed with this machine.
Copier Settings Configure the settings for copy functions to be used in copy operations.
Printer Settings Configure settings for the print operations.
Fax Settings Configure settings for the fax and network fax operations.
System Connection Configure network settings.
Security Settings Configure settings to restrict the functions of this machine for processing
secret data.
License Settings Enable an optional i-Option function.
OpenAPI Authentication
Management Settings
Configure settings to prevent our deprecated OpenAPI connection application from being registered in this machine.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-3
7.1 System Settings
7
7.1 System Settings
Configure the basic functions of this machine.
7.1.1 Power Save Settings
Configure the settings for the power-saving mode.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Power Save
Settings].
Settings
Low Power Mode Settings Enter a time period before switching to the lower power mode when this
machine is not being operated.
Sleep Mode Settings Enter a time period before switching to the sleep mode when this machine
is not being operated.
Power Save Key Configure the type of the power save function to be started when you press
the [Power Save] key.
Low Power Provides power-saving effect higher than normal.
Sleep Although this machine conserves more energy in
the sleep mode than in the power save mode, the
machine must warm-up when the sleep mode is
canceled, therefore taking more preparation time
than the power save mode.
Enter Power Save Mode Configure settings for switching to the power save mode after printing documents from computers or receiving faxes.
Normal Enters the power save mode when the time specified in Low Power Mode Settings has elapsed.
Immediately Enters the power save mode in a short time.
Factory default
Low Power Mode Settings 15 minutes
Sleep Mode Settings 30 minutes
Power Save Key Lower
Enter Power Save Mode Immediatelybizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-4
7.1 System Settings
7
7.1.2 Output Settings
Configure the settings for the output functions.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Output Settings].
Settings
Print/Fax Output Settings This setting is for the print and fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]" and " User's
Guide [Print Operations]".
Output Tray Settings Configure an output tray given priority for outputting by function.
This item is displayed when the Finisher or Job Separator JS-504 is installed.
Shift Output Each Job Select whether to shift the output paper for each job.
This item is displayed when the Finisher or Job Separator JS-504 is installed.
Factory default
Print/Fax Output Settings Print: Page Print
Fax: Batch Print
Output Tray Settings • Copy: Tray 2
• Print: Tray 2
• Print Reports: Tray 1
• Fax: Tray 1
[Tray 3] is displayed when the Job Separator JS-603 is installed in the Finisher FS-527.
Shift Output Each Job Yesbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-5
7.1 System Settings
7
7.1.3 Date/Time Settings
Configure the current date and time and the time zone.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Date/Time Settings].
dReference
To cancel the current settings:
Press the [C] key.
Settings
Year Configure the current date and time.
Monthly
Daily
Hour
Minute
Time Zone Configure the UTC (Coordinate Universal Time) related time zone.
Factory default
Time Zone +00:00bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-6
7.1 System Settings
7
7.1.4 Daylight Saving Time
Configure daylight saving time settings.
0 This function is available when this machine is connected to the network where UTC (Coordinate
Universal Time) is specified. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Daylight Saving
Time].
Settings
Configure whether to use daylight saving time and the time difference from UTC (Coordinate Universal
Time).
Factory default
Daylight Saving Time Nobizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-7
7.1 System Settings
7
7.1.5 Weekly Timer Setting
Configure the weekly timer in order to allow you to turn on and off this machine at the specified date and time.
0 An exact date/time setting must be performed in advance.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Weekly Timer
Settings].
Settings
Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings
Configure whether to use the weekly timer function.
Time Settings Configure the time of each day of the week to turn on and off this machine.
Set All The setting for the selected day of the week is applied to the same day of the week in other weeks.
Delete Cancels the selected input value.
Date Settings Configure the days when timer operation is activated individually. To cancel the setting, press the same day again.
Daily Setting Configure the days of the week when the timer
operation is activated.
Select Time for Power
Save
Configure the time to turn this machine off and on if you want to turn it off
at a specific time, for example, during a lunch break.
Password for Non- Business Hours
Configure whether to require a user to enter the password if the user uses
this machine outside the specified time.
• To make the user to enter the password, you need to specify the password.
Factory default
Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings
OFF
Select Time for Power
Save
No
Password for Non-Business Hours
Nobizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-8
7.1 System Settings
7
7.1.6 Restrict User Access
Restrict the machine operation, or change or delete the copy programs by the user.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User
Access].
Settings
Copy Program Lock Settings
Configure the registered copy programs that are prevented from being
changed or deleted.
Delete Saved Copy Program
Delete the registered copy programs.
Restrict Access to Job Settings
Configure whether to allow users to configure the following settings.
Changing Job Priority Configure whether to allow users to change the
print priority of jobs.
Delete Other User
Jobs
Configure whether to allow other users to delete
jobs when the user authentication settings have
been specified.
Registering and
Changing Addresses
This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations.
For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".
Changing Zoom Ratio
Configure whether to allow users to change registered zoom ratios.
Changing the "From"
Address
This setting is for the network scan operations.
For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".
Change Registered
Overlay
Configure whether to allow users to change registered image overlays.
Biometric/IC Card Info. Registration
Configure whether to allow a registered user to
register or delete biometric authentication information or IC card authentication information of
the user.
Restrict Operation Restrict Broadcasting
This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations.
For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".
Factory default
Changing Job Priority Allow
Delete Other User Jobs Restrict
Registering and Changing
Addresses
Allow
Changing Zoom Ratio Allowbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-9
7.1 System Settings
7
7.1.7 Expert Adjustment
Make adjustments so that output quality is increased.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment].
Changing the "From" Address
Restrict
Change Registered Overlay
Allow
Biometric/IC card Information Registration
Restrict
Restrict Broadcasting OFF
Factory default
Settings
AE Level Adjustment Configure the initial value for AE (auto exposure). The higher the setting,
the more that the original background is emphasized.
Printer Adjustment Adjust the starting print position and defective print images caused by paper type features.
dReference
The starting print position is factory-adjusted. Normally, you
are not required to change the set values.
Leading Edge Adjustment p. 7-13
Centering p. 7-13
Leading Edge Adjustment (Duplex Side 2)
p. 7-13
Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) p. 7-13
Erase Leading Edge Adjust leading edge erase width.
For details on displaying this item,
contact your service representative.
Vertical Adjustment Adjust the feed direction zoom ratio of
paper types.
For details on displaying this item,
contact your service representative.
Media Adjustment p. 7-14bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-10
7.1 System Settings
7
Finisher Adjustment Adjust the staple, folding, and punch position of the finisher.
This button appears only when the finisher is installed.
dReference
Create a sample in advance, and then adjust them while
checking the sample.
Center Staple Position p. 7-14
Half-Fold Position p. 7-15
Tri-Fold Position Adjustment p. 7-15
(This item is displayed when the Finisher FS-526 and Saddle Stitcher SD-
508 are installed.)
Punch Vertical Position Adjustment
p. 7-16
(This item is displayed when the Finisher FS-526 and Punch Kit PK-516
are installed.)
Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment
p. 7-16
Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment
p. 7-17
Punch Edge Sensor Adjustment p. 7-17
(This item is displayed when the Finisher FS-526 and Punch Kit PK-516
are installed.)
Vertical Punch (Z-Fold) Position
Adjustment
p. 7-17
(This item is displayed when Z Folding
Unit is installed.)
Horizontal Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment
p. 7-18
(This item is displayed when Z Folding
Unit is installed.)
1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment p. 7-18
(This item is displayed when Z Folding
Unit is installed.)
2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment p. 7-19
(This item is displayed when Z Folding
Unit is installed.)
Punch Unit Size Detect Sensor p. 7-19
(This item is displayed when Z Folding
Unit is installed.)
Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment
Adjust the paper size to be used in the
Post Inserter. You can specify different paper sizes for the upper and lower trays. This button appears when the
Post Inserter PI-505 is installed.
Density Adjustment Correct the toner amount to be used by color depending on the paper
type.
• To correct the toner amount to be used in the black print mode, press
[Black Image Density].
Image Stabilization Image Stabilization Only Press the [Start] key to stabilize images.
Pressing the [Image Stabilization Only]
button executes normal image stabilization.
If a good result was not achieved after
the [Image Stabilization Only] button
was pressed, execute [Initialize + Image Stabilization].
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-11
7.1 System Settings
7
Image Stabilization Setting Specify the type and opportunity of
image stabilization. If [Standard] is selected, normal stabilization is performed during warm-up processing
when a change in the absolute humidity has been detected during warm-up
processing.
If [Color Priority] is selected, color stabilization is performed when the power has been turned on.
Selecting [Black & White Priority] executes monochrome stabilization during warm-up when absolute humidity
change is detected during the warmup, and then stabilizes color before
performing color print.
Paper Separation Adjustment
Adjust the paper position where the two sides are separated for 2-sided
print.
Color Registration Adjust Correct color shifts if they are detected in the print result.
For details, refer to page 7-20.
Gradation Adjustment Adjust irregular gradation levels of print images.
For details, refer to page 7-21.
Image Stabilization Only Stabilize the image by pressing the
[Start] key before performing gradation adjustment.
Print Adjust the gradation when the color
gradation has been changed in a print
image. This function performs adjustment, emphasizing the gradation expression of an image and the
reproducibility of texts or lines.
Copy Adjust the gradation when the color
gradation has been changed in a print
image. This function performs adjustment to save as many images as possible in memory.
Scanner Area Adjust the scan range of the scanner.
For details on displaying this item, contact your service representative.
ADF Adjustment Make adjustments for scanning images in the ADF.
For details on displaying this item, contact your service representative.
Line Detection Prior Detection Setting
(bizhub C652/C552/C452)
Configure whether to issue an alert
when the slit glass is dirty.
• Select an alert display format and
contamination detection level.
Prior Detection Setting (front)
(bizhub C652DS/C552DS)
Configure whether to issue an alert
when the slit glass (front) is dirty.
• Select an alert display format and
contamination detection level.
Prior Detection Setting (back)
(bizhub C652DS/C552DS)
Configure whether to issue an alert
when the slit glass (back) is dirty.
• Select an alert display format, contamination detection level and display timing.
Feed Cleaning Settings Configure whether to remove a dirt on
the slit glass each time one sheet of
paper passes through the ADF when
scanning an original using the ADF.
Trail Edge Adjust Correct a shift if it is detected at the trailing edge of the print result.
Place, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 v, A3 w, or A4 v on the bypass tray, and
then press the [Start] key to print a test pattern.
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-12
7.1 System Settings
7
User Paper Settings Configure special paper settings for User Paper 1 through 6. Settings to
configure include Basic Weight and Media Adjustment.
For details on displaying this item, contact your service representative.
Erase Adjustment Non-Image Area Erase Operation Settings
Configure Non-Image Area operation
settings.
[Auto]:
Automatically detects the background
density of the original, and selects either "Bevel" or "Rectangular" accordingly.
[Specify]:
Allows you to manually specify an
erase method and original density. As
an erase method, select "Bevel" or
"Rectangular". Specify an original
density from five levels.
Factory default
AE Level Adjustment Standard (2)
Leading Edge Adjustment 0.0 mm
Centering 0.0 mm
Leading Edge Adjustment
(Duplex Side 2)
0.0 mm
Centering (Duplex 2nd
Side)
0.0 mm
Media Adjustment Auto
Center Staple Position 0.0 mm
Half-Fold Position 0.0 mm
Tri-Fold Position Adjustment
0.0 mm
Punch Vertical Position Adjustment
0.0 mm
Punch Horizontal Position
Adjustment
0.0 mm
Punch Regist Loop Size
Adjustment
For Finisher FS-526
Finisher: 0.0 mm
Finisher (for Z folding): 0.0 mm
Post inserter feeder (Upper tray): 0.0 mm
Post inserter feeder (Lower tray): 0.0 mm
For Finisher FS-527: 0
Vertical Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment
0.0 mm
Horizontal Punch (Z-Fold)
Position Adjustment
0.0 mm
1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment
0.0 mm
2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment
0.0 mm
Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment
Auto Detect
Density Adjustment 0
Image Stabilization Only Image Stabilization Only
Image Stabilization Setting Standard
Paper Separation Adjustment
0.0 mm
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-13
7.1 System Settings
7
Leading Edge Adjustment
Adjust the starting print position at the leading edge of each type of paper (with respect to the paper feed
direction).
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment]
ö [Printer Adjustment] ö [Leading Edge Adjustment].
% To adjust the starting print position at the leading edge of the second side for 2-sided printing (with
respect to the paper feed direction), press [Leading Edge Adjustment (Duplex Side 2)].
2 Select a paper type to be adjusted.
3 Load the paper into the bypass tray.
4 Press the [Start] key.
A test pattern is printed.
5 Check that the distance from the starting print position of the test
pattern to the edge of the paper (a) is 4.2 mm.
% Press [+] or [-] to adjust the width.
Press the [Start] key to print a test pattern.
6 Press [OK].
Centering
Adjust the starting print position at the left edge of each paper tray (with respect to the paper feed direction).
0 Only 8-1/2 e 11 v (A4 v) paper can be used to adjust the bypass tray.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment]
ö [Printer Adjustment] ö [Centering].
% To adjust the starting print position at the left edge of the second side for 2-sided printing (with
respect to the paper feed direction), press [Centering (Duplex 2nd Side)].
2 Select a paper tray to be adjusted.
3 Press the [Start] kay.
A test pattern is printed.
Color Registration Adjust 0 dot
Prior Detection Setting Yes
Warning Display: TYPE1
Detection Level: Std.
Prior Detection Setting
(front)
Yes
Warning Display: TYPE1
Detection Level: Std.
Prior Detection Setting
(back)
Feed Cleaning Settings Remove
Non-Image Area Erase Operation Settings
Erase Operation: Specify
Erase Method: Rectangular
Original Density: 3
Factory default
a
a:4.2mmbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-14
7.1 System Settings
7
4 Check that the distance from the starting print position of the test
pattern to the left edge of the paper (b) is 3.0 mm (+/-0.5 mm).
% Press [+] or [-] to adjust the width.
Press the [Start] key to print a test pattern.
5 Press [OK].
Media Adjustment
Adjust defective print images caused by paper type features.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment]
ö [Printer Adjustment] ö [Media Adjustment].
2 Select a paper type to be adjusted.
% If defective images exist on the back side of 2-sided copy paper, select [2nd Side].
3 Press [+] or [-] to specify an adjusted value.
% If missing parts or white spots exist in print images, press [-]. If the surface of the print image is
rough, press [+].
4 Press [OK] ö [Close].
5 Copy, and then check the print image.
Center Staple Position
Adjust the stapling position for each paper size when printing with the center staple function.
0 Adjust the half-fold position before adjusting the center stapling position.
0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the center staple function. Adjust the center
staple position while checking the created sample.
0 It can be adjusted only when the saddle sticher is installed.
0 When stapling in parallel with the left edge of paper, contact your service representative.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment]
ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Center Staple Position].
2 Select the size of paper of which the center staple position is adjusted.
3 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the staple position while checking the sample.
4 Press [OK].
5 Create a sample, and check the print result.
b
b:3.0mm±0.5mmbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-15
7.1 System Settings
7
dReference
To adjust the half-fold position:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö
[Finisher Adjustment] ö [Half-Fold Position].
Half-Fold Position
Adjust the center staple & fold and half-fold positions.
0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the half-fold function. Adjust the half-fold
position while checking the created sample.
0 It can be adjusted only when the saddle sticher is installed.
0 When adjusting the half-fold position in parallel with the left edge of paper, contact your service
representative.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment]
ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Half-Fold Position].
2 Select the size of paper of which half-fold position is adjusted.
3 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the punched hole position while checking the sample.
4 Press [OK].
5 Create a sample, and check the print result.
Tri-Fold Position Adjustment
Adjust the folding position for each paper size when printing with the tri-fold function. The folding width
depends on the paper size, which cannot be changed.
0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the tri-fold function. Adjust the tri-fold position
while checking the created sample.
0 It can be adjusted when the Finisher FS-526 and Saddle Stitcher SD-508 are installed.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment]
ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Tri-Fold Position Adjustment].
2 Select the size of paper of which tri-fold position is adjusted.
3 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the tri-fold position while checking the sample.
4 Press [OK].
5 Create a sample, and check the print result.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-16
7.1 System Settings
7
Punch Vertical Position Adjustment
Adjust the vertical position of the punched holes for each paper size.
0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the punch settings. Adjust the punched hole
position while checking the created sample.
0 This adjustment is available if the Finisher FS-526 and Punch Kit PK-516 are installed.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment]
ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Punch Vertical Position Adjustment].
2 Select the paper size to adjust the vertical punch position.
3 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the punched hole position while checking the sample.
4 Press [OK].
5 Create a sample, and check the print result.
Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment
Adjust the horizontal position of the punched holes. Adjust the horizontal position of the punched holes as
appropriate for each installed option or paper type.
0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the punch settings. Adjust the punched hole
position while checking the created sample.
0 The horizontal position of the punched holes can be adjusted as appropriate for each installed option
if the finisher FS-526, punch kit PK-516, and post inserter are installed.
0 This adjustment is available for each paper type if the Finisher FS-527 and Punch Kit PK-517 are
installed.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment]
ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment].
% Select an option to adjust the horizontal position of the punched holes if the post inserter is installed.
% First, select the paper type if the finisher FS-527 and punch kit PK-517 are installed.
2 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the punched hole position while checking the sample.
3 Press [OK].
4 Create a sample, and check the print result.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-17
7.1 System Settings
7
Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment
Correct the orientation of the paper and adjust the punched hole position to be parallel with the left edge of
the paper. The punched hole array is corrected by adjusting the resistance applied to the paper for each
paper type.
0 This adjustment is available if the punch kit is installed.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment]
ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment].
First select the option to adjust the inclination of punch holes when the Finisher FS-526 and Post
Inserter PI-505 or Z Folding Unit ZU-606 are installed.
2 Select a paper type for which the punch hole angle is adjusted.
3 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the punched hole position.
4 Press [OK].
5 Create a sample, and check the print result.
Punch Edge Sensor Adjustment
If the punch position is displaced depending on the paper tray, the punch kit is automatically adjusted.
0 This adjustment is available if the Finisher FS-526 and the Punch Kit PK-516 are installed.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment]
ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Punch Edge Sensor Adjustment].
2 Press the [Start] key.
The punch edge sensor is automatically adjusted.
The adjusted result appears.
Vertical Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment
Adjust the vertical position of the punched holes for each paper size.
0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the punch settings. Adjust the center staple
position while checking the created sample.
0 This adjustment is available if the Z Folding Unit is installed.
1 Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö
[Finisher Adjustment] ö [Vertical Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment].
2 Select the size of paper of which the vertical punched hole position is adjusted.
3 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the punched hole position while checking the sample.
4 Press [OK].
5 Create a sample, and check the print result.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-18
7.1 System Settings
7
Horizontal Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment
Adjust the horizontal position of the punched holes for each paper size.
0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the punch settings. Adjust the center staple
position while checking the created sample.
0 This adjustment is available if the Z Folding Unit is installed.
1 Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö
[Finisher Adjustment] ö [Horizontal Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment].
2 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the punched hole position while checking the sample.
3 Press [OK].
4 Create a sample, and check the print result.
1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment
Adjust the first paper folding position for each paper size when using the Z-fold function.
0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the Z-fold function. Adjust the center staple
position while checking the created sample.
0 This adjustment is available if the Z Folding Unit is installed.
1 Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö
[Finisher Adjustment] ö [1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment].
2 While checking the sample, press [+] or [-] to adjust the first folding position.
3 Press [OK].
4 Create a sample, and check the print result.
1st Z-Fold Positionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-19
7.1 System Settings
7
2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment
Adjust the second paper folding position for each paper size when using the Z-fold function.
0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the Z-fold function. Adjust the center staple
position while checking the created sample.
0 This adjustment is available if the Z Folding Unit is installed.
1 Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö
[Finisher Adjustment] ö [2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment].
2 While checking the sample, press [+] or [-] to adjust the second folding position.
% The distance between the left end of paper and the second Z-fold position must be 2 mm or more.
3 Press [OK].
4 Create a sample, and check the print result.
Punch Unit Size Detect Sensor
If the punch position is displaced depending on the paper tray, the punch unit is automatically adjusted.
0 This adjustment is available if the Z Folding Unit or Punch Kit PK-516 is installed.
1 Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö
[Finisher Adjustment] ö [Punch Unit Size Detect Sensor].
2 Press [Start].
% The punch unit edge sensor is automatically adjusted.
% The adjusted result appears.
2nd Z-Fold Position
2 mm or morebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-20
7.1 System Settings
7
Color Registration Adjust
If color shifts are detected in the print result, adjust the each color print position for each paper type.
0 The procedure for adjusting the color registration is the same for yellow, magenta and cyan.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment]
ö [Color Registration Adjust].
2 Select a color to be corrected.
3 Select a paper type for which color registration is adjusted.
4 Load the paper into the bypass tray.
% The loadable paper size is 11 e 17w, 8-1/2 e 11v, A3 w, or A4 v.
5 Press the [Start] key.
A test pattern is printed.
6 Check that the black line aligns with the color line to be adjusted
at the X and Y positions of the test pattern.
% Press [+] or [-] to adjust the color line to be corrected while checking the sample.
The color registration is adjusted.
7 Press the [Start] key to print a test pattern, and then check the print result.
8 Press [OK].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-21
7.1 System Settings
7
Gradation Adjustment
Adjust irregular gradation levels of print images.
0 Adjust each correction item three times.
1 Turn off the main power switch of this machine.
2 Wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it on again.
3 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment]
ö [Gradation Adjustment].
4 Press the [Start] key.
The image stabilization operation starts.
The correction items on the right of the touch panel become enabled.
5 Select an item to be corrected.
6 Select paper used to output a test pattern.
% As a paper size, select 11 e 17w, 8-1/2 e 11v, A3w or A4 v. By default, 11 e 17 w (A3 w) is
selected.
% Paper in the bypass tray cannot be selected.
7 Press the [Start] key.
A test pattern is printed.
% Selecting 11 e 17w or A3w outputs one sheets, and selecting 8-1/2 e 11v or A4v outputs two
sheets.
8 Place the printed test pattern on the original glass in orientation displayed in the touch panel.
% For the test patterns of 8-1/2 e 11v or A4v, place the output two sheets side by side.
9 Place 10 or more sheets of blank paper on top of the test pattern to prevent it from becoming
transparent.
10 Close the ADF.
11 Press the [Start] key.
The test pattern is scanned.
The gradation level is automatically adjusted.
12 Repeat steps 5 through 11 two more times.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-22
7.1 System Settings
7
7.1.8 List/Counter
Configure the job settings list print settings and paper count settings for this machine.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [List/Counter].
Settings
Management List Job Settings List Configure paper tray settings for printing the job
settings list and specify a print side.
Paper Size/Type Counter Register a combination of paper size and paper type for a counter. Every
time the counter is changed, the count is reset to 0.
Counter Clear Resets the count to 0.
Paper Size Select the paper size of the counter.
Paper Type Select the paper type of the counter.
Factory default
Job Settings List • 1-Sided
• Tray 1bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-23
7.1 System Settings
7
7.1.9 Reset Settings
Configure auto reset settings.
0 All settings performed in the following tabs during operation using the copy function are automatically
reset to the initial settings after the specified time has elapsed.
Basic tab, Original Setting tab, Quality/Density tab, Application tab
0 Even if [OFF] is selected for System Auto Reset Time, the system auto reset function operates when
this machine is not used for one minute during user authentication/account track operations.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Reset Settings].
Settings
System Auto Reset Priority Mode Configure a mode to be displayed in the system
auto reset mode.
System Auto Reset
Time
Configure whether to perform system auto reset.
Specify a time until the initial screen appears if
this machine is not operated. The specified time
is not canceled.
dReference
If user authentication or enhanced security mode is enabled, the administrator settings mode or user
authentication mode is logged off according to the setting for System Auto
Reset Time.
In the enlarge display mode, the system auto reset mode is disabled.
Auto Reset Configure whether to perform auto reset in the selected mode.
Specify a time until the basic settings screen appears and the settings are
reset to the initial values if this machine is not operated.
Job Reset When Account is
changed
Configure whether to reset the settings when you
log off if the user authentication or account track
settings have been configured.
When original is set
on ADF
Configure whether to reset the settings when an
original is loaded in the ADF.
Next Job Configure whether to reset the following settings
when the next job is selected.
• Staple Setting
• Original Set/Bind Direction
• Reset Data After Job
The destination of data is always reset.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-24
7.1 System Settings
7
dReference
To configure user authentication/account track:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [General
Settings].
7.1.10 User Box Settings
This setting is for the User Box functions. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".
7.1.11 Standard Size Setting
Configure settings relating to the capability for detecting original size and the foolscap paper sizes.
For details on displaying this item, contact your service representative.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Standard Size
Setting].
Factory default
Priority Mode Copy
System Auto Reset Time 1 minute
Auto Reset • Copy: 1 Minute
• Scan/Fax: 1 Minute
• User Box: 1 Minute
When Account is changed Reset
When original is set on ADF Do Not Reset
Next Job • Staple Setting: OFF
• Original Set/Bind Direction: OFF
• Reset Data After Job: Reset All
Settings
Original Glass Original Size
Detect
Configure the capability for detecting original sizes.
8-1/2 e 14/Foolscap Size
Detection
European model (cm) only
Specify whether to detect a size of 8-1/2 e 14 or a foolscap size.
• This item may not be displayed on product sales areas.
Foolscap Size Setting Select the size that you want to use when the paper size is close to 13 inches. bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-25
7.1 System Settings
7
7.1.12 Stamp Settings
Configure header and footer settings to be printed.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Stamp Settings].
Factory default
Original Glass Original Size
Detect
Table 1
8-1/2 e 14 Foolscap Size
Detection
8-1/2 e 14
Foolscap Size Setting 8 e 13 w
Settings
Header/Footer Settings Register or change a header and footer.
To use the header/footer function in Application Setting, a header and
footer must be registered in advance.
New Enter a registration name, and then configure detailed header and footer settings.
Configure whether to print a header and footer,
and then configure print contents.
• Text: Enter text.
• Date/Time: Select a format to display the date
and time.
• Other: Specify the distribution control
number. Select whether to include the Job
Number, Serial Number, and Account/User
Name.
Configure pages and text details.
• Pages: Select whether to print the header and
footer on all pages or only on the first page.
• Text Details: Select the color, size, and type of
the text for the header and footer to be printed.
Delete Deletes the selected header or footer.
Check/Edit Change the selected header or footer.
Fax TX Settings This setting is for the fax and network fax operations.
For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".
Factory default
FAX TX Settings Cancelbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-26
7.1 System Settings
7
7.1.13 Blank Page Print Settings
Configure whether to print stamps or overlay on blank pages.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Blank Page Print
Settings].
7.1.14 Skip Job Operation Settings
Configure whether to start processing for the next job when the current job stops due to running out of paper
in the paper tray. Selecting "Yes" provides no print queue time due to job stopping.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Skip Job Operation
Settings].
Settings
Configure whether to print stamp/composition on blank pages.
Factory default
Blank Page Print Settings Do Not Print
Settings
Fax Configure whether to skip a job in the fax mode.
Other than Fax Configure whether to skip a job in a mode other than the fax mode.
Factory default
Skip Job Operation Settings
Fax: Yes
Other than Fax: Yesbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-27
7.1 System Settings
7
7.1.15 Default Bypass Paper Type Setting
Configure the initial settings for the paper type to be used for the bypass tray. The initial setting for the paper
type is applied after the job finishes or the tray runs out of paper.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Default Bypass
Paper Type Setting].
7.1.16 Advanced Preview Setting
Configure settings to fax or scan a document. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".
Settings
Configure whether to specify the initial setting for paper type for the bypass tray. When you specified this,
select a paper type.
Factory default
Default Bypass Paper Type
Setting
Yes
Paper Type: Plain Paperbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-28
7.1 System Settings
7
7.1.17 Page Number Print Position
Specify a page number print position when printing page numbers after configuring 2-sided print or booklet
settings. Select whether to print the page numbers on a same position on all pages or on positions symmetric
with respect to the stapling position.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Page Number Print
Position].
Settings
Left & Right Bind: All the
Same
Top & Bottom Bind: All the
Same
Select a desired print position.
Left & Right Bind: Symmetrical
Top & Bottom Bind: All the
Same
Left & Right Bind: Symmetrical
Top & Bottom Bind: Symmetrical
Factory default
Page Number Print Position
Left & Right Bind: All the Same
Top & Bottom Bind: All the Samebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-29
7.2 Administrator/Machine Settings
7
7.2 Administrator/Machine Settings
Register administrator information and E-mail address of this machine.
0 The device name entered under the Input Machine Address may not be supported by your operating
system.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Administrator/Machine Setting].
Settings
Administrator Registration Register administrator information displayed on the Service/Admin. Information screen of the Guidance screen and the From address for sending
E-mail from this machine.
Input Machine Address Register the device name and E-mail address of this machine. The device
name is used as a part of the name of the file created on this machine. The
E-mail address can be used for Internet fax.
Factory default
Device Name The default abbreviation is input for the product name. If necessary, it can
be changed freely.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-30
7.3 One-Touch/User Box Registration
7
7.3 One-Touch/User Box Registration
This setting is for the User Box, network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's
Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]" and "User's Guide [Box Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-31
7.4 User Authentication/Account Track
7
7.4 User Authentication/Account Track
Configure the authentication settings to control the use of this machine.
Type and functions of authentication
- User Authentication
Appropriate for controlling users. To allow unregistered users to use this machine, public user settings
are required.
– Restricts accessible functions.
– Counts the number of outputting and scanning by user.
– Limits on using color or black printing and on the number of copies that can be set by user.
– Operates a Personal User Box for each user and group box.
– Controls the access allowed level of the destination.
– Prohibits jobs of other users from being deleted.
- Account Track
Appropriate for controlling groups or multiple users.
– Counts the number of outputting and scanning by account.
– Limits on using color or black printing and on the number of copies that can be set by account.
– Operates the group box.
Reference
- Either user authentication or account track settings can be configured, or user authentication can be
synchronized with account track. Settings can be configured for the both and used without being
synchronized.
- A total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered.
- To register more than 1,000, use PageScope Authentication Manager. You can register up to 30,000
users and accounts.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-32
7.4 User Authentication/Account Track
7
7.4.1 General Settings
Configure the settings for enabling the authentication functions.
0 Before registering a user, select an authentication method. If all management data is cleared after the
authentication method was selected, the histories of the registered users, print, send, receive, and save
jobs are deleted.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö
[General Settings].
Settings
User Authentication Configure whether to use user authentication.
OFF Disables user authentication.
ON (External Server) Restricts users who can access this machine using the external authentication server. This setting
is available when external authentication server
settings are configured.
ON (MFP) Restricts users who can access this machine using this machine.
Public User Access Allows public user accesses when the enhanced security mode is disabled.
Restrict Prohibits unregistered users from using this machine.
ON (With Login) A public user can use this machine after pressing
[Public user] in the Login screen to log in to this
machine.
ON (Without Login) A public user can use this machine without logging in to this machine in the Login screen.
Account Track ON/OFF Configure whether to use the account track function.
Account Track Input Method
Select an authentication method when configuring account track settings.
Account Name &
Password
Enter the account name and password to log in.
Password Only Enter only the password to log in.
• You cannot configure this when user authentication settings are configured.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-33
7.4 User Authentication/Account Track
7
dReference
To configure external server settings:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [External
Server Settings].
For details on enhanced security settings, contact your service representative.
Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track
Configure the authentication operation settings when both user authentication and account track settings are configured. Configure whether to automatically select the account assigned to the user during logging in.
Synchronize Allows the user to log in to one account assigned
to the user.
The user who succeeded in user authentication
can log in without account track authentication.
dReference
This function is appropriate for managing each user by account.
Do Not Synchronize Allows the user to log in to some accounts.
The user who succeeded in user authentication
performs account track authentication to log in.
When # of Jobs Reach
Maximum
Configure the action of this machine that is taken when the output count of
the job reaches the limit specified for the user or account.
Skip Job Stops the running job, and then automatically
starts the next job.
Stop Job Stops all jobs.
Number of User Counters
Assigned
Configure how many of a total of 1,000 users and account registrations
should be allowed for user registration at maximum. The remaining registration number is for accounts.
When user authentication and account track settings are configured, the
number of counters assigned for users can be specified.
Ticket Hold Time Setting Enter a time to hold the Kerberos authentication tickets. The external server authentication settings are configured, and applied when Active Directory is selected as the authentication server type.
Factory default
User Authentication OFF
Public User Access Restrict
Account Track OFF
Account Track Input Method
Account Name & Password
Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track
Synchronize
When # of Jobs Reach
Maximum
Skip Job
Number of User Counters
Assigned
500
Ticket Hold Time Setting 60 min.
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-34
7.4 User Authentication/Account Track
7
7.4.2 User Authentication Settings
Configure the user and user counter management settings.
0 When only user authentication settings are configured, User Authentication Setting are enabled.
0 If only user authentication settings are configured, up to 1,000 users can be registered. If user
authentication and account track settings are configured, up to 500 users can be registered as initial
settings.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö
[User Authentication Settings].
Settings
Administrative Settings User Name List Configure whether to display a key to display a list
of registered users in the Login screen.
This item is enabled when the enhanced security
settings are disabled.
Default Function Permission
Configure an initial value for function permission
to users who are authenticated on the external
server.
ID & Print Settings Configure whether to use the ID & print function.
Also configure whether to immediately print unauthenticated jobs or public user job or save it in
the ID & Print User Box.
ID & Print Operation
Settings
Configure whether to print all jobs using one authentication or print jobs one by one if multiple ID
& print jobs are accumulated.
Default Operation
Selection
In the Login screen for user authentication where
ID and print jobs are stored, specify the default
values for the operation to be carried out after authentication has been completed.
When using this machine while the ID & print
function is disabled, the user can select [Access]
to log in to this machine without specifying the
operation to be carried out after authentication.
User Registration Register users who can access this machine. Select a desired registration
number, and then press [Edit]. Settings for registered users can be
changed.
• Selecting a user and pressing [Delete] delete the selected user.
• If public user access is allowed, functions available to public users can
be restricted. To change the setting for public users, select the registration number "000".
User Name Enter a user name.
• Once a user name is registered, it cannot be
changed.
• A user name that has already been registered
cannot be used again.
Password Enter the password.
E-Mail Address Enter an E-mail address.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-35
7.4 User Authentication/Account Track
7
Account Name Specify the account track of the registered user
when account track settings are configured,
Before you select an account name, you must
registered it.
Output Permission Apply the following restrictions to the selected
user or all users.
• Print
Configure whether to allow the user to copy
and print in color and black, respectively.
If black copy or print is restricted, print in
black and white cannot be output.
• Send
Configure whether to allow the user to send
fax and E-mail in color.
dReference
Single color and 2 color output settings can be changed by the administrator. For details, refer to page 7-41.
Max. Allowance Set Configure the max. allowance for the selected
user or all users. When not specifying it, select
[No Limit].
• Total Allowance
Specify the number of copies that can be output by the user.
• Individual Allowance
Specify the number of black copies and color
copies that can be output by the user.
Auth.-info.registrieren
Press [Edit], and then register authentication information.
This setting is available when the optional authentication unit is installed.
Function Permission Restrict functions available to the selected user or
all users. Specify whether to allow the following
functions:
• Copy
• Scan
• Fax
• Print
• User Box
• Print Scan/Fax TX
• Save to External Memory
• External Memory Document Scan
• Manual Destination Input (If [Allow] is selected, specify either to allow Manual Destination
Input or manage the destination manually.)
• Limited Color Print (Public user only)
• Biometric/IC Card Regist. Info.
• Mobile/PDA
Pause Suspends the use of this machine for the selected
user. [Stop Job] is selected, the specified user
cannot log in to this machine.
It is convenient to set suspend for users who do
not use this machine temporarily or who have lost
an IC card, instead of deleting them.
• If [All Users] is selected, you can suspend the
use of this machine for all the registered users.
• If suspend is selected for a specific account,
it is also suspended for users who belong to
that account even if [Continue Job] is selected
for this setting.
Icon Select an icon.
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-36
7.4 User Authentication/Account Track
7
dReference
To specify the maximum number of registrations for the user:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [General
Settings] ö [Number of User Counters Assigned].
User Counter Reset All Counters Resets all counters for all users.
Counter Details Shows the use status for the selected user.
Press [Clear Counter] to reset the counter.
• The public user counter is specified for the
last page.
Factory default
User Name List OFF
Default Function Permission
Save to External Memory/External Memory Document Scan: Restrict
Other items: Allow
ID & Print Settings ID & Print: OFF (when the authentication unit is not installed)
ON (when the authentication unit is installed)
Public User: Print Immediately
ID & Print Operation Settings
Print All Jobs
Default Operation Selection
Begin Printing
Output Permission All Items: Allow
Max. Allowance Set Individual Allowance: Color No Limit/Black No Limit
Total Allowance: No Limit
Function Permission Copy: Allow
Scan: Allow
Fax: Allow
Print: Allow
User Box: Allow
Print Scan/Fax TX: Allow
External Memory Document Scan: Restrict
Save to External Memory: Restrict
Manual Destination Input: Allow/Allow All
Limited Color Print: Restrict
Biometric/IC Card Regist. Info.: Restrict
Mobile/PDA: Allow
Pause Continue Job
Icon
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-37
7.4 User Authentication/Account Track
7
7.4.3 Account Track Settings
Configure the account and account counter management settings.
0 When only account track settings are configured, Account Track Settings is enabled.
0 If only account track settings are configured, up to 1,000 accounts can be registered. If user
authentication and account track settings are configured, up to 500 accounts can be registered as initial
settings.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö
[Account Track Settings].
Settings
Account Track Registration • Select a desired registration number, press [Edit], and then register or
change the account.
• Select an account to be deleted, and the press [Delete].
Account name Specify the account name.
• An account name that has already been registered cannot be used again.
Password Enter the password.
Output Permission Apply the following restrictions to the selected
account or all accounts.
• Print
Specify whether to allow color or black copy
or print output to the user of the account.
If black copy or print is restricted, print in
black and white cannot be output.
• Send
Specify whether to allow the account members to send fax or E-mail in color.
dReference
Single color and 2 color output settings can be changed by the administrator. For details, refer to page 7-41.
Max. Allowance Set Configure the max. allowance for the selected account or all accounts. When not specifying it, select [No Limit].
• Total Allowance
Configure the number of copies that can be
output by a member of the account.
• Individual Allowance
Configure the number of black copies and
color copies that can be output by a member
of the account.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-38
7.4 User Authentication/Account Track
7
dReference
To specify the maximum number of registrations for the account:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [General
Settings] ö [Number of User Counters Assigned].
7.4.4 Print without Authentication
This setting is for the print operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]".
7.4.5 Print Counter List
Select the paper tray and print format to be used for printing the counter list.
0 This function is enabled when user authentication or account track settings are configured.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö
[Print Counter List].
Pause Suspends the use of this machine for the selected
account. If [Stop Job] is selected, the specified
user cannot log in to this machine.
It is convenient to set suspend for accounts that
do not use this machine temporarily, instead of
deleting them.
• If [All Accounts] is selected, you can suspend
the use of this machine for all registered accounts.
• If [Stop Job] is selected, it is also suspended
for users who are belong to the accounts.
Account Track Counter Reset All Counters Resets all counters for all accounts.
Counter Details Shows the use status for the selected account.
Press [Clear Counter] to reset the counter.
Factory default
Output Permission All Items: Allow
Max. Allowance Set Individual Allowance: Color No Limit/Black No Limit
Total Allowance: No Limit
Settings
Settings
Paper Tray Select the desired paper tray.
Simplex/Duplex Select Print (1-Sided) or Print (2-Sided).
Print Item Configure whether to print all data or printing data only.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-39
7.4 User Authentication/Account Track
7
7.4.6 External Server Settings
Configure the external server that performs user authentication.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö
[External Server Settings].
dReference
For details on configuring external server settings, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
7.4.7 Limiting Access to Destinations
This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide
[Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]", "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
Factory default
Print Counter List • Paper Tray: Tray 1
• Simplex/Duplex:1-Sided
• Print Item: All Data
Settings
Select a number for the desired external server. You can also change the settings for the registered servers.
New/Edit Server Name Enter the name of the external server.
Server Type Configure an external server type, and then configure the settings for required items.
Delete Delete the selected external server.
Set as Default Configure an external server specified as the initial value. Select a desired
server, and then press the [Set as Default] button.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-40
7.4 User Authentication/Account Track
7
7.4.8 Authentication Device Settings
Configure the authentication operations when the optional authentication unit is installed.
0 This setting is available when the optional authentication unit is installed.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö
[Authentication Device Settings].
Settings
General Settings Card Authentication Displayed when the Authentication Unit (IC card
type) AU-201 is installed.
• IC Card Type
Select the type of the IC card to be used in this
machine. The FeliCa card ([FeliCa], [SSFC],
[FCF], or [FCF (Campus)]) or Type A card
([Type A]) can be selected. If [FeliCa+Type A],
[SSFC+Type A], [FCF+Type A], or [FCF (Campus)+ Type A] is selected, both the FeliCa and
Type A cards can be used in this machine at
the same time. If [SSFC] or [SSFC+Type A] is
selected, specify [Company Code] or [Company Identification Code].
• Operation Settings
Specify how to log in to this machine. [IC Card
Authentication] allows the user to log in by
simply placing the IC card. [Card Authentication + Password] allows the user to log in by
placing the IC card and entering the password.
Bio Authentication Displayed when Authentication Unit (biometric
type) AU-101 or Authentication Unit (biometric
type) AU-102 is installed.
• Beep Sound
Specify whether to output a beep when reading the finger vein pattern.
• Operation Settings
Specify how to log in to this machine. [1-tomany authentication] allows the user to log in
by simply placing his or her finger on the authentication unit. [1-to-1 authentication] allows the user to log in by entering the user
name and placing his or her finger on the authentication unit.
Logoff Settings Configure whether to log out when scanning of
the original finishes.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-41
7.4 User Authentication/Account Track
7
7.4.9 User/Account Common Setting
Configure the settings for the logout confirmation screen and settings for single color and 2 color output
management if authentication settings have been configured.
0 This function is enabled if authentication function settings have been configured.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö
[User/Account Common Setting].
7.4.10 Scan to Home Settings
This setting is for the network scan operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]""User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
7.4.11 Scan to Authorized Folder Settings
This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide
[Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]", "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
Settings
Logout Confirmation
Screen Display Setting
Configure whether to display the logout confirmation screen when you
press the [Access] key to log out.
Single Color > 2 Color Output Management
Configure whether to manage the output of single color or 2 color as color
print or black print.
When managing it as black print, even a user who is restricted from performing color print can perform single color or 2 color output.
dReference
For details on output permission for users, refer to page 7-34 or
page 7-37.
Factory default
Logout Confirmation
Screen Display Setting
ON
Single Color > 2 Color Output Management
Colorbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-42
7.5 Network Settings
7
7.5 Network Settings
This setting is for the network operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-43
7.6 Copier Settings
7
7.6 Copier Settings
Configure the settings used by the copy functions.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Copier Settings].
Settings
Auto Zoom (Platen) Configure whether Auto Select is automatically selected when a paper tray
is selected manually while an original is placed on the original glass.
Auto Zoom (ADF) Configure whether Auto Select is automatically selected when a paper tray
is selected manually while an original is placed in the ADF.
Specify Default Tray when
APS Off
Configure which paper tray to be selected when the APS (Auto Paper) setting is canceled.
Tray Before APS ON Uses the paper tray specified before the APS was
selected.
Default Tray Uses Tray 1.
Select Tray for Insert Sheet Configure the default paper tray loaded with paper for the cover pages
(front cover), inserted sheets and the chapter title pages.
Print Jobs During Copy
Operation
Configure whether to accept print data or fax data while a copy operation
is being performed.
Accept Accepts print data or fax data to print.
Receive Only Prints print data or fax data after the copy operation is finished.
Tri-Fold Print Side Configure whether the printed side is on the inside or the outside when the
page is folded in three.
This function is enabled when the finisher FS-526 and Saddle Sticher SD-
508 are installed.
Automatic Image Rotation When the original orientation is different from paper orientation, the image
is rotated depending on the setting. Configure when the image is automatically rotated.
Copy Card Settings Register card copy setting.
If [Card Copy] is selected in [Application], the function can be invoked with
the registered setting.
Layout Specify where to place the front and back sides
of a card.
Zoom Specify to copy a card with the full size or enlarge
an image to fit paper.
Store Original Size Change and register the pre-specified original
size or [Original Name].
Factory default
Auto Zoom (Platen) OFF
Auto Zoom (ADF) ONbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-44
7.6 Copier Settings
7
Specify Default Tray when
APS Off
Tray Before APS ON
Select Tray for Insert Sheet Tray 2
Print Jobs During Copy
Operation
Accept
Tri-Fold Print Side Inside
Automatic Image Rotation When Auto Paper/Auto Zoom is Set
Card Shot Settings Layout: Top/Bottom
Zoom: Full Size
Factory defaultbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-45
7.7 Printer Settings
7
7.7 Printer Settings
This setting is for the print operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-46
7.8 Fax Settings
7
7.8 Fax Settings
This setting is for the fax and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-47
7.9 System Connection
7
7.9 System Connection
Configure settings for software, cellular phone, or PDA that can be accessed with this machine.
% [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Connection]
Settings
OpenAPI Settings Access Setting Specify whether to allow the user to access this
machine from other system that is using OpenAPI.
SSL/Port Settings SSL Setting To use SSL encryption,
select [SSL Only] or
[SSL/Non-SSL].
• If Enhanced Security Mode is enabled,
[SSL Only] is enabled.
Port No. Enter a port number.
Port No. (SSL) Enter the port number
to be used for SSL
communication.
Client Certificate Request
Specify whether to enable a client certificate
request. If you authenticate the client by requesting for its
certificate (verification
of client certificate), select [Enable].
Certificate Verification
Level Settings
To verify a certificate,
configure settings to
verify the certificate.
[Validity Period]:
Select whether to
check that the target
certificate is within the
validity period.
[Key Usage]:
Select whether to
check that the certificate key is being used
properly.[Chain]: Select whether to check
that the certificate
chain (certification
path) is correct.
[Expiration Date Confirmation]:
Select whether to
check the target certificate for validation.
[CN]:
Select whether to
check that the CN of
the certificate matches
the server address.
Authentication Specify whether to authenticate an access from
other system that is using OpenAPI.
• To authenticate, enter the login name and
password in [Login Name] and [Password]
• When user authentication is performed or when
acquiring the device information with the PageScope Authentication Manager, set the Authentication setting of the OpenAPI Setting
screen of the machine to [OFF].
Automatic Prefix/Suffix
Setting
Select whether to automatically add prefix and suffix to a destination number.
If [Automatic Prefix/Suffix Setting] is set to [ON], the other settings will be restricted. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-48
7.9 System Connection
7
Printer Information Specify [Printer Name], [Printer Location], [Printer Information], and [Printer
URI].
The [Printer Information] setting is linked to [Printer Information] in [HTTP Server Settings].
Cellular Phone/PDA
Setting
Specify whether to allow the user to print data in a cellular phone or PDA or
save such data in a User Box.
Factory default
Access Setting Possible to combine
SSL Setting Non-SSL Only
Client Certificates Disable
Validity Period Confirm
Key Usage Do Not Confirm
Chain Do Not Confirm
Expiration Date Confirmation
Do Not Confirm
CN Do Not Confirm
Authenticate OFF
Automatic Prefix/Suffix
Setting
OFF
Cellular Phone/PDA Setting
Restrict
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-49
7.10 Security Settings
7
7.10 Security Settings
Configure the settings for the restricting the functions of this machine for processing secret data.
7.10.1 Administrator Password
Change the administrator password.
0 The administrator password can be entered using 0 through 8 digits.
0 If password rules are specified, an 8-digit password must be entered.
0 If you enter an incorrect administrator password a configured number of times, you are prohibited from
using this machine. In this case, contact your service representative.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Administrator
Password].
2 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK].
3 Enter a new administrator password.
4 Press [Password Confirmation], enter the administrator password again, and then press [OK].
5 Press [OK].
The password is changed.
dReference
To configure password rule settings:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Security Details] ö
[Password Rules].
7.10.2 User Box Administrator Setting
Configure settings for the User Box operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".
Factory default
Administrator Password 12345678bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-50
7.10 Security Settings
7
7.10.3 Administrator Security Levels
Configure settings so that the user can change some of the settings accessible only to the administrator.
Settings allowed to the user appear in User Settings.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Administrator
Security Levels].
Settings
Level 1 Allows the user to change the following settings.
• Power Save Settings
• Auto Zoom (Platen)
• Auto Zoom (ADF)
• Specify Default Tray when APS Off
• Select Tray for Insert Sheet
• Automatic Image Rotation
• Card Shot Settings
Level 2 Allows the user to change the following settings.
• All settings allowed in Level 1
• Output Settings
• AE Level Adjustment
• Blank Page Print Settings
• Change E-Mail Address
• Print Jobs During Copy Operation
Prohibit Does not allow the user to change the settings allowed in Level 1 and Level
2.
Factory default
Administrator Security Levels
Prohibitbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-51
7.10 Security Settings
7
7.10.4 Security Details
Configure security detail settings to restrict the functions of this machine. You can restrict the functions to
enhance security.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Security Details].
Settings
Password Rules Configure whether to enable the password rules.
When enabled, the restrictions are applied to the following passwords. The
set passwords must be changed to ones that meet the conditions.
• Administrator password
• User password
• Account password
• User Box password
• Security document password
• Specify a password in 8 or more digits.
• Uppercase and lowercase letters are differentiated.
• Only half-width symbols can be used. For some of the passwords,
specification of """, "+", and "space" is restricted.
• A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot
be specified.
• The same password as one before being changed cannot be registered.
Prohibited Functions When
Authentication Error
Configure restrictions on operation when you enter one of the following
passwords incorrectly.
• User password
• Account password
• User Box password
• Security document password
• Administrator password
Mode 1 Disables operations for a specified time if authentication fails.
Mode 2 Disables operations of the control panel if authentication fails.
Specify the max. allowance for authentication operation frequency.
Release Releases the prohibited operations due to failure
in authentication, enabling the operations.
Release Time Settings
Configure the length of time until prohibited operations are automatically released.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-52
7.10 Security Settings
7
Confidential Document Access Method
Synchronizes with the settings for "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error", automatically changes it.
• Mode 1
Requires entering security document ID and password before selecting
a security document from a User Box.
• Mode 2
Performs authentication based on the password after you enter the security document ID and select a security document from a User Box.
Manual Destination Input This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For
details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".
Print Data Capture This setting is for the print operations. For details, refer to the "User's
Guide [Print Operations]".
Job Log Settings Configure job log settings to be obtained when power is turned off and on.
Specify the type of obtain log and whether to permit overwriting.
Pressing [Erase Job Log] erases the job log.
Restrict Fax TX This setting is for the fax and network fax operations. For details, refer to
the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".
Hide Personal Information
Hide Personal Information
(MIB)
Specify whether to display the file name, address, or User Box number as
MIB information in Job List.
Display Activity Log This setting is for the fax and network fax operations. For details, refer to
the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".
Initialize Initializes Job History, Network Settings, Copy Program, or Store Address.
Job History Thumbnail Display
Configure whether to perform thumbnail display when displaying the job
history.
Secure Print Only This setting is for the print operations. For details, refer to the "User's
Guide [Print Operations]".
Copy Guard Specify whether to use the Copy Guard function.
If [Copy Guard] is selected in [Application], you can embed copy inhibit information on paper. You can also detect copy inhibit information embedded on paper.
• Displayed when the optional Security Kit is installed.
Password Copy Specify whether to use the Password Copy function.
If [Password Copy] is selected in [Application], you can embed a password
on paper. You can also detect a password embedded on paper.
• Displayed when the optional Security Kit is installed.
Factory default
Password Rules Invalid
Prohibited Functions When
Authentication Error
• Mode 1
• Release Time Settings: 5 min.
Confidential Document Access Method
Mode 1
Manual Destination Input Allow All
Print Data Capture Allow
Job Log Settings No
Restrict Fax TX OFF
Hide Personal Information OFF
Hide Personal Information
(MIB)
ON
Display Activity Log ON
Job History Thumbnail Display
OFF
Secure Print Only No
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-53
7.10 Security Settings
7
Copy Guard No
Password Copy No
Factory defaultbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-54
7.10 Security Settings
7
7.10.5 Enhanced Security Mode
The enhanced security mode cannot be enabled when any of the current functional settings conflict with the
enhanced security mode.
When the enhanced security mode is enabled, the settings required for the mode or the settings that have
been forcibly switched when entering the mode cannot be changed.
Required settings
To enable the enhanced security mode, the following settings must have been configured.
Settings to forcibly changed
When the enhanced security is enabled, the following settings are forced.
- The changed settings will not revert when the enhanced security mode is turned off.
- After the password rules have been changed, any passwords that do not comply with the changed rules
will not be authenticated. For details on the password rules, refer to page 7-51.
- For details on the network settings to be forcibly changed, refer to the "User's Guide [Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".
Administrator Settings Required settings
User Authentication/Account Track / General Settings / User Authentication
Select either [ON (External Server)] or [ON (MFP)].
• When you enable account track, select [Account Name & Password] for the account track
input method.
Security Settings / Administrator Password Set a password complying with password rules.
Security Settings / HDD Settings / HDD Lock Password
Set an HDD lock password.
[Security] in PageScope Web Connection / PKI
Settings / SSL Setting
• Set [Mode using SSL/TLS] to [Administrator
mode] and [User mode].
• Set [Encryption Strength] to [AES-256] or
[3DES-168].
• Image controller setting
• Management function setting
• CE password
• CE authentication function
• HDD installation setting
All the settings above must be configured by your
service representative.
These items must be configured by your service
representative. For details, contact your service
representative.
Administrator Settings Settings to forcibly changed
System Settings / Restrict User Access / Restrict
Access to Job Settings / Registering and Changing
Addresses
Set to [Restrict].
User Authentication/Account Track / General Settings / Pubic User Access
Set to [Restrict].
User Authentication/Account Track / User Authentication Settings / Administrative Settings / User
Name List
Set to [OFF].
User Authentication/Account Track / Print without
Authentication
Set to [Restrict].
Network Settings / FTP Setting / [FTP Server Settings]
[FTP Server Settings] is not displayed.
Network Settings / SNMP Setting / SNMP v1/v2c
Settings
[Write Setting] is set to [Disable].
Network Settings / SNMP Setting / SNMP v3 Settings
In [Write User], [Security Level] cannot be set to
[OFF].
Network Settings / TCPSocket Settings [Use SSL/TLS] is set to [ON].
Network Settings / WebDAV Settings / WebDAV
Server Settings / SSL Settings
Set to [SSL Only].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-55
7.10 Security Settings
7
If [Enhanced Security settings] is enabled, various security functions are configured to allow you to ensure
the higher-level security of data management. For details, contact your service representative. To enable the
enhanced security mode, the following settings must first be configured. Different screens appear depending
on the current settings.
7.10.6 HDD Settings
This setting is for the hard disk operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".
System Connection / OpenAPI Setting Set to [SSL Only].
Security Settings / User Box Administrator Setting Set to [Restrict].
Security Settings / Security Details / Password
Rules
Set to [Enable].
Security Settings / Security Details / Prohibited
Functions When Authentication Error
Set to [Mode 2], and the number of tries is set to 3.
• The number of tries can be changed to 1, 2, or
3.
Security Settings / Security Details / Prohibited
Functions When Authentication Error / Release
Time Settings
The allowable setting range is limited to 5 or more
minutes. This value cannot be less than 5 minutes.
Security Settings / Security Details / Confidential
Document Access Method
Set to [Mode 2].
Security Settings/Security Details/Print Data Capture
Set to [Restrict].
Security Settings/Security Details/Hide Personal
Information (MIB)
Set to [ON].
Security Settings / Security Details / Initialize / Network Settings
[Network Settings] is not displayed.
Security Settings/Security Details/Job History
Thumbnail Display
Set to [OFF].
Security Settings / Image Log TX Setting Set to [OFF].
Review Secure Print User Box Only the list is displayed before the password authentication is performed.
[Network] in PageScope Web Connection / E-Mail
Setting / S/MIME
[Automatically Obtain Certificates] is set to [No].
[E-Mail Text Encryption Method] is set to [3DES].
[Maintenance] in PageScope Web Connection /
Reset / Network Setting Clear
[Network Setting Clear] is not displayed.
[Security Administrator] in PageScope Web Connection / Password Setting
[Administrator Password Setting] is not displayed.
CS Remote Care Restricts the device setting in the remote mode
based on CS Remote Care.
Administrator Settings Settings to forcibly changedbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-56
7.10 Security Settings
7
7.10.7 Function Management Settings
Configure the settings for the network functions that are difficult to count.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Function
Management Settings] .
Settings
Network Function Usage
Settings
ON Configure the settings for the network management that are difficult to count when managing
operations.
OFF The following functions cannot be used if "Network Function Usage Settings" is set to "OFF".
• PC-FAX transmission
• Using the HDD TWAIN driver to view and retrieve documents in User Boxes
• Using PageScope Box Operator to view and
retrieve documents in User Boxes
• Using PageScope Scan Direct to retrieve documents in User Boxes
• Box operations using PageScope Web Connection (The User Box tab does not appear.)
Factory default
Network Function Usage
Settings
ONbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-57
7.10 Security Settings
7
7.10.8 Stamp Settings
Manage the stamp.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Stamp Settings].
dReference
To configure copy protect and stamp repeat settings:
Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition].
7.10.9 Driver Password Encryption Setting
This setting is for the print operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]".
Settings
Stamp Settings Apply Stamps Configure whether to add a stamp when printing
or sending.
To add a stamp, configure stamp contents settings.
dReference
If a stamp is added, print settings cannot be configured in "Stamp/Composition" of "Application".
Delete Registered
Stamp
• Stamp
Deletes all registered stamps.
• Copy Protect/Stamp Repeat
Deletes all stamps registered in Copy Protect
and the stamp repeat function.
Factory default
Apply Stamps Printing: Do Not Apply
Sending: Do Not Applybizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-58
7.11 License Settings
7
7.11 License Settings
Enable the functions of an optional component i-Option LK-101, LK-102, LK-103 or LK-105. For details on
the enabling procedure, refer to the "Quick Guide [Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations]".
0 An optional component i-Option LK-101, LK-102, LK-103 or LK-105 must be purchased. For details,
contact your service representative.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [License Settings] .
Reference
- When the functions of an optional component i-Option LK-101, LK-102, LK-103 or LK-105 are enabled,
the enabled functions can be checked with [List of Enabled Functions].
Settings
Get Request Code Issue a request code for this machine to be registered in the license management server (LMS).
Install License Enter the function code and license code obtained from the license management server (LMS).bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-59
7.12 OpenAPI Authentication Management Settings
7
7.12 OpenAPI Authentication Management Settings
Configure settings to prevent our deprecated OpenAPI connection application from being registered in this
machine. For details, contact your service representative.8 Maintenancebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-2
8.1 Paper
8
8 Maintenance
8.1 Paper
8.1.1 Checking the paper
Replenishment message
If a tray has run out of paper during printing, load paper or change the paper tray. Load paper in the paper
tray that is highlighted in color.
Precautions regarding the use of paper
Do not use the following types of paper. Not observing these precautions may lead to reduced print quality,
a paper jam or a damage to the machine.
- OHP transparencies that have already been fed through the machine (even if they are still blank)
- Paper that has been printed on with a heat-transfer printer or an inkjet printer
- Folded, curled, wrinkled, or torn paper
- Paper that has been left unwrapped for a long period of time
- Damp paper, perforated paper, or paper with punched holes
- Extremely smooth or extremely rough paper, or paper with an uneven surface
- Paper that has been treated, such as carbon-backed, heat-sensitive or pressure-sensitive paper
- Paper that has been decorated with foil or embossing
- Paper of a non-standard shape (paper that is not rectangular)
- Paper that is bound with glue, staples or paper clips
- Paper with labels attached
- Paper with ribbons, hooks, buttons, etc., attached
Paper storage
Store paper in a cool, dark location with little humidity. If the paper becomes damp, a paper jam may occur.
Store the paper flat, not on its edge. Curled paper may cause a paper jam.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-3
8.1 Paper
8
8.1.2 Loading paper
This section describes how to load paper into each tray.
If printing stops due to the tray being empty, load paper into the tray. Printing restarts automatically.
For the types of paper to be used, refer to page 12-2.
Loading paper into trays 1 and 2
The same procedures can be used to load paper into trays 1 and 2.
The following procedure describes how to load paper into tray 1.
0 When "Auto Detect" is selected on the "Paper" tab, the size of loaded paper is automatically detected.
1 Pull out tray 1.
NOTICE
Be careful not to touch the film.
2 Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of paper being loaded.
% If the lateral guides are not positioned correctly for the loaded
paper, the paper size will not be correctly detected.
3 Load the paper into the tray so that the side of the paper to be
printed on (the side facing up when the package was unwrapped)
faces up.
% Do not load so many sheets of paper that the top of the stack
is higher than the mark.
% If paper is curled, flatten it before loading it.
% If special paper is loaded, the paper type must be specified.
% Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces
down.
4 Close tray 1.
dReference
To configure paper settings:
Press [Basic] ö [Paper].
Filmbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-4
8.1 Paper
8
Loading paper into trays 3 and 4
The same procedures can be used to load paper into trays 3 and 4.
The following procedure describes how to load paper into tray 3.
1 Pull out tray 3.
NOTICE
Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper take-up roller with
your hand.
2 Lift up the paper take-up roller, and then load the paper into the
tray.
% Load the paper into the tray so that the side of the paper to be
printed on (the side facing up when the package was
unwrapped) faces up.
% Do not load so many sheets of paper that the top of the stack
is higher than the mark.
% Do not load tray 3 with paper of a size other than that
previously specified.
% If paper is curled, flatten it before loading it.
% If special paper is loaded, the paper type must be specified.
% Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces down.
% To change the paper size for tray 3, contact your service representative.
3 Lower the paper take-up roller, and then close tray 3.
dReference
To configure paper settings:
Press [Basic] ö [Paper].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-5
8.1 Paper
8
Loading paper into the bypass tray
1 Open the bypass tray.
% To load large-sized paper, pull out the tray extension.
NOTICE
Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper take-up roller with
your hand.
2 With the side to be printed on facing down, insert the paper as far as possible into the feed slot.
% The image will be printed on the surface of the paper facing down when the paper is loaded into the
bypass tray.
% Do not load so many sheets of paper that the top of the stack is higher than the mark.
% If paper is curled, flatten it before loading it.
% Push the paper guides firmly up against the edges of the paper.
% Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces up.
% When loading postcards:
Load them in the w orientation, as shown in the illustration.
To use postcards other than 4 e 6-size (A6-size), check the
size of postcards to be used, and then select the size on the
Custom Size screen before using them.
% When using envelopes:
Expel air from the envelopes, and then load them while holding
the folds of the envelopes.
Load them with the flap side up, as shown in the illustration.
The flap side of envelopes cannot be printed on.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-6
8.1 Paper
8
% To load label sheets:
Load them in the w orientation, as shown in the illustration.
A label sheet consists of the printing surface, sticking layer,
and pasteboard. Peel off the pasteboard, then you can stick
the label to other objects.
3 Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of paper being loaded.
4 Select the paper type.
% To use label sheets, select [Thick 1].
% OHP transparencies can be printed only in black. Before selecting OHP transparencies, select
[Black] in the Color tab.
% If you select [4 e 6 w (A6 Card w)], the paper type is automatically set to [Thick 3].
dReference
To configure paper settings:
Press [Basic] ö [Paper].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-7
8.1 Paper
8
Loading paper into the LCT
The same procedures can be used to load paper into the Large capacity unit LU-301 and LU-204.
The following procedure describes how to load paper into Large capacity unit LU-301.
0 To change the paper size, contact your service representative.
1 Open the upper door.
NOTICE
Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper take-up roller with
your hand.
2 Lift up the paper take-up roller, and then load the paper into the
tray.
% Load the paper into the tray so that the side of the paper to be
printed on (the side facing up when the package was
unwrapped) faces down.
% Do not load so many sheets of paper that the top of the stack
is higher than the mark.
% Do not load the LCT with paper of a size other than that
previously specified.
% If paper is curled, flatten it before loading it.
% If special paper is loaded, the paper type must be specified.
% Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces
up.
dReference
To configure paper settings:
Press [Basic] ö [Paper].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-8
8.2 Consumables
8
8.2 Consumables
8.2.1 Checking comsumables
Replacement message
When it is time to replace the Toner Cartridge or Imaging Unit, an advanced warning message appears at the
top of the screen.
For the replacement procedure, refer to the guidance or the [Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box
Operations].
For details on using the guidance, refer to the [Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations].
When the message appears, make a preparation and replace the Toner Cartridge or Imaging Unit according
to the guidance contained in your maintenance agreement.
When it is almost time to replace the Toner Cartridge, an advanced warning message similar to the one
shown below appears.
When the message appears, prepare to replace the Toner Cartridge according to the guidance contained in
your maintenance agreement.
When it is time to replace the Toner Cartridge or Imaging Unit, an advanced warning message similar to the
one shown below appears. Replace them according to the guidance contained in your maintenance
agreement.
- Do not replace any color other than the one indicated in the message in the touch panel.
- For the Toner Cartridge, the machine stops operating after the message appears.
Toner Cartridgebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-9
8.2 Consumables
8
Imaging Unit
NOTICE
Do not replace the Imaging Unit until a "Please replace following unit(s)." message appears.
If you continue to use the drum unit while an advanced warning message is displayed, the following
replacement message appears. Replace the drum unit according to the guidance contained in your
maintenance agreement.
Toner Cartridge
Imaging Unit
If a Toner Cartridge other than for black or the Imaging Unit is empty, printing can continue using black. Press
[Continue], and then select the job to be printed.
Replacement by user Replacement by service representative
Replacement by user Replacement by service representativebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-10
8.2 Consumables
8
Checking consumables status
In the Check Consumable Life screen, you can check the status (usage level) of consumables.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
2 Press [Check Consumable Life].
% To print the list of usage levels, press [Print List], then [Start] or the [Start] key.
Viewing counters
In the Meter Count screen, you can check the total number of prints since counting started. In the Coverage
Rate screen, the consumed amount of toner can be viewed.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
2 Press [Meter Count] ö [Check Details].
% To print the counter list, press [Print List], select paper, and then press the [Start] key.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-11
8.2 Consumables
8
% To display the Coverage Rate screen, press [Coverage Rate].
Checking the total number of pages printed
Pressing Total Counter displays the total number of pages printed to
date.
Total Counterbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-12
8.3 Cleaning procedure
8
8.3 Cleaning procedure
Slit glass (bizhub C652/C552/C452)
NOTICE
Do not touch the slit glass.
1 Open the ADF, and then remove the slit glass cleaner.
2 Wipe stains off the slit glass using the slit glass cleaner.
% Wipe off stains from the back side to the front side along the
guide.
Slit glass (front) (bizhub C652DS/C552DS)
NOTICE
Do not touch the slit glass (front).
1 Open the ADF, and then remove the slit glass cleaner.
2 Wipe stains off the slit glass using the slit glass (front) cleaner.
% Wipe off stains from the back side to the front side along the
guide. bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-13
8.3 Cleaning procedure
8
Slit glass (back) (bizhub C652DS/C552DS)
NOTICE
Do not touch the slit glass (back).
1 Open the ADF, and then remove the slit glass cleaner.
2 Open the opening and closing guide.
3 Wipe stains off the slit glass using the slit glass (back) cleaner.
% Wipe off stains from the back side to the front side along the
guide.
Original glass, control panel, paper take-up roller
NOTICE
Do not press the control panel hard, or the keys and touch panel may be damaged.
% Wipe the surface using a soft, dry cloth.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-14
8.3 Cleaning procedure
8
Housing, document pad
NOTICE
Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the document pad.
% Wipe the surface using a soft cloth moistened with a mild household detergent.9 Troubleshootingbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-2
9.1 When the message "Trouble" appears (call a service representative)
9
9 Troubleshooting
This chapter describes troubleshooting.
9.1 When the message "Trouble" appears (call a service
representative)
If this message appears, perform the operation described in the message. If the problem is not resolved,
perform the following operations, and then contact your service representative.
Normally, the phone number and fax number of your service representative appear in the center of the
screen.
If a defective part can be separated in order to be able to continue operations after a problem has been
detected, [Continue] or [Recover Data] is displayed. To continue operations, select any key. However, the
problem has not been resolved, so contact your service representative immediately.
Problems that cannot be corrected by the user
1 Write down the malfunction code in the Service Call screen.
2 Turn off the [sub power switch].
3 Turn off the [main power switch].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-3
9.1 When the message "Trouble" appears (call a service representative)
9
4 Unplug the machine.
5 Contact your service representative and inform them of the written down malfunction code.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-4
9.2 Troubleshooting table
9
9.2 Troubleshooting table
Simple troubleshooting
The following explains simple troubleshooting procedures. If the problem is not corrected after the described
operation is performed, contact your service representative.
Description of problem Check points Remedy
The machine does not start up
when the [main power switch] is
turned on
Is power being supplied from the
electrical outlet?
Correctly insert the power supply
plug into the electrical outlet.
Has the [sub power switch] been
turned on?
Turn on the [sub power switch].
Copying does not start Is the upper right-side door of
the machine open?
Securely close the upper rightside door of the machine.
Is there any paper that matches
the original?
Load paper of the appropriate
size into the paper tray.
The printed output is too light Is the copy density set to [Light]? Press [Dark] in the Density
screen to copy at the desired
copy density. (p. 5-18)
Is the paper damp? Replace with new paper. (p. 8-3)
The printed output is too dark Is the copy density set to [Dark]? Press [Light] in the Density
screen to copy at the desired
copy density. (p. 5-18)
Was the original not pressed
close enough against the original
glass?
Position the original so that it is
pressed closely against the original glass. (p. 3-5)
The printed image is blurry Is the paper damp? Replace with new paper. (p. 8-3)
Was the original not pressed
close enough against the original
glass?
Position the original so that it is
pressed closely against the original glass. (p. 3-5)
There are dark specks or spots
throughout the printed output
There are streaks in the printed
output
Is the original glass dirty? Wipe the glass with a soft, dry
cloth. (p. 8-13)
Is the slit glass dirty? Clean the slit glass with the slit
glass cleaner. (p. 8-12)
Is the document pad dirty? Clean the document pad with a
soft cloth dampened with a mild
detergent. (p. 8-14)
Was the original printed on highly
translucent material, such as diazo photosensitive paper or OHP
transparencies?
Place a blank sheet of paper on
top of the original. (p. 3-5)
Is a 2-sided original being copied?
If a thin 2-sided original is being
copied, the print on the back side
may be reproduced on the front
side of the copy. In the Background Removal screen, select a
lighter background density.
(p. 5-18)
Is the electrostatic charger wire
dirty?
Use the charger-cleaning tool to
clean the electrostatic charger.
(p. 9-12)bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-5
9.2 Troubleshooting table
9
The image is printed at an angle Is the original positioned correctly?
Correctly position the original
against the document scales.
(p. 3-5)
Load the original into the ADF,
and slide the adjustable lateral
guides to fit the size of the original. (p. 3-4)
Is the original incorrectly positioned in the ADF?
If the original cannot be fed correctly through the ADF, make
copies by positioning the original
on the original glass. (p. 3-5)
Is the slit glass dirty (while using
the ADF)?
Clean the slit glass with the slit
glass cleaner. (p. 8-12)
Are the adjustable lateral guides
incorrectly positioned against
the edges of the paper?
Slide the adjustable lateral
guides against the edges of the
paper.
Was curled paper loaded into the
paper tray?
Flatten the paper before loading
it.
The printed page is curled Was paper that curls easily (as
with recycled paper) used?
Remove the paper from the paper tray, turn it over, and then
load it again.
Replace with new dry paper.
(p. 8-3)
The edge of the printed image is
dirty
Is the document pad dirty? Clean the document pad with a
soft cloth dampened with a mild
detergent. (p. 8-14)
Was the selected paper size larger than the original?
(With a Zoom setting of "Full
Size" (100.0%))
Select a paper size that is the
same size as the original.
Otherwise, select Auto to enlarge
the copy to the selected paper
size. (p. 5-7)
Is the size or orientation of the
original different from that of the
paper?
(With a Zoom setting of "Full
Size" (100.0%))
Select a paper size that is the
same size as the original. Otherwise, select a paper orientation
that is the same as that of the
original.
Was the copy reduced to a size
smaller than the paper (with a reduced zoom ratio specified)?
Select a zoom ratio that adjusts
the original size to the selected
paper size.
Otherwise, select Auto to enlarge
the copy to the selected paper
size. (p. 5-7)
Even though a paper jam was
cleared, copies cannot be produced
Is paper jammed at other locations?
Remove any jammed paper from
other locations.
Printing with the "2-Sided >
1-Sided" or "2-Sided > 2-Sided"
settings are not available
Have settings been selected that
cannot be combined?
Check the combinations of the
selected settings.
Copying is not possible even
though the password is entered
on a machine with account track
settings configured
Did the message "Your account
has reached its maximum allowance." appear?
Contact your administrator.
The original is not fed Is the ADF slightly open? Securely close the ADF.
Is the original one that does not
meet the specifications?
Check that the original is one
that can be loaded into the ADF.
(p. 12-7)
Is the original correctly loaded? Position the original correctly.
(p. 3-4)
The Finisher or Job Separator
JS-504 does not run.
Is any power being supplied to
the connector?
Check that the cord is correctly
inserted into the connector.
Description of problem Check points Remedybizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-6
9.2 Troubleshooting table
9
The staple is incorrectly positioned by 90°
Has the staple position been correctly specified?
Specify the desired position for
stapling. (p. 5-10)
The pages that were fed out
were not uniformly loaded and
the punched holes or staples
are incorrectly positioned
Is the paper curled? Remove the paper from the paper tray, turn it over, and then
load it again.
Is there a gap between the lateral
guides in the paper tray and the
sides of the paper?
Slide the lateral guides in the paper tray against the sides of the
paper so that there is no gap.
Is the paper type configured correctly?
Configure the paper type of the
selected tray correctly.
Though the authentication unit
is connected with this machine
sing a USB cable, the status indicator LED does not light in
green
A malfunction of the USB port of
this machine is suspected.
Turn off the main power of this
machine, disconnect the USB
cable from this machine or authentication unit, and then connect it again. Wait at least 10
seconds, and then turn on the
main power of this machine.
Though the authentication unit
is connected with the computer
using a USB cable, the status indicator LED does not light in
green
MA malfunction of the USB port
of your computer is suspected.
Restart your computer.
Has the authentication unit driver
being installed correctly?
Check that your computer is installed to the computer correctly.
(p. 10-2) (p. 11-2)
No notice sound is given when
scanning is started or authentication is finished on this machine
Has the notice sound being set
to OFF on this machine?
Set the notice sound to ON.
(p. 10-2)
When the "Failed to register"
message appears on this machine where registration fails
The scanning time on the authentication unit is limited per
scanning. If scanning does not
finish within the limited time, the
corresponding message appears.
For details on the scanning time,
contact your service representative.
To finish scanning within the limited time, confirm how to perform
authentication and how to place
your finger when scanning.
(p. 10-2)
During scanning, place the
scanned part on the scanning
section correctly, and do not
move it until results have been
obtained.
If the scanned part is dusty or
rough and dry when performing
authentication, a correct image
will not be able to be obtained,
and scanning may not finish.
Clean your finger, and then scan
it again, or improve the rough
and dry condition of your finger.
If the scanned part is too thick or
thin (when the finger width is outside the range from 3/8 to 1 inch
(10 to 25 mm)), a correct image
cannot be obtained, and scanning may not finish. Try "stretching your finger", "placing your
finger deeply", or "placing your
finger shallowly" on the scanning
section.
When the "Failed to authenticate." message appears on this
machine where login fails
When the "Failed to read data.
Place your finger once again
and click the [Start reading] button." message appears on the
computer where registration has
failed
The scanning time on the authentication unit is limited to five
seconds per scan. If scanning
does not finish within five seconds, the corresponding message appears.
Description of problem Check points Remedybizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-7
9.2 Troubleshooting table
9
Scanning does not start Have you placed your finger correctly on the authentication unit?
Confirm how to perform authentication and how to place your
finger when scanning. (p. 10-2)
During scanning, place the
scanned part on the scanning
section correctly, and do not
move it until results have been
obtained.
If the scanned part is dusty or
rough and dry when performing
authentication, a correct image
will not be able to be obtained,
and scanning may not finish.
Clean your finger, and then scan
it again, or improve the rough
and dry condition of your finger.
If the scanned part is too thick or
thin (when the finger width is outside the range from 3/8 to 1 inch
(10 to 25 mm)), a correct image
cannot be obtained, and scanning may not finish. Try "stretching your finger", "placing your
finger deeply", or "placing your
finger shallowly" on the scanning
section.
Did you restart this machine after
connecting the authentication
unit to this machine?
Turn off the main power of this
machine, disconnect the USB
cable from this machine or authentication unit, and then connect it again. Wait at least 10
seconds, and then turn on the
main power of this machine.
Connecting the authentication
unit to the computer starts the
hardware uninstall wizard
Is the USB port to which the authentication unit is connected the
same as the one used when installing the driver?
If you connect the authentication
unit to a different USB port from
the one used when installing the
driver, the hardware uninstall
wizard may start. Use the same
USB port as the one used when
installing the driver.
When the "Failed to register"
message appears on this machine where registration fails
The scanning time of the authentication unit is limited to 10 seconds. If scanning does not finish
within the limited time, the corresponding message appears.
To finish scanning within the limited time, confirm how to place
the IC card. (p. 11-2)
When a message appears on
the computer where registration
fails
When the "Failed to authenticate." message appears on this
machine where login fails
When IC card authentication +
password authentication is enabled
Did you enter the correct password?
Check the password, and then
enter the correct one if not.
Scanning does not start Did you restart this machine after
connecting the authentication
unit to this machine?
Turn off the main power of this
machine, disconnect the USB
cable from this machine or authentication unit, and then connect it again. Wait at least 10
seconds, and then turn on the
main power of this machine.
Description of problem Check points Remedybizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-8
9.2 Troubleshooting table
9
Main messages and their remedies
If any message other than those listed below appears, perform the operation described in the message.
Message Cause Remedy
Originals left on original glass. The original has been left on the
original glass.
Remove the original from the
original glass.
Paper of matching size is not
available.
Select the paper size.
Paper of a suitable size is not
loaded in a paper tray.
Either select paper of a different
size or load paper of a suitable
size.
Place paper in Bypass Tray. Paper of a suitable size is not
loaded in the bypass tray.
Load paper of the appropriate
size into the bypass tray.
The original size cannot be detected
Select the paper size.
(1) The original is not positioned
correctly.
(2) An original with a nonstandard
size or with a size too small to be
detected is loaded.
(1) Position the original correctly.
(2) Select the correct paper size.
The image will not fit in the selected paper size.
Change the direction of the original
The image does not fit in the paper.
Turn the original 90° and load it.
Cannot be set with XXX. Functions that cannot be used
together are selected.
Make copies using only one of
the functions.
The output tray has reached its
capacity.
Remove paper from the tray indicated by .
Copy cannot be performed because the paper loading capacity
of the output tray of the displayed Finisher or Job Separator
reached the maximum.
Remove all paper from the indicated tray.
Enter the login user name and
password and then touch
[Login] or press the [Access]
key.
User authentication settings
have been configured. Copies
cannot be made unless a user
name and correct password are
entered.
Enter the correct user name and
password. (p. 4-8)
Enter Account Name and password, and then touch [Login] or
press the [Access] key.
Account track settings have
been configured. Copies cannot
be made unless an account
name and correct password are
entered.
Enter the correct account name
and password. (p. 4-8)
Your account has reached its
maximum allowance.
The limit on the number of pages
that can be printed has been
reached.
Contact the administrator of the
machine.
The part indicated by is
open.
Ensure that it is properly closed.
Since a machine door or cover is
open or an option is not installed
correctly, the machine is unable
to make copies.
Make sure that all doors and
covers of this machine and options are closed securely.
Check covers. The exit cover of the finisher is
open.
Securely close the exit cover of
the finisher.
Install the Imaging Unit and
close all doors
The indicated Imaging Unit is not
installed correctly.
Reinstall each consumable and
replaceable part. Or contact your
service representative.
[Install a toner cartridge.] The indicated toner cartridge is
not installed correctly.
Reinstall each consumable and
replaceable part. Or contact your
service representative.
[Set the toner cartridge, and
close all doors.]
The indicated toner cartridge is
not installed correctly.
Reinstall each consumable and
replaceable part. Or contact your
service representative.
Install the waste toner box and
close all doors.
The waste toner box is not installed correctly.
Reinstall each consumable and
replaceable part. Or contact your
service representative.
Incorrect Imaging Unit is installed. Install the correct Imaging Unit and close all doors.
The correct Imaging Unit is not
set.
Reinstall each consumable and
replaceable part. Or contact your
service representative.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-9
9.2 Troubleshooting table
9
Replenish paper. The indicated tray has run out of
paper.
Add paper. (p. 8-3)
Toner (X) is low. Please when indicate.
The toner for the indicated color
is about to run out.
Prepare to replace the toner cartridge following the guidance
contained in your maintenance
agreement.
Install toner cartridge (X) The toner is about to run out. Replace the toner cartridge following the guidance contained in
your maintenance agreement.
Toner is depleted
Replace the toner cartridge following the guidance (explanation).
Press the [Continue] button to
continue the operations.
Toner is depleted Replace the toner cartridge following the guidance contained in
your maintenance agreement.
No more staples.
Replace the staple cartridge, or
cancel stapling
The staples have run out. Replace the staple cartridge.
Misfeed detected. Remove paper according to the instructions.
Since a paper jam occurred, the
machine is unable to make copies.
Clear the jammed paper.
Empty hole-punch scrap box
To continue the job, disable
punching.
(1) The punch scrap box is full.
(2) The punch scrap box is not installed.
(1) Throw punch scraps away
from the punch scrap box.
(2) Install the punch scrap box.
Reset the following number of
originals.
XX
After clearing a paper jam, it is
necessary to reload certain pages of the original that have already been fed through the ADF.
Load the indicated original pages
into the ADF.
An internal error occurred. Open
and then close the front door. If
the trouble code appears again,
contact your Service Rep.
The machine malfunctioned and
is unable to make copies.
Take a remedy according to the
message displayed in the
screen. If the problem is not resolved or released, inform your
service representative of the
malfunction code displayed in
the screen.
An internal error occurred. Turn
the main switch OFF and ON. If
the trouble code appears again,
contact your Service Rep.
Malfunction detected.
Inform the service representative of the error code.
The machine malfunctioned and
is unable to make copies.
Inform your service representative of the code displayed in the
screen.
Clean the slit scan glass on the
far left with a glass cleaner.
Continuing using the machine in
this condition may cause lines to
appear in the output.
The slit glass is dirty. User the slit glass cleaner to
clean it.
Clean the slit glass on the left
side of the machine with the
glass cleaner. Continuing using
the machine in this condition
may cause lines to appear in the
output.
The slit glass (front) is dirty. User the slit glass cleaner to
clean it.
Clean the slit glass on the left
side of the ADF with the glass
cleaner. Continuing using the
machine in this condition may
cause lines to appear in the output.
The slit glass (back) is dirty. User the slit glass cleaner to
clean it.
Message Cause Remedybizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-10
9.2 Troubleshooting table
9
Icons that appear in the touch-panel screen
Now Downloading Program
Data from the Firmware server.
(1) CS Remote Care was activated by your service representative.
(2) Internet ISW is being downloaded.
Do not turn off the sub power
switch while this message is displayed.
After turning off the sub power
switch, turn off the main power
switch, and then contact your
service representative.
Authentication information entered is invalid, due to failed access attempts.
Contact the administrator.
The authentication information
has become invalid since the authentication attempts have failed
the specified number of times.
Contact the administrator of the
machine.
Due to failed access attempts,
the current administrator password is invalid.
The administrator password has
become invalid since the authentication attempts have failed the
specified number of times.
Turn the machine off, then on
again.
Turn off the main power switch,
and then wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again.
The job log has reached the
maximum allowed.
Contact the administrator.
The write area of the job log has
reached the maximum allowed.
Obtain the job log using PageScope Web Connection.
No Animation Guide data available. Contact your administrator.
Animation guide data is not installed.
For details on installing animation guide data, contact your
service representative.
Verify that external keyboard is
properly connected. It may not
be connected or multiple keyboards may be connected.
The compact keyboard is not
connected to this machine.
Turn off the main power of this
machine, connect the compact
keyboard to this machine. Wait
at least 10 seconds, and then
turn on the main power of this
machine.
Message Cause Remedy
Icon Description
Indicates that data is being sent from the machine, regardless of the current mode.
Indicates that the machine is receiving data, regardless of the current
mode.
Indicates that an error occurred during an image stabilization operation, a
print operation or a scan operation.
Press this icon to view a screen containing a warning code.
If the warning screen was closed when a warning occurred, press this button to display the warning screen again.
Appears when there is a message indicating that consumables must be replaced or the machine requires maintenance. Press this button to display
the message, and then carry out the replacement or maintenance procedure.
Appears when an error occurs with the connection to the POP server.
Indicates that paper is not loaded in the paper tray.
Indicates that very little paper remains in the paper tray.
If the optional image controller is installed, press this icon to display the
setting screen for the image controller.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-11
9.2 Troubleshooting table
9
Indicates that "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON".
Appears when the external memory (USB memory) is not connected.
Indicates that a nonstandard external memory has been connected to this
machine, therefore, USB connection is not enabled.
Indicates that the job is in the waiting-for-redial status because, for example, the recipient's line is busy when sending with the G3 Fax or IP Address
Fax function.
Icon Descriptionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-12
9.3 If print quality is deteriorated
9
9.3 If print quality is deteriorated
Cleaning the electrostatic charger wire
If the electrostatic charger wire is dirty, streaks will appear though the printed images. If this occurs, follow
the procedure described below to clean the electrostatic charger wire.
0 When replacing the waste toner box, follow the "Quick Guide" to clean the electrostatic charger wire.
1 Open the machine's lower front door.
2 Slowly pull out the charger-cleaning tool as far as possible. Next,
slowly push in the charger-cleaning tool as far as possible.
Repeat the above operations three times.
3 Securely insert the charger-cleaning tool, and then close the front door.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-13
9.3 If print quality is deteriorated
9
Cleaning the print head
If the print head becomes dirty, print quality may be reduced. If this occurs, clean the print head according
to the following procedure.
1 Pull out tray 1.
2 Remove the print head glass cleaning tool from tray 1.
3 Open the machine's lower front door.
4 Release the securing levers for the waste toner box, and then
remove the waste toner box.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-14
9.3 If print quality is deteriorated
9
5 Insert the print head glass cleaning tool into the print head
cleaning opening, pull it out, and then repeat this back-and-forth
movement two or three times.
6 Install the waste toner box.
7 Place back the print head glass cleaning tool to tray 1.
8 Close tray 1.10 Authentication unit (biometric
type)bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-2
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
10 Authentication unit (biometric type)
This chapter describes the authentication unit (biometric type).
1. Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101
2. Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-102
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
The authentication unit (biometric type) is a "biometrics (biometric authentication)" system that scans a finger
vein pattern to perform personal authentication. Using the biometric authentication, you can log in to this
machine where user authentication settings are configured in order to execute a print job.
Place your forefinger straight so that your forefinger cushion slightly touches the hollow and protuberance
part of the scanning section. Secure your middle finger and thumb on the both sides of the authentication
unit to prevent your forefinger to be used for authentication from rotating.
For details on how to place your forefinger on the authentication unit, refer to page 10-17.
NOTICE
If you change the authentication unit from AU-101 to AU-102, the users you registered with AU-101 cannot
use AU-102. Connect AU-102 to this machine, and then register the users again.
Do not place anything other than your finger on the scanning section during scanning operation. Doing so
may cause a malfunction.
Do not disconnect the USB cable from the authentication unit or computer during a scanning operation.
Doing so may cause the system to become unstable.
The status indicator LED and notice sound indicate the status of the authentication unit.
*1
For authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101
*2
For authentication unit (biometric type) AU-102
1
2
Status indicator LEDs Status
Lit in green Ready state or authentication is completed
Flash in green During authentication or scanning operation
Lit in red Authentication failed or scanning failed
Unlit The authentication unit is not recognized
Notice sound Status
One short blip sound Scanning starts
One short blip sound During a retry after authentication failed
One short blip sound
*1
/two short blip sounds
*2
Authentication completed
Two short blip sounds
*1
/
one short blip and one long beep sounds
*2
Authentication failed
One long beep sound
*2
Scanning canceledbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-3
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
To use the authentication unit, first register the finger vein pattern of the user in this machine. The registered
user, who is authenticated with the finger vein pattern, can log in to this machine or execute a print job. This
section explains how to configure the required settings in this machine, register users, and log in with
authentication.
10.1.1 Configuring this machine
NOTICE
User authentication settings must be configured with MFP authentication on this machine.
This device does not support external server authentication. To combine account track settings with user
authentication settings, set Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track to "Synchronize".
1 Use the control panel of this machine to display the Administrator Settings screen. Press [4 User
Authentication/Account Track], then [1 General Settings].
2 Set [User Authentication] to "ON (MFP)", and then press [OK].
3 Press [Yes], and then [OK].
4 Press [8 Authentication Device Settings].
5 Press [1 General Settings].
6 Press [Bio Authentication].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-4
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
7 Configure "Beep Sound" and "Operation Settings".
% For "Beep Sound", specify whether to give a "blip" sound when the finger vein pattern is scanned
successfully.
% For "Operation Settings", specify how to log in to this machine after registration.
1-to-many authentication: Allows the user to log in by simply placing his or her finger.
1-to-1 authentication: Allows the user to log in by entering the user name and placing his or her
finger.
For details on how to log in to this machine, refer to page 10-17.
8 Press [OK] twice.
9 Press [2 Logoff Settings].
10 Specify whether to log out the user when scanning the original has finished after the user logged in with
the authentication unit.
11 Press [OK].
12 Press [Close] twice.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-5
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
10.1.2 Registering a user
The following two methods can be used to register a user.
- Connect the authentication unit to this machine, and directly register the target user in this machine
- Connect the authentication unit to your computer, and use Data Administrator to register the target user
NOTICE
The registered user data is saved in the HDD of this machine. Changing the user authentication type of this
machine or formatting the HDD will erase the registered user data.
Registering a user using the control panel of this machine
1 Use the control panel of this machine to display the Administrator Settings screen. Press [4 User
Authentication/Account Track], and then [2 User Authentication Settings].
NOTICE
[2 User Authentication Settings] is disabled when User Authentication is set to [OFF] in General
Settings.
2 Press [2 User Registration].
3 Select a desired registration number, and then press [Edit].
4 Press [Register Auth. Info.].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-6
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
5 Press [Edit].
6 Place your finger on the authentication unit to scan the finger vein pattern.
% Scan the finger vein pattern three times; reset the same finger each time and then press [Scan] for
each scanning.
% After scanning the finger vein pattern, place the same finger on the authentication unit, and press
[Authentication Test].
% If your finger vein patterns have been authenticated in the authentication test, press [New]. If
authentication has failed, retry scanning the finger.
7 Press [Close] twice.
8 Enter the user name and password.
9 Configure function permission settings as required.
10 Press [OK].
11 Press [Close].
Registering a user using Data Administrator
To use Data Administrator, configure this machine, and set up Data Administrator. For setup, install the
BioDriver (USB-Driver) of the authentication unit, and then install Data Administrator Bio Plugin.
NOTICE
Before setup, install Data Administrator V4.0 or later in your computer. For the Data Administrator operating
environment and installation procedure, refer to the Data Administrator User's Guide.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-7
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
Checking the version of the installed Data Administrator
1 From the "Help" menu of Data Administrator, select "Version Information".
NOTICE
This software cannot be used if the version is "3.x". Install "4.x".
If Data Administrator V3.x is installed, it is removed when V4.x is installed.
2 Click the [Plug-in version].
3 In "Plug-in information list:", confirm the plugin version of Data Administrator.
% This software is available if the plugin version is "4.x".
Setup
1 Turn the main power of this machine off, and disconnect the authentication unit from this machine.
2 Install BioDriver (USB-Driver).
Connect the authentication unit to the USB port of your computer.
The "Found New Hardware" dialog box appears.
3 Select "Locate and install driver software (recommended)".
4 Insert the application CD-ROM provided with the authentication unit into the CD-ROM drive of the
computer.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-8
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
5 Click the "Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)".
6 Check that the driver's search location is the application CD-ROM, and then click the [Next].
% When the driver's search location is not the application CD-ROM, click the [Browse]. Select the
BioDriver (USB-Driver) folder on the CD-ROM, and then click the [OK].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-9
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
% Installation starts.
7 Click the [Close].
Installation of BioDriver (USB-Driver) is completed.
8 Install Data Administrator Bio Plugin.
Open the DA_Bio_Plugin folder on the application CD-ROM, and then click setup.exe.
9 Select a language, and then click the [OK].
The installation program starts.
10 Follow the on-screen instructions to proceed with the installation.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-10
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
11 Click the [Next].
12 Select "I accept the terms in the license agreement", and then click the [Next].
13 Click the [Install].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-11
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
14 Click the [Finish].
Installation of the Data Administrator Bio Plugin is completed, which completes the setup.
User registration
To register a user with Data Administrator, connect the authentication unit to the USB port of the computer,
and also connect the computer to this machine via network.
1 If the authentication unit is already connected to this machine, turn the main power switch of this
machine off, and then disconnect the authentication unit.
% When the authentication unit is already connected to the computer, go to step 4.
NOTICE
To turn the main power switch off and on, first turn the main power switch off, and then turn it on after
10 or more seconds has elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure.
When connecting or disconnecting the USB cable, hold the plug. Otherwise, the cable may be
damaged.
2 Turn the main power on.
3 Connect the authentication unit to the USB port of the computer that contains Data Administrator.
NOTICE
Do not connect another USB device to the same port as for the authentication unit. Doing so reduces
the USB power supply, resulting in an operation failure.
To use the USB hub, be sure to connect the self-power USB hub that supplies 500 mA or more.
Restart the procedure 5 or more seconds after connecting the authentication unit.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-12
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
4 Data Administrator starts, and device information of this machine is imported.
The Device Information window appears.
% For details on how to import device information, refer to the Data Administrator User's Guide.
5 In Select Function, select "Authentication Settings" - "User Setting", and then click the [Add].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-13
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
6 Select the desired template, and then click the [OK].
The User Registration window appears.
7 Enter the user name and password, select the "AU-101" or "AU-102" tab, and then click the [Register
Auth. Info].
% Enter the E-mail address and other information as required.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-14
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
8 Register finger vein pattern.
% Scan the finger vein patterns three times; reset the same finger and then press [Start Reading] for
each scanning.
% After scanning the finger vein patterns, place the same finger, and click [Authentication Test].
% If the authentication test has succeeded, press [Register].
% If the authentication test has failed, place your finger on the authentication unit again, and click
[Authentication Test].
% If the authentication has failed, click [Reset] to repeat the scanning process.
For authentication unit AU-101
For authentication unit AU-102
9 Click the [Registration].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-15
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
10 Click the [OK].
% Repeat steps 5 to 10 to register all users.
11 Click the [Export to the device].
% Select the user name and click the [Edit] to change the registered data.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-16
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
12 Click the [Write].
% Data Administrator provides the batch copy function that batch-configures the registered user data
in multiple machines with the authentication unit enabled.
The registered user data is configured in this machine.
13 Click the [OK].
14 Disconnect the authentication unit from the USB port of the computer.
15 Turn the main power switch of this machine off, connect the authentication unit to this machine, and
turn the main power of this machine on.
NOTICE
To turn the main power switch off and on, first turn the main power switch off, and then turn it on after
10 or more seconds has elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure.
When connecting or disconnecting the USB cable, hold the plug. Otherwise, the cable may be
damaged.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-17
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
10.1.3 Logging in to this machine
This section explains how to log in to this machine with the finger vein pattern authentication.
- To use authentication unit (biometric type), register the finger vein pattern in advance.
- If authentication fails frequently, finger vein pattern may not be registered correctly. Register the finger
vein pattern again.
- Authentication is carried out when you simply place your finger on the 1-to-many authentication.
Authentication is carried out when you enter the user name and place your finger on the 1-to-1
authentication.
- Press [ID & PW] to log in by entering the user name and the password, without using the authentication
unit.
When 1-to-many authentication has been specified
% Place your finger on the authentication unit.
The basic settings screen appears.
Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-102bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-18
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
When 1-to-1 authentication has been specified
1 Select [User Name], and enter the user name.
2 Place your finger on the authentication unit.
The basic settings screen appears.
Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-10211 Authentication unit (IC card
type)bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-2
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
11
11 Authentication unit (IC card type)
This chapter describes the authentication unit (IC card type).
1. Authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
The authentication unit (IC card type) is an "IC card authentication " system that reads the IC card to perform
personal authentication. Using this system, you can perform authentication with an IC card to log in to this
machine or execute a print job when User Authentication is enabled in this machine.
To use the authentication unit, first register the card ID of the user in this machine. The registered user, who
is authenticated with the card ID, can log in to this machine or execute a print job. This section explains how
to configure the required settings in this machine, register users, and log in with authentication.
For details on how to place the IC card in the authentication unit, refer to the "Quick Guide
[Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations]".
NOTICE
Authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201 must be installed inside the working table WT-506.
Do not disconnect the USB cable while using the authentication unit. Doing so may cause the system to
become unstable.
Do not leave the IC card within 1-9/16 inch (40 mm) of the card reader.
11.1.1 Configuring this machine
NOTICE
User authentication settings must be configured with MFP authentication on this machine.
This device does not support external server authentication. For the [Public User] or [Account Track] settings,
refer to page 7-31. To combine account track settings with user authentication settings, set Synchronize
User Authentication & Account Track to "Synchronize".
1 Use the control panel of this machine to display the Administrator Settings screen. Press [4 User
Authentication/Account Track], then [General Settings].
1bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-3
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
11
2 Set [User Authentication] to "ON (MFP)", and then press [OK].
3 Press [Yes], and then [OK].
4 Press [8 Authentication Device Settings].
5 Press [1 General Settings].
6 Press [Card Authentication].
7 Configure "IC Card Type" and "Operation Settings".
% In "IC Card Type", specify the required IC card type.
% For "Operation Settings", specify how to log in to this machine after registration.
Card Authentication: Allows the user to log in by simply placing the IC card.
Card Authentication + Password: Allows the user to log in by placing the IC card and entering the
password.
For details on how to log in to this machine, refer to page 11-15.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-4
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
11
8 Press [OK] twice.
9 Press [2 Logoff Settings].
10 Specify whether to log out the user when scanning the original has finished after the user logged in with
the authentication unit.
11 Press [OK].
12 Press [Close] twice.
11.1.2 Registering a user
The following two methods can be used to register a user.
- Connect the authentication unit to this machine, and directly register the target user in this machine
- Connect the authentication unit to your computer, and use Data Administrator to register the target user
NOTICE
The registered user data is saved in the HDD of this machine. Changing the user authentication type of this
machine or formatting the HDD will erase the registered user data.
Registering a user using the control panel of this machine
1 Use the control panel of this machine to display the Administrator Settings screen. Press [4 User
Authentication/Account Track], and then [2 User Authentication Settings].
2 Press [2 User Registration].
3 Select a desired registration number, and then press [Edit].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-5
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
11
4 Press [Register Auth. Info.].
5 Press [Edit].
6 Place the IC card on the authentication unit, and press [OK].
7 When message [Registration complete] appears, press [Close] twice.
8 Enter the user name and password.
9 Configure function permission settings as required.
10 Press [OK].
11 Press [Close].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-6
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
11
Registering a user using Data Administrator
To use Data Administrator, configure this machine, and set up Data Administrator. For setup, install the IC
Card Driver (USB-Driver) of the authentication unit, and then install Data Administrator IC Card Plugin.
NOTICE
Before setup, install Data Administrator V4.0 or later in your computer. For the Data Administrator operating
environment and installation procedure, refer to the Data Administrator User's Guide.
Checking the version of the installed Data Administrator
1 From the "Help" menu of Data Administrator, select "Version Information".
NOTICE
This software cannot be used if the version is "3.x". Install "4.x".
If Data Administrator V3.x is installed, it is removed when V4.x is installed.
2 Click the [Plug-in version].
3 In "Plug-in information list", confirm the plugin version of Data Administrator.
% This software is available if the plugin version is "4.x".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-7
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
11
Setup
1 Turn the main power of this machine off, and disconnect the authentication unit from this machine.
2 Install IC Card Driver (USB-Driver).
Connect the authentication unit to the USB port of your computer.
The "Found New Hardware" dialog box appears.
3 Select "Locate and install driver software (recommended)".
4 Insert the application CD-ROM provided with the authentication unit into the CD-ROM drive of the
computer.
5 Click the "Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-8
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
11
6 Check that the driver's search location is the application CD-ROM, and then click the [Next].
% When the driver's search location is not the application CD-ROM, click the [Browse]. Select the IC
Card Driver (USB-Driver) folder in the CD-ROM, and click the [OK].
% Installation starts.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-9
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
11
7 Click the [Close].
Installation of the IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) is completed.
8 Install Data Administrator IC Card Plugin.
Open the IC_Card_Plugin folder on the application CD-ROM, and then click setup.exe.
9 Select a language, and then click the [OK].
The installation program starts.
10 Follow the on-screen instructions to proceed with the installation.
11 Click the [Next].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-10
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
11
12 Select "I accept the terms in the license agreement", and then click the [Next].
13 Click the [Install].
14 Click the [Finish].
Installation of the Data Administrator IC Card Plugin is completed, which completes the setup.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-11
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
11
User registration
To register a user with Data Administrator, connect the authentication unit to the USB port of the computer,
and also connect the computer to this machine via network.
1 If the authentication unit is already connected to this machine, turn the main power switch of this
machine off, and then disconnect the authentication unit.
% When the authentication unit is already connected to the computer, go to step 4.
NOTICE
To turn the main power switch off and on, first turn the main power switch off, and then turn it on after
10 or more seconds has elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure.
When connecting or disconnecting the USB cable, hold the plug. Otherwise, the cable may be
damaged.
2 Turn the main power on.
3 Connect the authentication unit to the USB port of the computer that contains Data Administrator.
NOTICE
Do not connect another USB device to the same port as for the authentication unit. Doing so reduces
the USB power supply, resulting in an operation failure.
To use the USB hub, be sure to connect the self-power USB hub that supplies 500 mA or more.
Restart the procedure 5 or more seconds after connecting the authentication unit.
4 Data Administrator starts, and device information of this machine is imported.
The Device Information window appears.
% For details on how to import device information, refer to the Data Administrator User 's Guide.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-12
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
11
5 In Select Function, select "Authentication Settings" - "User Setting", and then click the [Add].
6 Select the desired template, and then click the [OK].
The User Registration window appears.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-13
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
11
7 Enter the user name and password, and select the "IC card authentication" tab.
% Enter the E-mail address and other information as required.
8 Place the IC card on the authentication unit, and click the [Start reading].
% If necessary, click [Card ID Input] to register the card ID.
9 Click the [OK].
% Repeat steps 5 to 12 to register all users.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-14
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
11
10 Click [Export to the device].
% Select the user name and click the [Edit] to change the registered data.
11 Click the [Write].
% Data Administrator provides the batch copy function that batch-configures the registered user data
in multiple machines with the authentication unit enabled.
The registered user data is configured in this machine.
12 Click the [OK].
13 Disconnect the authentication unit from the USB port of the computer.
14 Turn the main power switch of this machine off, connect the authentication unit to this machine, and
turn the main power switch of this machine on.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-15
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
11
NOTICE
To turn the main power switch off and on, first turn the main power switch off, and then turn it on after
10 or more seconds has elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure.
When connecting or disconnecting the USB cable, hold the plug. Otherwise, the cable may be
damaged.
11.1.3 Logging in to this machine
This section explains how to log in to this machine with IC card authentication.
- To use authentication unit (IC card type), register the information recorded in the IC card in advance.
- If authentication fails frequently, IC card information may not be registered properly. Register IC card
information again.
- When the IC Card authentication is enabled, a registered user is authenticated by simply placing the IC
card. Authentication is carried out when you place the IC card and enter the password when both IC
cards and passwords are used for authentication.
- Press [ID & PW] to log in by entering the user name and the password, without using the authentication
unit.
When IC card authentication is enabled
% Place the IC card on the working table.
The basic settings screen appears.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-16
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
11
When IC card authentication + password authentication is enabled
1 Place the IC card on the working table.
2 Press [Password], and then enter the password.
3 Press either [Login] or the [Access] key.
The basic settings screen appears.12 Specificationsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-2
12.1 Paper
12
12 Specifications
This chapter describes the specifications of the paper, machine, and options.
This product specification is subject to change without notice toward the improvement.
12.1 Paper
Paper types and paper capacities
*1
Paper where you do not print on both sides (for example, when something is already printed on the front
side).
*2
Fine and other special paper.
*3
Paper where company names, preset text, and others are already printed.
*4
Colored paper.
*5
Paper that is registered as one of frequently used paper types.
For paper weight and media adjustment settings, contact your service representative.
Paper type Paper weight Paper capacity
Plain paper
Single Side Only
*1
Special Paper
*2
Letterhead
*3
Colored Paper
*4
User Paper 1
*5
User Paper 2
*5
17 lb to 23-15/16 lb
(64 to 90 g/m2
)
Bypass tray: 150 sheets, Tray 1/2: 500 sheets
Tray 3: 1,500 sheets, Tray 4: 1,000 sheets
Large capacity unit LU-301: 3,000 sheets
Large capacity unit LU-204: 2,500 sheets
Thick 1
User Paper 3
*5
24-3/16 lb to
31-15/16 lb
(91 to 120 g/m2
)
Bypass tray: 100 sheets, Tray 1/2: 400 sheets
Tray 3: 1,150 sheets, Tray 4: 750 sheets
Large capacity unit LU-301: 2,500 sheets
Large capacity unit LU-204: 2,000 sheets
Thick 1+
User Paper 4
*5
32-3/16 lb to
41-3/4 lb
(121 to 157 g/m2
)
Bypass tray: 80 sheets, Tray 1/2: 280 sheets
Tray 3: 800 sheets, Tray 4: 500 sheets
Large capacity unit LU-301: 1,750 sheets
Large capacity unit LU-204: 1,450 sheets
Thick 2
User Paper 5
*5
42 lb to 55-5/8 lb
(158 to 209 g/m2
)
Bypass tray: 70 sheets, Tray 1/2: 250 sheets
Tray 3: 700 sheets, Tray 4: 450 sheets
Large capacity unit LU-301: 1,550 sheets
Large capacity unit LU-204: 1,250 sheets
Thick 3
User Paper 6
*5
55-7/8 lb to 68-1/8 lb
(210 to 256 g/m2
)
Bypass tray: 60 sheets, Tray 1/2: 200 sheets
Tray 3: 600 sheets, Tray 4: 400 sheets
Large capacity unit LU-301: 1,300 sheets
Large capacity unit LU-204: 1,000 sheets
Thick 4 68-3/8 lb to
79-13/16 lb
(257 to 300 g/m2
)
Bypass tray: 50 sheets
Transparency - Bypass tray: 20 sheets
Postcards - Bypass tray: 50 sheets
Tray 3: 200 sheets
*
, Tray 4: 200 sheets
*
*
Ask the service representative to change the setting.
Envelope - Bypass tray: 10 sheets
Label sheets - Bypass tray: 50 sheetsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-3
12.1 Paper
12
NOTICE
Paper other than plain paper, such as OHP transparencies and colored paper, is called special paper. Be sure
to select a special paper setting for paper trays loaded with media such as OHP transparencies and colored
paper.
If the paper size and paper type have not been correctly specified, a paper jam may occur or poor image
quality may result.
When you select Plain Paper, Thick 1, Thick 1+, Thick 2, Thick 3, or Thick 4 for the bypass tray, you can select
Duplex 2nd Side. Select Duplex 2nd Side when you load paper where something is printed on one side.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-4
12.2 Machine specifications
12
12.2 Machine specifications
bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452
Specification
Type Scanner, printer, desktop, or stand-alone
Document holder Stationary (mirror scanning)
Photo conductor OPC
Light source White rare-gas fluorescent
Copy system Laser electrostatic copying
Developing system Dry 2-component HMT developing system
Fusing system Belt fusing
Resolution Scanning 600 dpi e 600 dpi
Output 1,800 dpi e 600 dpi
Originals Type Sheets, books (two-page spread), three-dimensional objects
Size Max. 11 e17 (A3)
Weight 4-7/16 lb (2 kg) (three-dimensional objects)
Copying paper type Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2
)), Thick1 (24-3/16 lb to 31-
15/16 lb (91 to 120 g/m2
)), Thick1+ (32-3/16 lb to 41-3/4 lb (121 to 157
g/m2
)), Thick2 (42 lb to 55-5/8 lb (158 to 209 g/m2
)), Thick3 (55-7/8 lb to
68-1/8 lb (210 to 256 g/m2
)), Thick4 (68-3/8 lb to 79-13/16 lb (257 to 300
g/m2
))
*
,
Letterhead, colored paper, transparency
*
, postcard
**
, envelope
*
, label
sheet
*
, banner paper (33-13/16 lb to 55-7/8 lb (127 to 210 g/m2
))
*
2 Sided: Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2
)), Thick1/1+/2/3
(24-3/16 lb to 68-1/8 lb (91 to 256 g/m2
))
*
Available for bypass tray.
**
Available for bypass tray or tray 3/4. (When using tray 3/4, ask the service
representative to change the setting.)
Copy paper size
12-1/4 e 18 w, 12 e 18 w to 8-1/2 e 11 v, A3 w to A5 w, 8 e 13 w*1
,
16K v, 8K w
8-1/2 e 11 v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v
*
, A4 v to A5 v, 16K v
*2
12-1/4 e 18 w, 12 e 18 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A3 w to B6 w, A6 w,
4 e 6 w, 8 e 13 w*1
, A6 card w, 16K w/v, 8K w
Width: 3-9/16 to 12-1/4 (90 mm to 311.1 mm), length: 5-1/2 to 47-1/4
(139.7 mm to 1,200 mm)
*1
There are six types of foolcaps: 8-1/2 e 13-1/2 w, 220 e 330 mmw,
8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, and 8 e 13 w. Any one of
these sizes is selectable. For details, contact your service representative.
*2
Banner Paper
Width: 8-1/4 to 11-11/16 (210 to 297 mm)
Length: 18 to 47-1/4 (457 to 1,200 mm)
Number of sheets loaded in
output tray
Plain paper 250 sheets
Thick 10 sheets
Transparency 1 sheetbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-5
12.2 Machine specifications
12
Number of loadable sheets
(8-1/2 e 11 (A4))
Tray 1 or 2 Plain paper: 500 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2
))/550
sheets (17 lb (64 g/m2
)), Thick 1: 400 sheets,
Thick 1+: 280 sheets, Thick 2: 250 sheets, Thick
3: 200 sheets
Tray 3 Plain paper: 1,500 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80
g/m2
))/1,650 sheets (17 lb (64 g/m2
)), Thick 1:
1,150 sheets, Thick 1+: 800 sheets, Thick 2: 700
sheets, Thick 3: 600 sheets, Postcard: 200 sheets
Tray 4 Plain paper: 1,000 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80
g/m2
))/1,100 sheets (17 lb (64 g/m2
)), Thick 1: 750
sheets, Thick 1+: 500 sheets, Thick 2: 450 sheets,
Thick 3: 400 sheets, Postcard: 200 sheets
Bypass tray Plain paper: 150 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2
)),
Thick 1: 100 sheets, Thick 1+: 80 sheets, Thick 2:
70 sheets, Thick 3: 60 sheets, Thick 4: 50 sheets,
Transparency: 20 sheets, Postcard or label sheet:
50 sheets, Envelope: 10 sheets
Warm-up time Period from the time the [main power switch] was turned on to the time
[sub power switch] was turned on to get ready for printing (room temperature is 73.4 °F (23 °C))
C652/C652DS: 30 sec. or less
C552/C552DS: 60 sec. or less
C452: 60 sec. or less (Black: 30 sec. or less)
Period from the time [main power switch] was turned on to the time this
machine is ready for printing (room temperature is 73.4 °F (23 °C))
C652/C652DS: 39 sec. or less
C552/C552DS: 39 sec. or less
C452: 60 sec. or less (Black: 45 sec. or less)
Warm-up time may vary depending on the operating environment and usage.
Image chipping width Top edge 3/16 (4.2 mm)
Bottom edge 1/8 (3.0 mm)
Right edge 1/8 (3.0 mm)
Left edge 1/8 (3.0 mm)
First copy
(When 8-1/2 e 11 v (A4 v)
printing)
C652/C652DS
Full color: 5.5 sec. or less
Black: 3.8 sec. or less
C552/C552DS
Full color: 6.0 sec. or less
Black: 4.3 sec. or less
C452
Full color: 6.0 sec. or less
Black: 4.8 sec. or less
Specificationbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-6
12.2 Machine specifications
12
Copy speed (When 8-1/2 e
11 (A4) printing)
Full Color
(Simplex/Duplex)
C652/C652DS
Plain paper: 50 sheets/min., Thick1 or 1+: 32
sheets/min., Thick2, 3 or 4, Special paper, Glossy
mode: 25 sheets/min.
C552/C552DS
Plain paper: 45 sheets/min., Thick1 or 1+: 28
sheets/min., Thick 2, 3 or 4, Special paper,
Glossy mode: 23 sheets/min.
C452
Plain paper: 45 sheets/min., Thick1 or 1+: 28
sheets/min., Thick2, 3 or 4, Special paper, Glossy
mode: 23 sheets/min.
Black
(Simplex/Duplex)
C652/C652DS
Plain paper: 65 sheets/min., Thick1 or 1+: 32
sheets/min., Thick2, 3 or 4, Special paper, Glossy
mode: 25 sheets/min.
C552/C552DS
Plain paper: 55 sheets/min., Thick1 or 1+: 28
sheets/min., Thick2, 3 or 4, Special paper, Glossy
mode: 23 sheets/min.
C452
Plain paper: 45 sheets/min., Thick1 or 1+: 28
sheets/min., Thick2, 3 or 4, Special paper, Glossy
mode: 23 sheets/min.
Copy magnification Full size: 100.0% ± 0.5%
Enlarge: 121.4%, 129.4%, 154.5%, or 200.0% (115.4%, 122.4%, 141.4%,
or 200.0%)
Reduce: 78.5%, 73.3%, 64.7%, or 50.0% (86.6%, 81.6%, 70.7%, or
50.0%)
Manual: 25.0 to 400.0% (in 0.1% steps)
Number of continuous
copies
1 to 9999 sheets
Density adjustment Copy density Manual density adjustment (9 levels)
Background density Manual or automatic density adjustment (9 levels)
Power supply North American model (inch): AC 120 V, 16 A, 60 Hz
European model (cm): AC 220 - 240 V, 10 A, 50/60 Hz
Max. power consumption C652/C652DS: 2,100W
C552/C552DS: 2,000 W
C452: 2,000 W
Size Width 25-9/16 e Depth 30-9/16 (excluding panel)/34-5/8 (including
panel) e Height 45-1/2 (including ADF)
(Width 650 mme Depth 777 mm (excluding panel)/879 mm (including
panel) e Height 1,155 mm (including ADF))
Machine occupation dimensions
C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS:
Width 100-9/16 e Depth 60-1/16 e Height 64-15/16
(Width 2,554 mm e Depth 1,525 mm e Height 1,650 mm)
The dimensions above are measured when the finisher (FS-526) tray extension, paper trays and LCU (LU-204) are pulled out, and the ADF is open.
C452:
Width 84-9/16 e Depth 60-1/16 e Height 64-15/16
(Width 2,148mm e Depth 1,525mm e Height1,650mm)
The dimensions above are measured when the finisher (FS-527) tray extension and paper trays and LCU (LU-204) are pulled out, and the ADF is
open.
Memory size (hard disk capacity)
2,048 MB (250 GB)
Weight bizhub C652/C552/C452 :Approx. 487-13/16 lb (Approx. 221 kg)
bizhub C652DS/C552DS :Approx. 223 kg
Specificationbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-7
12.2 Machine specifications
12
Automatic duplex unit
Reverse automatic document feeder (bizhub C652/C552/C452)
Reverse automatic document feeder (bizhub C652DS/C552DS)
Specification
Paper type Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2
)), Thick1 (24-3/16 lb to 31-
15/16 lb (91 to 120 g/m2
)), Thick1+ (32-3/16 lb to 41-3/4 lb (121 to 157
g/m2
)), Thick2 (42 lb to 55-5/8 lb (158 to 209 g/m2
)), Thick3 (55-7/8 lb to
68-1/8 lb (210 to 256 g/m2
))
Paper size 12-1/4 e 18 w, 12 e 18 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w, A3 w to B6 w, A6 w, 8 e 13
w*1
, 16K w/v, 8K w, 4 e 6 w
Width: 3-15/16 to 12-1/4 (100 to 311.1 mm), Length: 5-13/16 to 18 (148 to
457.2 mm)
*1
There are six types of foolcaps: 8-1/2 e 13-1/2 w, 220 e 330 mmw,
8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, and 8 e 13 w. Any one of
these sizes is selectable. For details, contact your service representative.
Power supply Supply from machine
Specification
Original feed function 1-sided original, 2-sided original, mixed original
Original types 1-sided Plain paper (9-5/16 lb to 55-7/8 lb (35 to 210
g/m2
))
2-sided, mixed original
Plain paper (13-5/16 lb to 34-1/16 lb (50 to 128
g/m2
))
Original Size 1-Sided/2-Sided Originals: 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A3 w to B6 w,
A6 w, 8 e 13 w
For details on handling mixed originals, refer to p. 5-16.
Original loading capacity 1- or 2-sided original: Max. 100 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2
))
Power supply Supply from machine
Max. power consumption 60 W or less
Size Width 24-5/16 e Depth 22-5/8 e Height 5-1/8
(Width 618 mm e Depth 575 mm e Height 130 mm)
Weight Approx. 35-1/4 lb (Approx. 16 kg)
Specification
Original feed function 1-sided original, 2-sided original, mixed original
Original types 1-sided, 2-sided Plain paper (9-5/16 lb to 55-7/8 lb (35 to 210
g/m2
))
mixed original Plain paper (13-5/16 lb to 34-1/16 lb (50 to 128
g/m2
))
Original Size 1-Sided/2-Sided Originals: 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, A3 w to B6 w, A6
w, 8 e 13 w
For details on handling mixed originals, refer to p. 5-16.
Original loading capacity 1- or 2-sided original: Max. 100 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2
))
Power supply Supply from machine
Max. power consumption 80 W or less
Size Width 24-5/16 e Depth 22-5/8 e Height 5-1/8
(Width 618 mm e Depth 575 mm e Height 129 mm)
Weight Approx. 39-11/16 lb (Approx. 18 kg)bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-8
12.3 Options
12
12.3 Options
Large capacity unit LU-301
Large capacity unit LU-204
*
The maximum number of loadable sheets for each paper size is 2,500 sheets (for 21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2
)) or
2,750 sheets (for 17 lb (64 g/m2
)).
Specification
Paper type Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2
)), Thick 1 (24-3/16 lb to 31-
15/16 lb (91 to 120 g/m2
)), Thick 1+ (32-3/16 lb to 41-3/4 lb (121 to 157
g/m2
)), Thick 2 (42 lb to 55-5/8 lb (158 to 209 g/m2
)), Thick 3 (55-7/8 lb to
68-1/8 (210 to 256 g/m2
))
Paper size 8-1/2 e 11 v, A4 v
Number of loadable sheets Plain paper: 3,000 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2
))/3,300 sheets (17 lb (64
g/m2
)), Thick 1: 2,500 sheets, Thick 1+: 1,750 sheets, Thick 2: 1,550
sheets, Thick 3: 1,300 sheets
Power supply Supply from machine
Max. power consumption 22W or less
Size Width 14-7/16e Depth 20-13/16e Height 15-15/16
(Width 367 mm e Depth 528 mm e Height 405 mm)
Weight Approx. 39-11/16 lb (Approx. 18 kg)
Specification
Paper type Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2
)), Thick 1 (24-3/16 lb to 31-
15/16 lb (91 to 120 g/m2
)), Thick 1+ (32-3/16 lb to 41-3/4 lb (121 to 157
g/m2
)), Thick 2 (42 lb to 55-5/8 lb (158 to 209 g/m2
)), Thick 3 (55-7/8 lb to
68-1/8 lb (210 to 256 g/m2
))
Paper size
*
12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w to 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, A3w, B4 w, A4 w/v
Number of loadable sheets Plain paper: 2,500 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2
))/2,750 sheets (17 lb (64
g/m2
)), Thick 1: 2,000 sheets, Thick 1+: 1,450 sheets, Thick 2: 1,250
sheets, Thick 3: 1,000 sheets
Power supply Supply from machine
Max. power consumption 22W or less
Size Width 24-3/4e Depth 21-7/8e Height 15-15/16
(Width 629 mm e Depth 556 mm e Height 405 mm)
Weight Approx. 55-1/8 lb (Approx. 25 kg)bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-9
12.3 Options
12
Finisher FS-526
Specification
Output tray Output tray 1, output tray 2
Feeding function Group, Sort, Offset Group
*
, Offset Sort
*
, Staple
*
*
Fed into output tray 2
Paper type Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 to 90 g/m2
))
Thick (24-3/16 lb to 79-13/16 lb (91 to 300 g/m2
)), transparency, postcard, envelope, label sheet, letterhead paper, colored paper
Staple: Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2
))
Thick (24-3/16 lb to 55-5/8 lb (91 to 209 g/m2
))
*
*
Can be used only as a cover page
Paper size